Added old abandoned KDE3 version of koffice

git-svn-id: svn://anonsvn.kde.org/home/kde/branches/trinity/applications/koffice@1077364 283d02a7-25f6-0310-bc7c-ecb5cbfe19da

272 files changed, 14578 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/doc/kword/ChooseTempDia.png b/doc/kword/ChooseTempDia.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..10852c0e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/ChooseTempDia.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Makefile.am b/doc/kword/Makefile.am
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..085981d9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Makefile.am
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+
+KDE_LANG = en
+KDE_DOCS = AUTO
+
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut1.png b/doc/kword/Tut1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f2203f595
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut11a.png b/doc/kword/Tut11a.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..349690bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut11a.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut11b.png b/doc/kword/Tut11b.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7d8ae6d0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut11b.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut13.png b/doc/kword/Tut13.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0af51f9c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut13.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut13a.png b/doc/kword/Tut13a.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..82a8cf935
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut13a.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut14.png b/doc/kword/Tut14.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..44101725f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut14.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut14a.png b/doc/kword/Tut14a.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8754ea732
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut14a.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut14b.png b/doc/kword/Tut14b.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..01863a1fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut14b.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut15.png b/doc/kword/Tut15.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4c685c187
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut15.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut15b.png b/doc/kword/Tut15b.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..77ec43309
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut15b.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut16.png b/doc/kword/Tut16.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d753485ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut16.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut18.png b/doc/kword/Tut18.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..01863a1fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut18.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut19.png b/doc/kword/Tut19.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c997e2731
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut19.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut2.png b/doc/kword/Tut2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..06844d062
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut21.png b/doc/kword/Tut21.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..48948a3ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut21.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut22.png b/doc/kword/Tut22.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..191b2cb15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut22.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut3.png b/doc/kword/Tut3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..64ed92984
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut4.png b/doc/kword/Tut4.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a75b86435
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut4.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut7.png b/doc/kword/Tut7.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8c12d42ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut7.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/Tut8.png b/doc/kword/Tut8.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fc9d6d1e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/Tut8.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/a11y.docbook b/doc/kword/a11y.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bcf95101a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/a11y.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,365 @@
+<chapter id="a11y">
+<chapterinfo>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Gary</firstname>
+<surname>Cramblitt</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</chapterinfo>
+
+<title>For Users with Disabilities</title>
+<para>This section of the documentation discusses accessibility features in &kword;
+for users with disabilities. Some of these features apply to &kde; as a whole and are controlled from 
+<ulink url="help:kcontrol">&kcontrolcenter;</ulink>.  Some apply to all &koffice; applications,
+and some are specific to &kword;.</para>
+
+<sect1 id="a11y-install">
+<title>Installing the <command>kdeaccessibility</command> Module</title>
+<indexterm><primary>kdeaccessibility</primary></indexterm>
+<para>
+Most of the features described in this chapter are enabled by installing the
+<command>kdeaccessibility</command> module.  
+The <command>kdeaccessibility</command> module is part of the &kde; project
+<ulink url="http://www.kde.org">http://www.kde.org</ulink>.  The <command>kdeaccessibility</command> 
+package can be obtained from &kde-ftp;, the
+main ftp site of the &kde; project.
+</para>
+
+<para>Many distributions offer precompiled binaries on their ftp sites.  Please check your distribution's web sites for more information.</para>
+
+<para>More information about &kde; accessibility can be obtained by
+visiting <ulink url="http://accessibility.kde.org/">http://accessibility.kde.org/</ulink>.
+</para>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="a11y-sight">
+<title>Visual Impairments</title>
+<indexterm><primary>Visual Impairments</primary></indexterm>
+
+<note><para>&kword; is not usable by totally blind users.  It is hoped that
+a general screen reader for the blind will be available in future versions of &kde;.
+</para></note>
+
+<sect2 id="a11y-theming">
+<title>Theming</title>
+<indexterm><primary>Theming</primary></indexterm>
+<para>For low-sighted or light allergic users, several features are available in the &kcontrolcenter; 
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Appearance &amp; Themes</guimenu><guimenuitem>Theme Manager</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, 
+like high contrast color themes. If you are light allergic, the
+<guilabel>HighContrastDark</guilabel> or <guilabel>HighContrastLight</guilabel> themes
+may be helpful.  If you have difficulty reading small fonts or seeing small icons, the
+<guilabel>HighContrastDark-big</guilabel> or <guilabel>HighContrastLight-big</guilabel>
+themes will increase the size of text, buttons, and icons.  You may also customize
+background, colors, fonts, and icons from the same dialog.  A set of monochrome icons
+is available.
+</para>
+
+<tip><para>If you choose one of the <guilabel>Big</guilabel> themes, you may discover that
+some windows are too large to fit your monitor.  Purchasing a larger monitor will be helpful.
+You can drag the portions of the window not visible into the visible area by
+holding down the &Alt; key and dragging with the &LMB; anywhere
+within the screen.  If you have trouble operating a mouse, you can also move screens by pressing
+<keycombo action="simul">&Alt;<keycap>F3</keycap></keycombo>.  In 
+the dropdown Windows Operations Menu, choose 
+<menuchoice><guimenuitem>Move</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
+Move the screen with the arrow keys and press &Esc; to finish the move.
+</para></tip>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="a11y-kmagnifier">
+<title>&kmagnifier;</title>
+<indexterm><primary>magnifier</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <command>kdeaccessibility</command> module includes a screen magnifier
+application called <ulink url="help:kmag">&kmagnifier;</ulink>.
+If it is installed, you can run it from
+<menuchoice><guimenu>K-Button</guimenu><guimenuitem>Utilities</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>KMag (Screen Magnifier)</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
+</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="a11y-tts">
+<title>Text-to-Speech</title>
+<indexterm><primary>Text-to-Speech</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>TTS</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <command>kdeaccessibility</command> module includes a Text-to-Speech
+component called KTTS.  If KTTS is installed, you can configure &kword; to
+speak the text that is under the mouse pointer or speak the text of each
+screen widget as it receives focus.  Before using this feature, first configure
+KTTS.  See <ulink url="help:kttsd">The KTTS Handbook</ulink> for details.
+To turn on the TTS feature in &kword;, 
+select <menuchoice><guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure
+&kword;...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.
+This will display a dialog box.
+Clicking on <guilabel>TTS</guilabel> will allow you to change
+the following:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="tts.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Speak widget under mouse pointer</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>When checked, &kword; will speak the text of each widget
+as the mouse pointer moves over the widget.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Speak widget with focus</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>When checked, &kword; will speak the text of each widget
+as it receives focus.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Speak tool tips</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>When checked, &kword; will speak the popup tool tip
+for each widget in addition to the text of the widget.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Speak What's This</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>When checked, &kword; will speak the What's This help
+for each widget in addition to the text of the widget.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Say whether disabled</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>When checked, &kword; will speak the word "disabled"
+if the widget is currently disabled (grayed).</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Speak accelerators</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>When checked, &kword; will speak the accelerator
+of the widget in addition to the text of the widget.
+Accelerators are the underlined letters you see in the text of the
+widget.  For example, in the main menu, the 
+<menuchoice><guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item
+has the "Q" underlined.  You can choose it by pressing <keycap>Q</keycap>.
+To speak the accelerator, check this option and enter the
+word you want to speak before the accelerator in the
+<guilabel>Prefaced by the word</guilabel> box.  In this
+example shown above, &kword; will speak "Accelerator Q".</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Polling interval</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This option determines how often &kword; will
+check for a change in the widget under the mouse pointer or
+a new focused widget.  You should leave this option on the
+default setting.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<note><para>
+If the <guibutton>TTS</guibutton> option does not appear
+on this screen, you do not have the KTTS component installed
+in your system.
+</para></note>
+
+<note><para>Not all widgets are spoken.  For example,
+the items on the main menubar are not spoken.  The text of the
+&kword; document window is also not spoken, but see 
+<xref linkend="doc-structure"/> for another way to speak the document.
+</para></note>
+
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="a11y-motor">
+<title>Motor Impairments and Mouseless Operation</title>
+<indexterm><primary>Motor Impairments</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>Mouseless Operation</primary></indexterm>
+
+<sect2 id="a11y-kmousetool">
+<title>KMouseTool</title>
+<para>If you can operate a mouse, but have trouble clicking, the
+<ulink url="help:kmousetool">KMouseTool</ulink> application may help.  Run it from
+<menuchoice><guimenu>K-Button</guimenu><guimenuitem>Utilities</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>KMouseTool (Automatik Mouse Click)</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
+</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="a11y-kbd-xaccess">
+<title>XAccess Features</title>
+<indexterm><primary>XAccess</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>Sticky Keys</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>Slow Keys</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>Bounce Keys</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The &kcontrolcenter; offers several keyboard features collectively called XAccess.
+They include:</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Sticky Keys</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This feature permits operation of meta keys, such as
+&Alt;, &Ctrl;, and &Shift; without having to hold the keys down.  It is useful
+when you can only use one finger or one hand to operate the keyboard.
+With <guilabel>Sticky Keys</guilabel> on, press and release a &Alt;, &Ctrl;, or &Shift; key, then
+press another key.  The result is as if you pressed both keys at once.
+Press the &Alt;, &Ctrl;, or &Shift; key again to turn off the sticky key.
+Activate this feature in 
+<menuchoice><guimenu>K-Button</guimenu><guimenuitem>&kcontrolcenter;</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Regional &amp; Accessibility</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Accessibility</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Modifier Keys</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Slow Keys</term>
+<listitem><para>This feature is useful if you have hand tremors or difficulty
+accurately pressing keys.  It prevents
+inadvertent key presses by requiring that a key be held down for a minimum
+time before it is accepted.  Activate this feature in
+<menuchoice><guimenu>K-Button</guimenu><guimenuitem>&kcontrolcenter;</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Regional &amp; Accessibility</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Accessibility</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Keyboard Filters</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Bounce Keys</term>
+<listitem><para>This feature is also useful if you have hand tremors.  It prevents
+inadvertent repeated key presses by preventing another keystroke for
+a certain amount of time.  Activate this feature in
+<menuchoice><guimenu>K-Button</guimenu><guimenuitem>&kcontrolcenter;</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Regional &amp; Accessibility</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Accessibility</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Keyboard Filters</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="a11y-mouse-emulation">
+<title>Mouse Emulation</title>
+<indexterm><primary>Mouse Emulation</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Mouse Emulation permits you to move and click the mouse using the keyboard.
+Press <keycombo>&Alt;<keycap>F12</keycap></keycombo> to activate it.  Use the arrow keys
+to move the mouse pointer to the desired location, and press <keycap>spacebar</keycap>
+to "click" the mouse.  Unfortunately, you cannot use Mouse Emulation to perform
+&RMB; clicks or dragging.
+</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="a11y-mouse-navigation">
+<title>Mouse Navigation</title>
+<indexterm><primary>Mouse Navigation</primary></indexterm>
+<para>This feature permits you to emulate the mouse using the numeric keypad
+of your keyboard.  To activate it, go to
+<menuchoice><guimenu>K-Button</guimenu><guimenuitem>&kcontrolcenter;</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Peripherals</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Mouse</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Mouse Navigation</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
+Check the <guilabel>Move pointer with keyboard (using the num pad)</guilabel> box. When you do this, the other settings will become enabled, and you can customize the keyboard pointer behavior further, if required. 
+ The various keys on the number pad move in the direction you would expect. Note that you can move diagonally as well as up, down, left and right. The <keycap>5</keycap> key emulates a click to a pointer button, typically &LMB;. You change which button is emulated by using the <keycap>/</keycap> key (which makes it &LMB;),
+<keycap>*</keycap> key (which makes it middle mouse button) and <keycap>-</keycap> (which makes it &RMB;).
+ Using the <keycap>+</keycap> emulates a doubleclick to the selected pointer button. You can use the
+<keycap>0</keycap> key to emulate holding down the selected pointer button (for easy dragging),
+and then use the <keycap>.</keycap> to emulate releasing the selected pointer button.
+</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="mousenav.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="a11y-motor-shortcuts">
+<title>Keyboard shortcuts</title>
+
+<para>&kword; has a number of keyboard shortcuts that will be useful
+to users who cannot operate a mouse.  See <xref linkend="keys"/> for
+details.  In addition, the following tips will be useful:
+</para>
+
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para>
+Several of the functions that can only be performed with the mouse in the
+main document panel can be performed with the keyboard in the
+<guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area.  See <xref linkend="doc-structure"/>.
+You can switch from the document panel
+to the <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area by pressing <keycombo action="simul">
+&Alt;<keycap>1</keycap></keycombo>.  Switch to the
+document panel by pressing 
+<keycombo action="simul">&Alt;<keycap>2</keycap></keycombo>.
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Use the <keycap>Menu</keycap> key to pop up the context
+menu.  On most keyboards, the <keycap>Menu</keycap> key is on the righthand
+side of the keyboard between the <keycap>&Windows;</keycap> and &Ctrl;
+keys.  It has a menu icon on it.
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+When inserting a new frame into the document, you can insert the frame
+at the current position of the text caret, instead of positioning it with
+the mouse.  Just press <keycap>&Enter;</keycap> when the crosshairs appear.  You can resize
+the new frame or change its position by changing the numbers in the
+<guilabel>Connect Frame</guilabel> dialog.  See
+<xref linkend="add-text-frame"/> for details.
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+In order to change the properties of a frame or delete a frame, you must first select it.
+To do so without using the mouse, position the text caret anywhere inside the frame and
+choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Select Frame</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the main menubar.  Alternatively, press <keycombo action="simul">&Alt;<keycap>1</keycap></keycombo> to
+go to the <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area,
+scroll to the desired frame, press the <keycap>Menu</keycap> key to pop up the context
+menu and choose 
+<menuchoice><guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+or <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Delete Frame</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>You cannot use the arrow keys to move the text caret into some
+frames within the document panel.  To move the caret inside the frame,
+press <keycombo action="simul">&Alt;<keycap>1</keycap></keycombo> to
+go to the <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area,
+scroll to the desired frame, press the <keycap>Menu</keycap> key to pop up the context
+menu and choose <menuchoice><guimenuitem>Edit Text</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
+</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="a11y-motor-panel-sizing">
+<title>Resizing panels</title>
+
+<para>You can move the sizing bar between the <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area
+and the main document panel by pressing <keycap>F8</keycap>.  A sizing icon appears
+overtop the sizing bar.  Use the arrow keys to move the bar left or right.
+Press <keycap>F8</keycap> again or &Esc; when finished sizing.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="a11y-motor-moving-focus">
+<title>Setting focus to widgets</title>
+
+<para>Normally, one can use the &Tab; and <keycombo action="simul">&Shift;&Tab;</keycombo>
+to move focus from one widget to the next in any application.  However, when focus is on
+the main document in &kword;, pressing &Tab; does not move the focus; instead it inserts
+a tabulator into the document.  You can set focus to any widget that can receive focus by
+pressing <keycombo action="simul">&Alt;<keycap>F8</keycap></keycombo>.  A small lettered box appears
+overtop each widget on the screen that can receive focus.
+</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="kbd-focus-ext.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Press the letter to move focus to the corresponding widget.  Press
+<keycombo action="simul">&Alt;<keycap>F8</keycap></keycombo> again or &Esc;
+to abandon moving the focus.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1> 
+
+</chapter>
diff --git a/doc/kword/addentry.png b/doc/kword/addentry.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0ecdeea3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/addentry.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/addrecord.png b/doc/kword/addrecord.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bb9796d00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/addrecord.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/alignBlock.png b/doc/kword/alignBlock.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5a2e0b898
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/alignBlock.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/alignCenter.png b/doc/kword/alignCenter.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..07f0e5c9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/alignCenter.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/alignLeft.png b/doc/kword/alignLeft.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6aa981854
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/alignLeft.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/alignRight.png b/doc/kword/alignRight.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c725fc197
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/alignRight.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/auto1.png b/doc/kword/auto1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0935d7538
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/auto1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/auto2.png b/doc/kword/auto2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e3c0f22c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/auto2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/auto3.png b/doc/kword/auto3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d41beaaa0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/auto3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/auto4.png b/doc/kword/auto4.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c631d5e1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/auto4.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/autocompdlg.png b/doc/kword/autocompdlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..56d168ccc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/autocompdlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/back.png b/doc/kword/back.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4b7765e42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/back.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/basic.png b/doc/kword/basic.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa46a6758
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/basic.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/basics.docbook b/doc/kword/basics.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cf1ef6133
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/basics.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+<chapter id="kword-screen">
+<chapterinfo>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</chapterinfo>
+<title>The &kword; Window</title>
+
+<sect1 id="screen-overview">
+<title>Overview</title>
+<indexterm><primary>screen</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword;, like most &GUI; based programs, divides
+the window up into several areas. Each area of the window is used to
+perform a group of similar features.  When you examine the &kword;
+window, it is divided into 5 major areas:</para>
+
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic">
+<listitem><para><link linkend="kde-frame">The &kde; Titlebar</link>
+(which remains at the top of all programs run under
+&kde;).</para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mb">The Menubar</link>.</para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para><link linkend="tb">An assortment of
+Toolbars</link>.</para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para><link linkend="kde-docstruct">The Document Structure Area</link>.</para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para><link linkend="da">The Document
+Area</link>, including the rulers and scrollbars.</para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para><link linkend="statb">The Status bar</link>.</para></listitem>
+
+</orderedlist>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject><imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="screen.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject></screenshot>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><emphasis><anchor id="kde-frame"/>The &kde; Titlebar</emphasis></term>
+<listitem><para>The &kde; titlebar sits on top of all applications run under &kde;.
+For more information on the titlebar, please see the &kde; User Guide.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><emphasis><anchor id="mb"/>The Menubar</emphasis></term>
+
+<listitem><para>The menubar provides access to all of &kword;'s functions and
+options.  Each part of the &kword; menubar is detailed in the section
+entitled: <link linkend="basic-menubar">The Menubar</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><emphasis><anchor id="tb"/>The Toolbars</emphasis></term>
+
+<listitem><para>The toolbars provide shortcuts to commonly used functions.
+&kword; uses 8 toolbars, with similar functions grouped together.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><emphasis><anchor id="kde-docstruct"/>Document Structure Area</emphasis></term>
+<listitem><para>The <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area places individual types of data into useful groups 
+(pictures, tables, text, etc) to help you find the correct data in a complicated document.  For 
+more information, see the section on <link linkend="doc-structure">Document Structure</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><emphasis><anchor id="statb"/>The Statusbar</emphasis></term>
+<listitem><para>The status bar provides important information during the editing of your document.
+In the lower left corner, &kword; gives you the current page number and the total number of pages.  There will be helpful text shown in
+the status bar whenever you hold the mouse over a menu item.</para>
+<para>The status bar can be toggled on and off.
+See the section on <link linkend="opt-ui">Configure &kword; User Interface</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><emphasis><anchor id="da"/>The Document Area</emphasis></term>
+
+<listitem><para>The document area consists of:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para><emphasis>Horizontal and Vertical Rulers</emphasis> -
+The rulers can be used to help you layout your document.  For more
+information on rulers, see <link linkend="rulers">Using
+Rulers</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+
+<listitem><para><emphasis>Scrollbars</emphasis> - The scrollbars are used to move through a &kword; document
+quickly.  The &kword; scrollbars functions similar to all scrollbars in
+&kde; or &Windows;.</para>
+<para>The scrollbars can be toggled on and off.
+See the section on <link linkend="opt-ui">Configure &kword; User Interface</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem><para><emphasis>Tab Selector</emphasis> - This is used to select and place tab stops in your document for
+easy formatting.  For more information on tab stops, see the section
+entitled <link linkend="tab-stops">Using Tab Stops</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+
+<listitem><para><emphasis>Document View</emphasis> - This is the area of the screen which is used to enter text.  It
+shows you the current status of your document, and allows you to adjust
+frames, select text, and cut and paste text.  </para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist></listitem>
+
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="rulers">
+<title>Using Rulers</title>
+<indexterm><primary>rulers</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Along the top and left edges of the document area, are a
+horizontal and a vertical ruler.</para>
+
+<para>These rulers measure from the top left corner of the page. </para>
+
+<para>Each ruler has a bright area surrounded by a dark area.  The
+bright area shows the size and location of the currently edited frame
+on that page.  As you change frames, the bright area changes to reflect
+the new frame's settings.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="ruler.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The ruler can measure the page in many common units of measure including:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>Millimeters (mm)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Points (pt)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Inches (in)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Centimeters (cm)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Decimeters (dm)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Pica (pi)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Didot (dd)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Cicero (cc)</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>To change the units of the ruler, place the mouse cursor over one
+of the rulers (either one), and click with the
+&RMB;.</para>
+
+<para>Select the units you want to use from the popup menu.  You will notice both rulers
+change to the new unit of measure.</para>
+
+<para>You may also notice two vertical arrows (one pointed up, the other
+pointed down), on the left side of the bright area of the horizontal
+ruler. These are used to adjust the margin of a paragraph.  For more
+information, see the section entitled <link
+linkend="format-para">Formatting Paragraphs.</link></para>
+
+<para>Finally, you may see some black marks, which are not part of the
+ruler.  They may appear as L shaped, a Reverse-L, an Upside-down T, or
+an Upside-down T with a dot in it.  These are locations of tab stops.
+For more information see the section entitled <link
+linkend="tab-stops">Using Tab Stops</link>.</para>
+
+<tip>
+<para>To quickly format the page layout, you can right mouse click on
+either ruler.  A small sub menu will appear.  Simply select <guilabel>Page Layout...</guilabel>,
+and the <link linkend="page-format">Page Layout Dialog box</link> 
+will appear.</para>
+</tip>
+
+<note>
+<para>If you don't want the rulers in your document area, they
+can be switched off.</para><para> Simply select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Hide Rulers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.  
+This will remove the rulers from the document area. Simply select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Show Rulers</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to display the rulers again.
+</para>
+</note>
+
+</sect1>
+
+</chapter>
diff --git a/doc/kword/bbord.png b/doc/kword/bbord.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..218a0ea72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/bbord.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/bdcolorbut.png b/doc/kword/bdcolorbut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9c372cd81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/bdcolorbut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/bdselbut.png b/doc/kword/bdselbut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b93a6ae33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/bdselbut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/bdsizebut.png b/doc/kword/bdsizebut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..31bc4d6c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/bdsizebut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/beginning.png b/doc/kword/beginning.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0e2d3df25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/beginning.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/bkgdcolorbut.png b/doc/kword/bkgdcolorbut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..43ac05c6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/bkgdcolorbut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/bold.png b/doc/kword/bold.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6e353e3b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/bold.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/bookmarks.docbook b/doc/kword/bookmarks.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2015a5366
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/bookmarks.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+<sect1 id="bookmarks">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Document bookmarks</title>
+<indexterm><primary>bookmarks</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Bookmarks are invisible placeholders that allow you to move easily to specified points in a large document.</para>
+<tip><para>Some other wordprocessors have bookmarks as part of their interface.  If you are familiar with their use, you will 
+find that &kword; functions in a similar manner.</para></tip>
+<para>It should be noted that bookmarks are attached to the <emphasis>text</emphasis> near the cursor, not the page location.  If 
+the text moves forward or backward in the document (as text is inserted or deleted respectively), the bookmark moves with the text.</para>
+<sect2 id="bookmark-add">
+<title>Creating a new bookmark</title>
+<para>Creating a bookark is simple.</para>
+<para>Place the cursor where you want the bookmark to be inserted.  Select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Bookmark...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+<para>A small dialog box will appear.</para>
+<para>Type a short description of the bookmark location (i.e. Chapter 1, Appendix, Abstract, etc). This description will identify the
+bookmark for you.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to create the bookmark.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to your document without creating a bookmark.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="bookmark-jump">
+<title>Jump to a previously created bookmark</title>
+<para>To jump to a previously created bookmark, select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Select Bookmark...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+<para>A small dialog will appear.  Double click on the desired bookmark with the &LMB;.  You will immediately be taken to
+the location in the document that is attached to that bookmark. </para>
+<note><para>Alternatively, you can click once on the desired bookmark with the &LMB;, and then click on
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  This will function the same as double clicking on the bookmark.</para></note>
+</sect2>
+
+
+<sect2 id="bookmark-rename">
+<title>Rename a bookmark</title>
+<para>To rename a bookmark, select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Select Bookmark...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+<para>A small dialog will appear.  Click on the desired bookmark with the &LMB;.  Now click <guibutton>Rename Bookmark</guibutton>.
+A small dialog will appear.  Enter the new name for your bookmark.  Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  The
+bookmark is renamed immediately.
+</para></sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="bookmark-delete">
+<title>Delete a bookmark</title>
+<para>To delete a bookmark, select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Select Bookmark...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+<para>A small dialog will appear.  Click on the desired bookmark with the &LMB;.  </para>
+<warning><para>Be sure you have selected the correct bookmark from the list before proceeding.  &kword; does not ask for
+confirmation before deleting the selected bookmark.</para></warning>
+<para>Now click <guibutton>Delete Bookmark</guibutton>.
+The bookmark is deleted immediately.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+
+
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/borbutB.png b/doc/kword/borbutB.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..66624ae71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/borbutB.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/borbutL.png b/doc/kword/borbutL.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..889074a95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/borbutL.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/borbutR.png b/doc/kword/borbutR.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fbcc60442
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/borbutR.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/borbutT.png b/doc/kword/borbutT.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bd8555aff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/borbutT.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/bord.png b/doc/kword/bord.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e414b5a6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/bord.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/bordtb.png b/doc/kword/bordtb.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1f3711c1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/bordtb.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/bullist.png b/doc/kword/bullist.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d0eda054b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/bullist.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/cftb.png b/doc/kword/cftb.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5f4036758
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/cftb.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/chapnumb.docbook b/doc/kword/chapnumb.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bbeb8a062
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/chapnumb.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+ <sect1 id="chapter-number">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>-</firstname>
+<surname>-</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+ <title>Chapter numbering</title>
+ <indexterm><primary>chapter numbering</primary></indexterm>
+
+ <para>Not written yet</para>
+ </sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/chcase.png b/doc/kword/chcase.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..051e822a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/chcase.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/chcolorbut.png b/doc/kword/chcolorbut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..51579475a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/chcolorbut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/chfontbut.png b/doc/kword/chfontbut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b748cda50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/chfontbut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/chsizebut.png b/doc/kword/chsizebut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ab8b81214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/chsizebut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/chstylebut.png b/doc/kword/chstylebut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5ee496499
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/chstylebut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/clearright.png b/doc/kword/clearright.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d88f16257
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/clearright.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/colin.png b/doc/kword/colin.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cea3c68d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/colin.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/colorseldlg.png b/doc/kword/colorseldlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..11539ae9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/colorseldlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/colout.png b/doc/kword/colout.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1aa020376
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/colout.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/columns.docbook b/doc/kword/columns.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a48135e8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/columns.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+<sect1 id="columns">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+
+<title>Columns</title>
+<indexterm><primary>columns</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can divide the page into several columns, of equal width, with
+a user controlled space in between each column.</para>
+
+<note>
+<para>This feature is only available in Text Oriented documents.</para>
+
+<para>If you are working in a Page Layout document, you can
+build up several columns using a different frame for each column.</para>
+</note>
+
+<para>To change the number and width of columns select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Page Layout...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+
+<para>This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="wpfmtpg1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>Click on the tab labeled <guilabel>Columns</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>This will change the dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="wpfmtpg2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>You can now select the number of columns in the spin box labeled <guilabel>Columns:</guilabel>, and the spacing
+between columns in the text box labeled <guilabel>Column spacing:</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>The preview box shows you what your page will look like.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when you are done.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort changes.</para>
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/ctab.png b/doc/kword/ctab.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2255874de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/ctab.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/ctab2.png b/doc/kword/ctab2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..777871060
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/ctab2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/decindbut.png b/doc/kword/decindbut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8b8a99717
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/decindbut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/delentry.png b/doc/kword/delentry.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5453f9f57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/delentry.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/delrecord.png b/doc/kword/delrecord.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a8feb98e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/delrecord.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/doccomments.docbook b/doc/kword/doccomments.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0f409ccd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/doccomments.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+<sect1 id="comments">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Document Comments </title>
+<indexterm><primary>comments</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Document comments are included in &kword; to allow you to have your documents read by another 
+person. That person can make comments about the text and the comment will appear right next to the text. </para>
+
+<sect2 id="comments-add"><title>Adding a comment to a document</title>
+<para>To add a comment to a document, select the text you want the comment to apply to.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Comment...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar. This will bring up a small dialog box.</para>
+<para>Type the text of your comment in the dialog box provided. If you click on the 
+<guibutton>Add Author Name</guibutton>, the text will be signed, dated and the current time will be added.</para>
+<note><para>The authors name must be entered in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document Information</link> 
+dialog or the name will not be included.</para></note>
+<para>When you have entered all of your text, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to add your comment.</para>
+<para>The comment will appear as a small yellow box at the cursor location.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="comments-edit"><title>Adding to or changing the comment in a document</title>
+<para>To add more comments or change previous comments place the mouse pointer over the comment you
+want to edit.  Click once with the &RMB;.  A popup menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Edit Comment...</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>You can now make your changes to the comment.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="comments-delete"><title>Deleting a comment from a document</title>
+<para>To delete a comment, place the mouse pointer over the comment you
+want to edit.  Click once with the &RMB;.  A popup menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Remove Comment</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>The comment is immediately deleted.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="comments-hide"><title>Hiding all comments in a document</title>
+<para>To hide all comments, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Configure &kword;...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar. </para>
+<para>This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="opt2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click on <guilabel>Misc</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="opt3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The check box labeled <guilabel>Display comments</guilabel> is used to toggle the comments on and off.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/doclinks.docbook b/doc/kword/doclinks.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8f2c4cb25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/doclinks.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+<sect1 id="links">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Document Links </title>
+<indexterm><primary>document links</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has the ability to insert Internet addresses, email addresses, locations within the current document (bookmarks) and external file locations with a descriptor.  This is most often used to
+create web pages in &kword;.</para>
+
+<para>Once inserted into the document, the descriptor will be visible in &kword;, but when saved as a web document, the descriptor will become
+ the hyperlink for the location specified with the address.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="links-new"><title>Insert a new document link</title>
+<para>To insert a document link select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Link...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar. This will bring up a small dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="linkdlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Using the icon bar on the left, choose which link type you want to insert.</para>
+<para>In the comment field, type the text you want to appear in your web document (for example:  The KOffice Web Site).</para>
+<para>In the address field, type the Internet address, email address or
+file location you want the comment to be linked with (for example:  http://www.koffice.org) </para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+<note><para>By default, &kword; displays links underlined (as in most browsers).  You can turn this behavior on and off by
+selecting <menuchoice> <guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure
+&kword;...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar and selecting the <guilabel>Misc</guilabel> page.  More information can be found
+<link linkend="opt-misc">here</link>.</para></note>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="links-open"><title>Opening a document link</title>
+<para>You an use a document link from within &kword;.</para>
+<para>Simply click once on the document link with the &RMB;.  A popup menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Open Link</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>A document link to a web site will open a new browser window and take you directly to that web site.  A document link to an
+email address, will open a new message in your email program.  A document link to a file will open the appropriate viewer or editor for 
+that file type.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="links-copy"><title>Copy a document link</title>
+<para>You an use a document link in another application, by copying it from a &kword; document.</para>
+<para>Simply click once on the document link with the &RMB;.  A popup menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Copy Link</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>The link address has now been inserted into the clipboard.  You can paste your clipboard entry into any other application.</para>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="links-edit"><title>Changing a document link</title>
+<para>To change the details of a document link Simply click 
+once on the document link with the &RMB;.  A popup menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Change Link...</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>The <guilabel>Insert Link</guilabel> dialog box will appear, with the current settings of the link displayed.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="linkdlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Make any appropriate changes and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to make your changes.</para>
+
+</sect2><sect2 id="links-delete"><title>Deleting a document link</title>
+<para>You can delete a document link like any other text in your document.</para>
+<para>Simply place the cursor at the end of the document link, and press &Backspace;.  Alternatively, place 
+the cursor at the beginning of the document link and press <keycap>Delete</keycap> on the keyboard. The document link is deleted in its entirety.</para>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="links-remove"><title>Converting a document link to text</title>
+<para>If a document link is no longer needed as a link, but you want to preserve the text that is the link, click once on the document link with the &RMB;.  A popup menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Remove Link...</guilabel>.  The linked text will now become plain text, and the link will be deleted.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/docstruct.docbook b/doc/kword/docstruct.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cef30613d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/docstruct.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+<sect1 id="doc-structure">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title><guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel></title>
+<indexterm><primary>document structure</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sometimes, when editing a complicated document, it can be helpful to look at an organized view of your document.</para>
+<para>You can use this organized view to jump immediately to certain text
+frames, select picture frames, change frame properties, delete frames,
+ or simply review your document.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="doc-structure-view">
+<title>Show and hide <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area</title>
+<para>Because simple documents do not need the information provided in the <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area, &kword; 
+has the ability to toggle the <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area on and off.</para>
+<para>To toggle the <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area on and off, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Show Doc Structure</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar to make the <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area visible.  Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Hide Doc Structure</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar to make the <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area disappear.</para>
+
+<para>You can move focus to the document structure area by pressing
+<keycombo>&Alt;<keycap>1</keycap></keycombo>.  You can move focus to the main document panel by pressing
+<keycombo>&Alt;<keycap>2</keycap></keycombo>.
+</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="doc-structure-navigate">
+<title>Navigating the document structure area</title>
+<para>Lets examine a sample <guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="docstruct.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>As you can see, there are five groups of frames categorized (<guilabel>Text
+Frames/Frame Sets</guilabel>
+<guilabel>Pictures</guilabel>, <guilabel>Tables</guilabel>, <guilabel>Formula
+Frames</guilabel>, 
+<guilabel>Embedded Objects</guilabel>).</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Text Frames/Frame Sets</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Within this category, is a list of all text framesets.  Below
+each frameset, each frame is listed.  Below each frame, each paragraph is
+listed.</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Pictures</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Within this category is a list of all frames that contain
+pictures, and the folder the pictures were loaded from.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Tables</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Within this category is a list of all frames that contain
+tables.  Note that a table behaves very much like a frameset.
+Each cell of the table is a frame, and each frame may contain
+multiple paragraphs.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Formula Frames</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Within this category is a list of all frames that contain
+formulas.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Embedded Objects</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Within this category, is an alphabetical list of all frames
+that contain data from other &koffice; applications.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+<para>You can use your mouse to select the category you want, or first
+put focus in the document structure area (press <keycombo>&Alt;<keycap>1</keycap></keycombo>)
+then use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the list.
+Double click on a category to expand or collapse the category,
+or press the right or left arrow keys.</para>
+
+<note><para>Depending on your document, you may not have all categories in your
+<guilabel>Document Structure</guilabel> area.  The category only 
+appears when there is <emphasis>at least one</emphasis> frame in the
+category.</para></note>
+
+</sect2>
+
+
+<sect2 id="doc-structure-edit">
+<title>Edit a text frame, frameset, or paragraph using the document structure area</title>
+<para>To edit a text frame, frameset, or paragraph, click on the
+item with the &RMB; or scroll to the item and press the
+<keycap>Menu</keycap> key.  A popup menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Edit
+Text</guilabel> from the menu.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="doc-structure-speak">
+<title>Speak the text of a text frame, frameset, or paragraph using the document structure area</title>
+<para>If you have the KTTS component installed in your system, you can have the computer
+speak the text of the document.  To speak the text of a frame, frameset, or paragraph, click on the
+item with the &RMB; or scroll to the item and press the
+<keycap>Menu</keycap> key.  A popup menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Speak
+Text</guilabel> from the menu.</para>
+
+<tip>
+<para>The <guilabel>Speak Text</guilabel> menu item will be disabled if KTTS
+is not installed in your system.
+</para>
+<para>If KTTS fails to speak the text, or speaks the text in the wrong
+language, make sure you have a <guilabel>Talker</guilabel> in
+KTTS configured with the correct language.  See <ulink url="help:kttsd">The KTTS Handbook</ulink>
+for details.  Also, make sure the <guilabel>Global Language</guilabel> is properly
+set in the &kword; settings.
+</para>
+</tip>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="doc-structure-show"><title>Jump to a frame, frameset, or paragraph using the document structure area</title>
+<para>To display a frame, frameset, or paragraph in the main document panel, click on the
+item with the &RMB; or scroll to the item and press the
+<keycap>Menu</keycap> key.  A popup menu will appear. Select <guilabel>Show</guilabel>
+ from the menu.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="doc-structure-delete"><title>Delete frame or frameset using the document structure area</title>
+<para>To delete a frame or frameset, click on the
+frame title with the &RMB; or scroll to the frame title and press the
+<keycap>Menu</keycap> key.  A popup menu will appear. Select <guilabel>Delete
+Frame</guilabel> from the menu.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="doc-structure-properties"><title>Edit a frame or paragraph properties using the document structure area</title>
+<para>To change the properties of a frame or paragraph, click on the
+item with the &RMB; or scroll to the item and press the
+<keycap>Menu</keycap> key.  A popup menu will appear.  Select
+<guilabel>Properties</guilabel> from the menu.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/docstruct.png b/doc/kword/docstruct.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..10a52edfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/docstruct.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/docvariables.docbook b/doc/kword/docvariables.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d8e8cc971
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/docvariables.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,486 @@
+<sect1 id="variables">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Document Variables </title>
+<indexterm><primary>variables</primary><secondary>introduction</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A variable is a simple way of allowing &kword; to modify the document in <emphasis>very</emphasis>
+specific ways to reflect the changing nature of the document or report.</para>
+<para>A variable can be a number (such as a page number, the total number of pages in a document, etc), 
+a selection of words (clients name, product name, the documents filename, etc),
+a date, a time, or nearly anything you desire.</para>
+<para>Once the variable is defined, a <emphasis>placeholder</emphasis> is inserted in the document.
+&kword; will replace this placeholder with the value of that variable each time the placeholder is used.</para>
+<para>Variables can either be <emphasis>fixed</emphasis> (which means that once inserted, their value does not
+change), or <emphasis>variable</emphasis> (where the placeholder is 
+<link linkend="update-variables">updated by &kword;</link> to reflect
+the current value of the variable).</para>
+<para>This chapter will begin with a few examples of commonly used variables 
+(<link linkend="insert-date">date</link>,
+<link linkend="insert-time">time</link>, and
+<link linkend="page-number">page numbers</link>),
+then detail the
+<link linkend="misc-variable">remaining variables</link>
+ available to you.  Finally, it will detail how to
+<link linkend="custom-variables">create 
+custom variables</link> for documents.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="date-time"><title>Date and Time</title>
+<para>Many letters, reports and documents contain
+information about the dates or times they correspond to.  The date and time
+information may establish the creation of a document (which will remain 
+fixed as long as the document is around), or the date and time may serve as
+a notice of the last date of modification (which would change with each passing day).</para>
+<para>&kword; allows for both fixed and variable date and time variables in the document.</para>
+<sect3 id="insert-date"><title>Insert Date</title>
+<indexterm><primary>variables</primary><secondary>insert date</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>insert date</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To insert the date in the document, simply place the cursor in the text box where the date
+should be inserted and select
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Date</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.  This will bring up several selections. To insert the current date, select one of two 
+options:
+<guimenuitem>Current date (fixed)</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Current date (variable)</guimenuitem>.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Current date (fixed)</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem><para>Selecting this option will insert the current date into the current cursor position.
+This date is determined by checking with the computers system clock.  Once entered, this value
+will not change, even when &kword; is asked to <link linkend="update-variables">update the document
+variables</link>.</para>
+<para>This item is ideal for dates of document creation, or when including data in a report from todays work.
+Compare this choice to <guimenuitem>Current date (variable)</guimenuitem>.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Current date (variable)</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem><para>Selecting this option will insert the current date into the current cursor position.
+This date is determined by checking with the computers system clock.  This value will
+change when &kword; is asked to <link linkend="update-variables">update the document
+variables</link>.</para>
+<para>This option is good for any point in the document where the current date is always wanted.
+Compare this choice to <guimenuitem>Current date (fixed)</guimenuitem></para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+<para>Once the date has been selected, a dialog box will appear.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="insdate.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>The top combo box determines the layout of the variable.  Your choices are:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Locale date format</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This inserts the date in the format specified in the
+&kde; Control Center.</para>
+<para>To select this option, simply make sure the upper combo box says
+<guilabel>Locale date format</guilabel>.  A preview of the date format will appear above the
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button.  If satisfied click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.
+</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Preformatted date strings</term>
+<listitem><para>&kword; comes with 19 predefined date strings. These predefined strings will
+be all that are needed in most circumstances. Simply select the predefined string in the upper
+combo box.  A preview of the date format will appear above the
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button.  If satisfied click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.
+</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Custom String</term>
+<listitem><para>If the appropriate format for the date cannot be found, it is possible to create custom
+date format strings.</para>
+<para>A date format string consists of a list of letters and numbers which follow
+specific rules (which are outlined below) to create the completed date.</para>
+<para>The date format string consists of <emphasis>placeholders</emphasis> and
+<emphasis>separators</emphasis>.  The placeholders are defined in the following three tables.</para>
+<para><emphasis>Days</emphasis></para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="5">
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>Day placeholders</entry><entry>d</entry><entry>dd</entry><entry>ddd</entry><entry>dddd</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Example</entry><entry>6</entry><entry>06</entry><entry>Thu</entry><entry>Thursday</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para><emphasis>Months</emphasis></para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="3">
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>Month placeholders</entry><entry>M</entry><entry>MM</entry><entry>MMM</entry><entry>MMMM</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Example</entry><entry>3</entry><entry>03</entry><entry>Mar</entry><entry>March</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para><emphasis>Year</emphasis></para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="3">
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>Year placeholders</entry><entry>yy</entry><entry>yyyy</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Example</entry><entry>02</entry><entry>2002</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>Simply combine placeholders with normal text (separators) to create completed date strings. </para>
+
+<para>For example:</para>
+<para><quote>MM/dd/yyyy</quote> is translated to 01/06/2004</para>
+<para>and</para>
+<para><quote>MMMM d, yyyy</quote> becomes January 6, 2004</para>
+<para>Notice that only the placeholders change.  Spaces, commas, slashes and other text remains unchanged.</para>
+<note><para>It is important to remember that placeholders are case sensitive.
+<quote>DD</quote> is not a placeholder,
+ only <quote>dd</quote>.</para></note>
+<para>To create a custom date string, place a mark in the <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> check box.</para>
+<para>Now type placeholders and separators text into the upper combo box.  Alternatively
+select the format from the <guilabel>Insert:</guilabel>
+combo box, and the
+placeholder will be inserted into the date format string at the cursor location.</para>
+
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>There is a spinbox labeled <guilabel>Correct in Days</guilabel>.  You can use this spin box to adjust the date up or 
+down one or more days from the current date.</para>
+
+<para>A preview of the current date
+string is visible above the
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button.  Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when
+the date format string is correct to insert the variable into the document.</para>
+
+<tip><para>Once the date has been inserted into the document, it can be reformatted to a different layout
+and toggled between fixed and variable dates.  Simply click once with the &RMB; on the date.
+A small menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Change Variable To</guilabel> and a submenu will appear.  Select your new
+variable or new layout from the menu and the variable is immediately updated. </para></tip>
+
+<!-- -->
+<para> There are three additional dates you can insert into your document:</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Date of Last Printing</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem><para>Selecting this option will insert the date this document was last printed into the current cursor position.
+</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Date of File Creation</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem><para>Selecting this option will insert the date this document created into the current cursor position.
+</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Date of File Modification</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem><para>Selecting this option will insert the date this document was last edited into the current cursor position.
+</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+
+<!--row><entry>Date of Last Printing</entry><entry>Any date format</entry><entry>The date this document was last printed.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Date of File Creation</entry><entry>Any date format</entry><entry>The date this document was created.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Date of File Modification</entry><entry>Any date format</entry><entry>The date this document was edited.</entry></row>
+-->
+
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="insert-time"><title>Insert Time</title>
+<indexterm><primary>variables</primary><secondary>insert time</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>insert time</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To insert the time in the document, simply place the cursor in the text box where the time should
+be inserted and select
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Time</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.  This will bring up two selections:
+<guimenuitem>Current time (fixed)</guimenuitem> and <guimenuitem>Current time (variable)</guimenuitem>.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Current time (fixed)</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem><para>Selecting this option will insert the current time into the current cursor position.
+This time is determined by checking with the computers system clock.  Once entered, this value
+will not change, even when &kword; is asked to <link linkend="update-variables">update the document
+variables</link>.</para>
+<para>This item is ideal for timestamps.
+Compare this choice to <guimenuitem>Current time (variable)</guimenuitem>.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Current time (variable)</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem><para>Selecting this option will insert the current time into the current cursor position.
+This time is determined by checking with the computers system clock.  This value will
+change when &kword; is asked to <link linkend="update-variables">update the document
+variables</link>.</para>
+<para>This option is good for any point in your document where the current time is always wanted.
+Compare this choice to <guimenuitem>Current time (fixed)</guimenuitem></para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+<para>This brings up a dialog box.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="instime.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>The top combo box determines the layout of the variable.  The choices are:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Locale format</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This inserts the time in the format specified in the
+&kde; Control Center.</para>
+<para>To select this option, simply make sure the upper combo box says
+<guilabel>Locale format</guilabel>.  A preview of the current time
+string is visible above the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button.  If satisfied click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.
+</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Preformatted time strings</term>
+<listitem><para>&kword; comes with 6 predefined time strings. These predefined strings will
+be all that are needed in most circumstances. Simply select the predefined string in the upper
+combo box.  A preview of the current time
+string is visible above the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. If satisfied click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Custom String</term>
+<listitem><para>If the appropriate format cannot be found, a custom
+time format string can be created.</para>
+<para>A time format string consists of a list of letters and numbers which follow
+specific rules (which are outlined below) to create the completed time.</para>
+<para>The time format string consists of <emphasis>placeholders</emphasis> and
+<emphasis>separators</emphasis>.  The placeholders are defined in the following five tables.</para>
+<para><emphasis>Hours</emphasis></para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>Hour placeholders</entry><entry>h</entry><entry>hh</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Example</entry><entry>6</entry><entry>06</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para><emphasis>Minutes</emphasis></para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="3">
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>Minutes placeholders</entry><entry>m</entry><entry>mm</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Example</entry><entry>3</entry><entry>03</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para><emphasis>Seconds</emphasis></para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="3">
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>Seconds placeholders</entry><entry>s</entry><entry>ss</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Example</entry><entry>2</entry><entry>02</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para><emphasis>Milliseconds</emphasis></para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="1">
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>Milliseconds placeholders</entry><entry>zzz</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Example</entry><entry>022</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para><emphasis>Seconds</emphasis></para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="3">
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>AM/PM placeholders</entry><entry>ap</entry><entry>AP</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Example</entry><entry>am</entry><entry>AM</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+
+<para>Simply combine placeholders with normal text (separators) to create completed time strings. </para>
+
+<para>For example:</para>
+<para><quote>hh:mm:ss</quote> becomes 06:23:13</para>
+<para>and</para>
+<para><quote>h:mm ap</quote> becomes 6:23 am</para>
+<para>Notice that only the placeholders change.  Spaces, colons and other text remains unchanged.</para>
+<note><para>It is important to remember that placeholders are case sensitive.
+<quote>HH</quote> is not a placeholder,
+ only <quote>hh</quote></para></note>
+<para>To create a custom time string, place a mark in the <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> check box.</para>
+<para>Type the placeholders and separator text into the upper combo box.  Alternatively,
+you can select the format from the <guilabel>Insert:</guilabel>
+combo box, and the
+placeholder will be inserted into the time format string at the cursor location.</para>
+<para>A preview of the current time
+string is visible below the <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> check box.  Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when
+the time format string is correct to insert the variable into your document.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>A preview of the current time
+string is visible below the <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> check box.  Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when
+the time format string is correct to insert the variable into your document.</para>
+
+<tip><para>Once the time has been inserted into the document, it can be reformatted to a different layout
+and toggled between fixed and variable times.  Simply click once with the &RMB; on the time in the document.
+A small menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Change Variable To</guilabel> and a submenu will appear.  Select your new
+variable or new layout from the menu and the variable is immediately updated. </para></tip>
+
+</sect3>
+
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="page-number"><title>Page Numbering </title>
+<indexterm><primary>variables</primary><secondary>insert page numbers</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>insert page numbers</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Inserting page numbers is easy in &kword;.</para>
+<para>There are five variables that relate to page numbers: <guilabel>Page Number</guilabel>, 
+<guilabel>Number of Pages</guilabel>,<guilabel>Section Title</guilabel><guilabel>Next Page</guilabel>, 
+and <guilabel>Previous Page</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>To insert the current page number, place the cursor where you want the page number and select
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Page</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Page Number</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.  The page number will be inserted at the current cursor location.</para>
+<para>To insert the total number of pages, place the cursor where you want the variable and select
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Page</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Number of Pages</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.  The total number of pages will be inserted.</para>
+<para>To insert the title of the section, place the cursor where you want the variable and select
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Page</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Section Title</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.  The section title will be inserted.</para>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Page</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Next Page</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar, a reference to the page number after the current page will be inserted at the current cursor location.</para>
+<para>Likewise, by selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Page</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Previous Page</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar, a reference to the page number before the current page will be inserted at the current cursor location.</para>
+
+<note><para>Page numbers are updated dynamically as the document
+is edited.</para></note>
+<tip><para>Page numbers are usually best located within
+<link linkend="headers-and-footers">headers and footers</link>.  This ensures that
+every page will have a page number at the appropriate place.</para></tip>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="misc-section-title"><title>Section Title</title>
+<para>You can insert the section title anywhere in your document by selecting
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Page</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Section Title</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar. </para>
+<para>&kword; determines the Section title by beginning a search from the top of the current page.  The first paragraph with a style of
+<emphasis>Head 1</emphasis> is the section title.  If there are no paragraphs on the current page, &kword; does the same search along 
+on previous pages until it finds a section title.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="misc-variable"><title>Other Variables </title>
+<indexterm><primary>variables</primary><secondary>miscellaneous variables</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; provides other commonly used variables that you might find useful. This set of variables
+are specific to the document.  You can insert these variables by selecting
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Document Information</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.  This will bring up a list of variables.  The variables are detailed below.
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="3">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Variable</entry><entry>Example</entry><entry>Details</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>Author Name</entry><entry>Joseph User</entry><entry>The name of the author as specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>City</entry><entry>Philadelphia</entry><entry>The city specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Company</entry><entry>&kde;</entry><entry>The company name specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Country</entry><entry>United States</entry><entry>The country name specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Directory Name</entry><entry>/home/juser/kword</entry><entry>This is the folder name for the document. The filename is not included in the folder name variable.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Directory &amp; Filename</entry><entry>/home/juser/kword/Resume.kwd</entry><entry>The folder and filename of the current file.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Document Abstract</entry><entry>This is a current resume.</entry> <entry>The document abstract specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Document Keywords</entry><entry>Resume, job, application</entry> <entry>The document keywords specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Document Subject</entry><entry>My resume.</entry> <entry>The document subject line specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Document Title</entry><entry>My Resume</entry><entry>The document title specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Email</entry><entry>joeuser@kde.org</entry><entry>The email address of the author as specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Fax</entry><entry>Any valid telephone number</entry><entry>The fax machine number specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>File Name</entry><entry>Resume.kwd</entry><entry>The complete name of the file.</entry></row> 
+<row><entry>File Name without extension</entry><entry>Resume</entry><entry>The filename without the suffix (usually .kwd).</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Initials</entry><entry>JCU</entry><entry>The initials specified in the authors section of the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Postal code</entry><entry>Any valid postal code</entry><entry>The postal code specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Street</entry><entry>123 Main St.</entry><entry>The street address specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Telephone (work)</entry><entry>Any valid telephone number</entry><entry>The telephone number specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Telephone (private)</entry><entry>Any valid telephone number</entry><entry>The telephone number specified in the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Title</entry><entry>Director of Information Systems</entry><entry>The title specified in the authors section of the <link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable></para>
+<para>Additionially, there are numerous variables under the <guilabel>Statistics</guilabel> submenu for inserting the number of words, lines, frames, etc.  These variables should be self explanitory.</para>
+<note><para>Uninitialized variables will appear as &lt;none&gt;, until you define their
+value in the
+<link linkend="documentinfo">Document information</link> box.</para></note>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="custom-variables"><title>Custom Variables </title>
+<indexterm><primary>variables</primary><secondary>custom</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has many predefined variables.  You may encounter documents where it would be nice
+to define your own variables for a document.  </para>
+<para>Using <emphasis>Custom Variables</emphasis>, you can create an unlimited number of variables for each document.</para>
+<sect3 id="new-custom-variables"><title>Create a new custom variable</title>
+<indexterm><primary>variables</primary><secondary>create custom variable</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To create a new custom variable, place the cursor at the location in the document to insert the new variable.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Custom</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.  This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+<para>Enter the variable name and its current value in the text boxes provided.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to create the new variable name and insert it at the current
+cursor location.  Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel the creation of the new variable.</para>
+
+<para>It is now possible to <link linkend="insert-custom-variables">insert this new variable</link> at any
+place in your document.</para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="edit-custom-variables"><title>Edit a custom variables value</title>
+<indexterm><primary>variables</primary><secondary>edit custom variables</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>In order for variables to be useful, you need to be able to give them a value, and be able to
+change that value easily.  To change the value of a variable:</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Custom Variables...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.
+This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+<para>Each custom variable has a line in this table.  The first column is the name of the variable, and
+the second column is the value.</para>
+<para>To change the value of a variables, simply click within the text box to the right of
+the variable name. Enter the desired value.</para>
+<para>When all the changes have been complete, simply click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and all the 
+variables will be updated.</para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="insert-custom-variables"><title>Insert a custom variable</title>
+<indexterm><primary>variables</primary><secondary>insert custom variable</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To insert a new custom variable select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Custom</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar. The custom variable is listed in the submenu.  Click on the name of
+the variable and &kword; will insert the variable, with its current value, at the cursor location.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="update-variables"><title>Updating All Variable Values </title>
+<indexterm><primary>variables</primary><secondary>updating</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can tell &kword; to update all variable values (to make sure all variables are set to their
+current values).  This is <emphasis>especially</emphasis> important with dates and times.</para>
+<para>Simply select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Refresh All Variables</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="update-variables-one"><title>Updating One Date or Time Variable Value </title>
+<para>You can tell &kword; to update a single date or time variable value, and leave the others unchanged.</para>
+<para>Simply place the mouse pointer over the variable you want to update and click with the &RMB;. 
+Select <guimenuitem>Change Variable To</guimenuitem>.  A small menu will appear which will show
+several new date or time formatting options and the option to change either dates or times to fixed or variable time formats.  Simply select
+the new option and this variable will be updated.</para>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/dtab.png b/doc/kword/dtab.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c8513bd29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/dtab.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/dtab2.png b/doc/kword/dtab2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0c5d00d13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/dtab2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/dtpfmtpg1.png b/doc/kword/dtpfmtpg1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..63518acd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/dtpfmtpg1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/editcopy.png b/doc/kword/editcopy.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1e6c38ad2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/editcopy.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/editcut.png b/doc/kword/editcut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..84ba0e15d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/editcut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/editing.docbook b/doc/kword/editing.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..733da6677
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/editing.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,1903 @@
+<chapter id="guides-2">
+<chapterinfo>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</chapterinfo>
+<title>Detailed Guides: Editing your Document</title>
+
+<para>This section of the guide will cover more advanced features of
+data editing.  This section focuses entirely on text data.  For working
+with other types of data, please see the section entitled <link linkend="guides-4">More than just text</link>.</para>
+
+<sect1 id="select">
+<title>Selecting Text</title>
+<indexterm><primary>selecting text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>For many editing and formatting functions in &kword;, certain actions (bold face, underline,&etc;) should be
+applied to a
+certain section of text, not the document as a whole. You specify which
+text should be altered by selecting (or highlighting) the text you want changed.</para>
+
+<para>Selected text has a colored background to separate it from
+unselected text.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="select1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Select text by designating a start and an end
+point.  All the text in between the start and end point is selected
+text.</para>
+
+<para>Text can be selected with either the <link linkend="select-with-mouse">mouse</link> or the <link linkend="select-with-keyboard">keyboard</link>. </para>
+
+<sect2 id="select-with-mouse">
+<title>Using The Mouse</title>
+
+<para>To select text with the mouse, place the mouse pointer at the start point.  Click and hold down the
+&LMB; and drag the mouse pointer. This
+selects all text between the initial click of &LMB; and the
+current position of the mouse cursor.  When the mouse pointer is at the desired end point, release the button. 
+The start and endpoints will become fixed.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="select-with-keyboard">
+<title>Using The Keyboard</title>
+<para>To use the keyboard, &kword; takes the initial position of the text cursor as the start point.  
+Use the following key combinations to move the endpoint to the desired location.
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2" align="left">
+<thead><row><entry align="center">Key Combination</entry><entry align="left">Function</entry></row></thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Left Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Moves the endpoint one character to the left.</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Left Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Moves the endpoint one word to the left.</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Right Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Moves the endpoint one character to the Right.</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Right Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Moves the endpoint one word to the Right.</entry></row>
+
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Up Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the character directly up one line.</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Up Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the first character of the line directly above.</entry></row>
+
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Down Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the character directly down one line.</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Down Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the last character of the line directly below.</entry></row>
+
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Home</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the beginning of the line.</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Home</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the beginning of the document.</entry></row>
+
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>End</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the end of the line.</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>End</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the end of the document.</entry></row>
+
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Page-Up</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Moves the current endpoint one screen up.</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Page-Up</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Moves the current endpoint one page up. The endpoint is located at the first character of this page.</entry></row>
+
+
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Page-Down</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Moves the current endpoint down one screen.</entry></row>
+
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Page-Down</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Moves the current endpoint down one page.  The endpoint is locate at the first character of this page.</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="center"><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>A</keycap></keycombo></entry><entry>Select all text in the current frameset.</entry></row>
+
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>Once the start and endpoints have been defined, all text between the startpoint and endpoint is selected.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="views">
+<title>Using Multiple Views</title>
+<indexterm><primary>views</primary><secondary>using multiple</secondary></indexterm>
+<sect2 id="views-intro">
+<title>Introduction</title>
+<para>When editing very large documents, there will be times when it is helpful to 
+edit two parts of the document.  In a situation such as this, 
+&kword; can open additional windows to edit the <emphasis>same</emphasis> document.</para>
+<para>These new windows are called <emphasis>Views</emphasis>, since they provide 
+a different viewpoint of the the same document.</para>
+<para>Views are very important tools when working with large documents.
+Set one view to edit one part of the document, and using the other view, freely
+move through the document making updates and changes.  These changes are automatically revealed in all views.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="views-new">
+
+<title>Creating a new view</title>
+<indexterm><primary>views</primary><secondary>create new view</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>Creating a new view creates an entirely new window, with toolbars, menubars etc.
+Compare this with the <link linkend="views-split">Split View</link> command.</para>
+
+<para>To create a new view select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>New View</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar. </para>
+
+<para>A new window will be created.  Alterations to your document can be made in either view.
+Updates in one window will be immediately visible in the other.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="views-split">
+<title>Splitting the current view into two separate views. </title>
+<indexterm><primary>views</primary><secondary>split current view</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>It is also possible to split one view into two views.  Both views are contained within one window, and
+use the same toolbars, menubars, etc.  Contrast this to the effect of the <link linkend="views-new">New View</link> command.</para>
+
+<para>To split the current view, select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split View</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar. </para>
+
+<para>The current document area will be split into two views. Alterations to your document can be made in either view.
+Updates in one view will be immediately visible in the other.</para>
+
+<tip><para>The views can either be split horizontally or vertically.  See the next section for instructions.</para></tip>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="views-split-orientation">
+
+<title>Changing the split view orientation </title>
+<indexterm><primary>views</primary><secondary>change split view orientation</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>To change the direction that the views are split, simply select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guisubmenu>Splitter Orientation</guisubmenu></menuchoice> from the menubar.
+This will show a submenu.  Select either <guilabel>Horizontal</guilabel> or <guilabel>Vertical</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>All views in the current window will immediately change to the new orientation.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="views-adjust-size">
+
+<title>Changing the size of views </title>
+<indexterm><primary>views</primary><secondary>resizing</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>The relative sizes of each view can be adjusted with your mouse.</para>
+<para>To adjust the view size, look at the border between the scrollbar of one view
+(the upper or right view) and the ruler of the other view (the lower or left view).  There is a
+solid border which appears raised between the scrollbar and the ruler. As the mouse pointer passes
+over this bar, it changes from an arrow to double lines with double arrows.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="viewsize.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para>When the mouse pointer changes, click once with the &LMB; and hold the button
+down.  Drag that border to the new location.  When the mouse button is released, the
+views will change to the new proportions.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="views-remove">
+
+<title>Remove View </title>
+<indexterm><primary>views</primary><secondary>removing</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>To remove a view, simply place the mouse pointer in the view to be deleted and click with the &LMB;.
+Then select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove View</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="views-close">
+
+<title>Close all views </title><para>To close all views,  select
+<indexterm><primary>views</primary><secondary>closing all views</secondary></indexterm>
+<menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Close All Views</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="undo-redo">
+<title>Undo/Redo</title>
+<indexterm><primary>undoing last edit</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>redoing previously undone edit</primary></indexterm>
+<para>It happens all the time.  While working on a document, a change is made.
+The change was wrong, now you want to back out of your changes.</para>
+
+<para>Fortunately, &kword; has a solution.</para>
+
+<para>Each time a change is made to a document, &kword; remembers what
+the change was.  &kword; can
+<emphasis>Undo</emphasis> each change once a time. </para>
+
+<para>As an example, you are writing a business letter and type in the following sentence:</para>
+
+<informalexample><para>It is a pleasure for me to give you this letter of introduction to your newest employee.</para></informalexample>
+
+<para>But that doesn't seem right, so you change it:</para>
+
+<informalexample><para>It is a joy for me to give you this letter of introduction to your newest employee.</para></informalexample>
+
+<para>You decide it was better the first time and you want to change it back.</para>
+
+<para>Simply select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+
+<para>The text now reads <quote>pleasure</quote> again.</para>
+
+<informalexample><para>It is a pleasure for me to give you this letter of introduction to your newest employee.</para></informalexample>
+
+<para>If, after you Undo a change, and then want to reverse that decision,
+select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Redo</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and
+the Undo is reversed.</para>
+
+<note>
+<para>Sometimes it is not possible for &kword; to undo an edit.  In these instances, &kword; 
+will display the <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem> function gray and the function is not
+accessible.</para>
+
+<para>Othertimes, &kword; will only perform a partial undo of the previous task.
+This is because &kword; processes changes to documents differently then might
+initially be expected.  Simply select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+again, and more of the edits will be undone.</para>
+</note>
+<para>By default, &kword; keeps track of the last 30 edits to the document.
+This number can be adjusted up or down.  For details, see <link linkend="opt-misc">Configuring &kword;</link>.</para>
+<para>The <emphasis>Undo</emphasis> and <emphasis>Redo</emphasis> commands can
+be accessed from the menubar (as in the examples above), by using keyboard shortcuts or from the toolbar.</para>
+
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="3">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Command</entry><entry>Toolbar Button</entry><entry>Keyboard Shortcut</entry></row>
+</thead><tbody>
+<row><entry>Undo</entry><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="undo.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry>Redo</entry><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="redo.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="clipboard">
+
+<title>Cut/Copy/Paste and the Clipboard</title>
+<indexterm><primary>clipboard</primary><secondary>using</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <quote>clipboard</quote> is a concept familiar to most people
+who have used modern word processors. It is a piece of your computers
+memory which is set aside as a temporary storage space.  Text can be
+<quote>Cut</quote> or <quote>Copied</quote> from your document into
+the clipboard.  You can move to another part of the document or to
+another application entirely, and <quote>Paste</quote> this text at the new
+location. </para>
+
+<para>The most common use for the clipboard is to move or copy text
+which has already entered into one part of the document to another
+part of the same document or to another document entirely.</para>
+
+<para>This concept is probably best described with an example.</para>
+
+<para>To do this, we begin with a test sentence</para>
+
+<informalexample><para>The big, red fox jumped over the lazy dog.</para></informalexample>
+
+<para>Using the mouse or keyboard, select the phrase 
+<quote> big, red</quote> (notice the space before <quote>big</quote> is selected).</para>
+
+<para>Now select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>This has moved a copy of the selected text to the
+clipboard.</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Now place the mouse cursor directly behind the word 
+<quote>lazy</quote> and click once.</para>
+
+<para>Now select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+
+<para>The resulting sentence is: </para>
+
+<informalexample><para>The big, red fox jumped over the lazy big, red dog</para></informalexample>
+
+<para>The clipboard is not limited to text.
+The clipboard can contain tables, pictures, spreadsheets or any other type of information.</para>
+<sect2 id="local-copy">
+
+<title>The <guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem> Command</title>
+<indexterm><primary>clipboard</primary><secondary>copying text to</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>The <guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem> command can be invoked 4 ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>By clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="editcopy.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+on the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Using the keyboard shortcut: <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>C</keycap></keycombo> or the alternate keyboard shortcut: 
+<keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Insert</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>After the text is selected, click once with the &RMB; and hold the button down. 
+A small popup menu will appear.  Simply select <guilabel>Copy</guilabel></para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>The <guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem> command moves a copy of the selected data
+to the clipboard.  <emphasis>The original data is
+unaffected.</emphasis></para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="local-cut">
+<title>The <guimenuitem>Cut</guimenuitem> Command</title>
+<indexterm><primary>clipboard</primary><secondary>moving text to</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>The <guimenuitem>Cut</guimenuitem> command can be invoked 4 ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Cut</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>By clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="editcut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+on the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Using the keyboard shortcut: <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>X</keycap></keycombo> or the alternate keyboard shortcut: 
+<keycombo
+action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Delete</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>After the text is selected, click once with the &RMB; and hold the button down. 
+A small popup menu will appear.  Simply select <guilabel>Cut</guilabel></para>
+</listitem></itemizedlist>
+
+<para>The <guimenuitem>Cut</guimenuitem> command moves a copy of the selected data
+to the clipboard.  <emphasis>The selected data is then deleted from the
+document.</emphasis></para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="local-paste">
+<title>The <guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem> Command</title>
+<indexterm><primary>clipboard</primary><secondary>moving text from</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>The <guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem> command can be invoked 4 ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>By clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="editpaste.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+on the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Using the keyboard shortcut: <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>V</keycap></keycombo> or the alternate keyboard shortcut: 
+<keycombo
+action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Insert</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Place the cursor where the contents of the clipboard
+should be inserted. Click once with the &RMB; and hold the button down. A small
+popup menu will appear.  Simply select <guilabel>Paste</guilabel></para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>The <guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem> command inserts a copy of all the data in
+the clipboard at the current position of the cursor.  The clipboard is
+unaffected. (So another paste command will produce yet another copy of
+the data in the document.)</para>
+
+<note>
+<para>If no text in the document is currently highlighted, the
+<guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem> command <emphasis>inserts</emphasis>
+the data at the current position of the cursor.</para>
+
+<para>If there is selected text when the
+<guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem> command is executed, the selected text
+is <emphasis>replaced</emphasis> with the contents of the
+clipboard.</para> 
+</note>
+
+<tip><para>The clipboard is not limited to the bounds of the current document.  If
+text is copied (or cut) from a document, this text can be pasted
+into another open document, or another application entirely.</para></tip>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="search-and-replace">
+<title>Finding and Replacing Text</title>
+
+<sect2 id="find">
+<title>The <guimenuitem>Find</guimenuitem> Command</title>
+<indexterm><primary>searching for text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>finding text in a document</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <quote>Find</quote> command can be invoked 3 ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use the keyboard shortcut:<keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>F</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>By clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="find.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on
+the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>When the Find Command is invoked, a dialog appears.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="finddlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<sect3><title>Basic Text Search</title>
+<para>The combo box labelled <guilabel>Text to find</guilabel>,
+provides a place for you to enter the text of your search command. (In
+the screenshot, that box is currently filled with
+<emphasis>KDE</emphasis>).</para> 
+
+<para>If you click on
+<guibutton>Find</guibutton>, then &kword; will search the document until it
+finds a match to your text.  If &kword; cannot find a match, a dialog
+box will appear that says <guilabel>No matches found for "Text to find"</guilabel>.  </para>
+<tip><para>If you want to repeat a recent search, simply select the arrow in the drop-down
+box and a list of your most recent searches will appear.  Simply select your search
+from the list and click <guibutton>Find</guibutton>.</para></tip>
+
+</sect3>
+<sect3>
+<title>Refining Your Search</title>
+
+<para>&kword;'s find feature is much more sophisticated than we
+discussed above.  Using the options in the dialog box, you can narrow
+down your search to find <emphasis>exactly</emphasis> what you
+want.</para>
+
+<sect4>
+<title>Regular Expressions in &kword;</title>
+
+<para>The default action for &kword; is to search for an exact match of
+the text.  &kword; has the ability to match text
+that follows a <emphasis>pattern</emphasis> or a set of rules.  </para>
+
+<para>To enable patterns, place a mark in the box labeled <guilabel>Regular expression</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>This will enable the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button.
+This button can be a quick way to create regular expressions for people unfamiliar
+with &UNIX; regular expressions.</para>
+
+<para>A more thourough discussion of regular expressions in KDE can be found in the help manual for &kregexpeditor;, which can be found in the &khelpcenter;.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4 id="find-formatting"><title>Formatting options</title>
+<para>&kword; also has the ability to search your document for text that matches
+certain formatting options as well as the text itself.</para>
+
+<para>To include formatting options in your search, click the button labeled
+<guibutton>Show Formatting Options</guibutton>. </para>
+
+<para>Once <guibutton>Show Formatting Options</guibutton> has been clicked,  a new dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="finddlg2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>You can use this dialog to select the options you want to include in your search.</para>
+<para>The left column consists of 13 check boxes.  If there is a mark in the check box, then &kword; will evaluate
+any searchable text for that property.  If no mark is in the check box, &kword; does not consider that property when performing a search.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Family:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this combo box to select the font family you want to include in your search text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Size:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this spin box to set the font size you want &kword; to search for.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Color:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Background color:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Clicking on either of these two buttons allows you to select the font color and/or background color respectively,
+you want &kword; to search
+for.  For more information on selecting a color, see the
+section on <link linkend="select-colors">Selecting Colors from the Color Dialog</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Bold:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Italic:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use these <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>/<guilabel>No</guilabel> radio boxes to determine whether you want &kword;
+to include boldface or italicized fonts in the search text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Strikeout:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>None</guilabel>, <guilabel>Single</guilabel>, <guilabel>Double</guilabel> 
+or <guilabel>Simple Bold</guilabel> to modify your search.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Underline:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>None</guilabel>, <guilabel>Single</guilabel>, <guilabel>Double</guilabel>, <guilabel>Simple Bold</guilabel> 
+or <guilabel>Wave</guilabel> to modify your search.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Vertical alignment:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>Normal</guilabel>, <guilabel>Subscript</guilabel> or
+<guilabel>Superscript</guilabel> to determine what font alignment you want &kword; to search for.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Shadow:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Word by word:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use these <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>/<guilabel>No</guilabel> radio boxes to determine whether you want &kword;
+to include shadow text in the search text and whether to search for word by word underlining and strikethrough text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Capitalization:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>Normal</guilabel>, <guilabel>Uppercase</guilabel>, <guilabel>Lowercase</guilabel>,  or
+<guilabel>Small Caps</guilabel> to determine what capitalization you want &kword; to search for.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Language:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select the language of the text you want &kword; to search for using this dropdown box.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+<para>Once you have selected your options, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to accept your search options.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to ignore all changes.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to restore the options dialog box to the default values.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> to remove all marks from the checked options.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4>
+<title>Other Search options</title>
+
+<para>In addition to pattern matching, you can limit the search results
+with a few useful options.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Case sensitive</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When this option is selected, &kword; will not only search for the
+string of letters, but will verify that the case of the letters is the
+same.  For example.  Searching for:
+<emphasis>KDE</emphasis></para><para>will match:
+<emphasis>KDE</emphasis> and
+<emphasis>hiddenKDEinwords</emphasis> </para><para>but not: <emphasis>Kde,
+kde</emphasis> or <emphasis> hiddenkdeinwords</emphasis>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Find backwards</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This option changes the direction of the search.  This can be
+useful when you only want to search for a string of text before the
+current cursor position, not after.  This option is usually used in
+conjunction with <guilabel>From cursor</guilabel>, but if that option is
+not specified, &kword; will start searching from the end of the document
+backwards.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Whole words only</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When this option is selected, &kword; will only return search
+items that are surrounded by spaces, paragraph marks or punctuation. For
+example.  Searching for:  <emphasis>KDE</emphasis></para><para>will
+match: <emphasis>KDE</emphasis></para><para> but not: <emphasis>
+hiddenKDEinwords</emphasis> or <emphasis>KDElike</emphasis>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Selected Text</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>If you want to limit your search to a specific part of
+the document (a few paragraphs, for example), you can select the part of
+the document you want to search <emphasis>prior</emphasis> to selecting
+the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> command.  When text is selected, &kword;
+will default to only searching the selected text.  You can use this
+option to enable or disable this restriction.</para>
+<note>
+<para>This option will not be available if you have not selected text
+prior to selecting the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> command.</para>
+</note>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>From cursor</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By default, &kword; begins searching at the beginning of the
+document.  If this option is selected, &kword; begins its search from
+the current position of the cursor. The direction that &kword; searches
+is, by default forward in the document, but can be changed with the
+<guilabel>Find backwards</guilabel> option.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+</sect4>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="replace">
+<title>The <guimenuitem>Replace</guimenuitem> Command</title>
+
+<para>The <guimenuitem>Replace</guimenuitem> command is an extension of the <guimenuitem>Find</guimenuitem> command. If you
+are familiar with the <guimenuitem>Find</guimenuitem> command, you will see many
+similarities.</para>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Replace</guilabel> command can be invoked 2
+ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Replace...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use the keyboard shortcut: <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>R</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>When the <guilabel>Replace</guilabel> command is invoked, a dialog
+appears.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="repldlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<sect3><title>Basic Search and Replace</title>
+<indexterm><primary>replacing text</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The combo box labeled <guilabel>Text to find:</guilabel>,
+provides a place for you to enter the text of your search command. (In
+the screenshot, that box is currently filled with
+<emphasis>KDE</emphasis>)</para>
+
+<para>You can enter your replacement text in the text box labeled
+<guilabel>Replacement text:</guilabel>. You can now click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to replace all occurrences in the document, or
+you can further refine your search.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3>
+<title>Refining Your Search</title>
+
+<para>&kword;'s find feature is much more sophisticated than we
+discussed above.  Using the options in the dialog box, you can narrow
+down your search to find <emphasis>exactly</emphasis> what you
+want.</para>
+
+<sect4>
+<title>Regular Expressions in &kword;</title>
+
+<para>The default action for &kword; is to search for an exact match of
+the text.  &kword; has the ability to match text
+that follows a <emphasis>pattern</emphasis> or a set of rules.  </para>
+
+<para>To enable patterns, place a mark in the box labeled <guilabel>Regular expression</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>This will enable the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button.
+This button can be a quick way to create regular expressions for people unfamiliar
+with &UNIX; regular expressions.</para>
+
+<para>A more thourough discussion of regular expressions in KDE can be found in the help manual for &kregexpeditor;, which can be found in the &khelpcenter;.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4><title>Formatting options</title>
+<para>&kword; also has the ability to search your document for text that matches
+certain formatting options as well as the text itself.</para>
+
+<para>To include formatting options in your search, click the button labeled
+<guibutton>Show Formatting Options</guibutton>. </para>
+
+<para>Once <guibutton>Show Formatting Options</guibutton> has been clicked,  a new dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="finddlg2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>You can use this dialog to select the options you want to include in your search.</para>
+<para>The left column consists of 13 check boxes.  If there is a mark in the check box, then &kword; will evaluate
+any searchable text for that property.  If no mark is in the check box, &kword; does not consider that property when performing a search.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Family:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this combo box to select the font family you want to include in your search text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Size:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this spin box to set the font size you want &kword; to search for.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Color:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Background color:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Clicking on either of these two buttons allows you to select the font color and/or background color respectively,
+you want &kword; to search
+for.  For more information on selecting a color, see the
+section on <link linkend="select-colors">Selecting Colors from the Color Dialog</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Bold:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Italic:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use these <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>/<guilabel>No</guilabel> radio boxes to determine whether you want &kword;
+to include boldface or italicized fonts in the search text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Strikeout:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>None</guilabel>, <guilabel>Single</guilabel>, <guilabel>Double</guilabel> 
+or <guilabel>Simple Bold</guilabel> to modify your search.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Underline:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>None</guilabel>, <guilabel>Single</guilabel>, <guilabel>Double</guilabel>, 
+<guilabel>Simple Bold</guilabel> or <guilabel>Wave</guilabel> to modify your search.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Vertical alignment:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>Normal</guilabel>, <guilabel>Subscript</guilabel> or
+<guilabel>Superscript</guilabel> to determine what font alignment you want &kword; to search for.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Shadow:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Word by word:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use these <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>/<guilabel>No</guilabel> radio boxes to determine whether you want &kword;
+to include shadow text in the search text and whether to search for word by word underlining and strikethrough text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Capitalization:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>Normal</guilabel>, <guilabel>Uppercase</guilabel>, <guilabel>Lowercase</guilabel>,  or
+<guilabel>Small Caps</guilabel> to determine what capitalization you want &kword; to search for.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Language:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select the language of the text you want &kword; to search for using this dropdown box.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+<para>Once you have selected your options, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to accept your search options.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to ignore all changes.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to restore the options dialog box to the default values.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> to remove all marks from the checked options.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4>
+<title>Other Search options</title>
+
+<para>In addition to pattern matching, you can limit the search results
+with a few useful options.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Case sensitive</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When this option is selected, &kword; will not only search for the
+string of letters, but will verify that the case of the letters is the
+same.  For example.  Searching for:
+<emphasis>KDE</emphasis></para><para>will match:
+<emphasis>KDE</emphasis> and
+<emphasis>hiddenKDEinwords</emphasis> </para><para>but not: <emphasis>Kde,
+kde</emphasis> or <emphasis> hiddenkdeinwords</emphasis>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Find backwards</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This option changes the direction of the search.  This can be
+useful when you only want to search for a string of text before the
+current cursor position, not after.  This option is usually used in
+conjunction with <guilabel>From cursor</guilabel>, but if that option is
+not specified, &kword; will start searching from the end of the document
+backwards.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Whole words only</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When this option is selected, &kword; will only return search
+items that are surrounded by spaces, paragraph marks or punctuation. For
+example.  Searching for:  <emphasis>KDE</emphasis></para><para>will
+match: <emphasis>KDE</emphasis></para><para> but not: <emphasis>
+hiddenKDEinwords</emphasis> or <emphasis>KDElike</emphasis>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Selected Text</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>If you want to limit your search to a specific part of
+the document (a few paragraphs, for example), you can select the part of
+the document you want to search <emphasis>prior</emphasis> to selecting
+the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> command.  When text is selected, &kword;
+will default to only searching the selected text.  You can use this
+option to enable or disable this restriction.</para>
+<note>
+<para>This option will not be available if you have not selected text
+prior to selecting the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> command.</para>
+</note>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>From cursor</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By default, &kword; begins searching at the beginning of the
+document.  If this option is selected, &kword; begins its search from
+the current position of the cursor. The direction that &kword; searches
+is, by default forward in the document, but can be changed with the
+<guilabel>Find backwards</guilabel> option.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>Once you have selected your options, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to accept your search options.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to ignore all changes.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to restore the options dialog box to the default values.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> to remove all marks from the checked options.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4 id="replace-formatting-text"><title>Replace with formatted text</title>
+<para>&kword; also has the ability to replace the found text with formatted text.</para>
+
+<para>To include formatting options in your search, click the button labeled
+<guibutton>Show Formatting Options</guibutton> in the <guilabel>Replace With</guilabel> section. </para>
+
+<para>Once <guibutton>Show Formatting Options</guibutton> has been clicked,  a new dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="finddlg2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>You can use this dialog to select the format of the replaced text.</para>
+<para>The left column consists of 13 check boxes.  If there is a mark in the check box, then &kword; will change
+any replaced text to match the property selected.  
+If no mark is in the check box, &kword; does not consider that property when replacing text.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Family:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this combo box to select the font family you want your replacement text to use.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Size:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this spin box to set the font size you want &kword; to use for your replaced text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Color:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Background color:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Clicking on either of these two buttons allows you to select the font color and/or background color respectively,
+you want &kword; to use.  For more information on selecting a color, see the
+section on <link linkend="select-colors">Selecting Colors from the Color Dialog</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Bold:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Italic:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use these <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>/<guilabel>No</guilabel> radio boxes to determine whether you want &kword;
+to change the fonts to boldface or italicized fonts.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Strikeout:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>None</guilabel>, <guilabel>Single</guilabel>, <guilabel>Double</guilabel> 
+or <guilabel>Simple Bold</guilabel> to use for the replacement text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Underline:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>None</guilabel>, <guilabel>Single</guilabel>, <guilabel>Double</guilabel>, 
+<guilabel>Simple Bold</guilabel> or <guilabel>Wave</guilabel> to use for the replacement text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Vertical alignment:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>Normal</guilabel>, <guilabel>Subscript</guilabel> or
+<guilabel>Superscript</guilabel> to determine what font alignment you want &kword; to use.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Shadow:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Word by word:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use these <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>/<guilabel>No</guilabel> radio boxes to determine whether you want &kword;
+to use shadow text and/or word by word underlining and strikethrough in the replacement text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Capitalization:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>Normal</guilabel>, <guilabel>Uppercase</guilabel>, <guilabel>Lowercase</guilabel>,  or
+<guilabel>Small Caps</guilabel> to determine what capitalization to use for the replacement text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Language:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select the language of the text you will use to replace the found text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>Once you have selected your options, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to accept your text options.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to ignore all changes.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to restore the options dialog box to the initial values prior to making any changes.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> to remove all marks from the checked options.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+<sect4 id="replace-placeholders">
+<title>Using placeholders</title>
+<para>Placeholders are useful when you want to add text to complex search strings.  Currently &kword; has only one placeholder:  
+<emphasis>Complete text string</emphasis>.</para>
+<para>This placeholder will contain the entire text string matched by the <guimenuitem>Find</guimenuitem> command.</para>
+<para>For example:</para>
+<para>You create a search string, using regular expressions:  <emphasis>Reference \d</emphasis></para>
+<note><para>In order for this string example to work, a mark must be placed in the check box labeled 
+<guilabel>Regular expression</guilabel></para>
+<para>Regular expressions are available by placing a mark in this checkbox. The use of regular expressions is beyond the 
+scope of this manual.  For more information see the KDE Regular Expression Manual (Available in the &kde; help center).</para></note>
+<para>Now in the <guilabel>Replace With</guilabel> section of the replace dialog, you place a mark in the check box labeled
+<guilabel>Use placeholders</guilabel>.  Click the <guibutton>Insert Placeholder</guibutton> button and select
+<guilabel>Complete Match</guilabel>.  &kword; will insert a <emphasis>\0</emphasis> in the 
+<guilabel>Replacement text:</guilabel> text box.</para>
+<para>Now surround the placeholder with parentheses, so your text string is:  <emphasis>(\0)</emphasis></para>
+<para>When this is executed, whenever &kword; encounters the find text (ie. <quote>Reference 0</quote>, <quote>Reference 1</quote>,
+<quote>Reference 2</quote>, etc) it will surround the text in parenthesis (<quote>(Reference 0)</quote>, <quote>(Reference 1)</quote>,
+<quote>(Reference 2)</quote>, respectively). </para>
+<para>As you can see, the placeholder will maintain a copy of the search text.  You can use this placeholder to add text to the ends of any
+search string you can imagine.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+<sect4>
+<title>Other Replace Options</title>
+
+<para>Additional options in the dialog are:</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Case sensitive</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When this option is selected, &kword; will not only
+search for the string of letters, but will verify that the case of the
+letters is the same.  For example.  Searching for:
+<emphasis>KDE</emphasis></para><para>will match:
+<emphasis>KDE</emphasis> and <emphasis>hiddenKDEinwords</emphasis> but
+not: <emphasis>Kde, kde</emphasis> or <emphasis>
+hiddenkdeinwords</emphasis>.</para> 
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Find backwards</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This option changes the direction of the search.  This can be
+useful when you only want to search for a string of text before the
+current cursor position, not after.  This option is usually used in
+conjunction with <guilabel>From cursor</guilabel>, but if that option is
+not specified, &kword; will start searching from the end of the document
+backwards.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Whole words only</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When this option is selected, &kword; will only return search
+items that are surrounded by spaces, paragraph marks or punctuation. For
+example.  Searching for:  <emphasis>KDE</emphasis></para><para>will
+match: <emphasis>KDE</emphasis></para><para> but not: <emphasis>
+hiddenKDEinwords</emphasis> or <emphasis>KDElike</emphasis>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Selected Text</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>If you want to limit your search to a specific part of
+the document (a few paragraphs, for example), you can select the part of
+the document you want to search <emphasis>prior</emphasis> to selecting
+the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> command.  When text is selected, &kword;
+will default to only searching the selected text.  You can use this
+option to enable or disable this restriction.</para>
+
+<note>
+<para>This option will not be available if you have not selected text
+prior to selecting the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> command.</para>
+</note>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>From cursor</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By default, &kword; begins searching at the beginning of the
+document.  If this option is selected, &kword; begins its search from
+the current position of the cursor. The direction that &kword; searches
+is, by default forward in the document, but can be changed with the
+<guilabel>Find backwards</guilabel> option.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Prompt on replace</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If this option is selected, &kword; will prompt the user 
+<emphasis>before</emphasis> each replacement.  This allows you to 
+approve or disapprove each replacement. </para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+
+</sect4>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="spell-check">
+<title>Spellchecking</title>
+<indexterm><primary>spelling</primary><secondary>check spelling of document</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>&kword; can compare each word in your document to several commonly available dictionaries.  It will offer you 
+the opportunity to change any words it believes are misspelled.</para>
+<note><para>By default, if any text in the document is selected, 
+&kword; only checks the spelling of currently selected text.</para>  
+<para>If you want to check the spelling of a 
+specific part of your document, simply <link linkend="select">select the text</link> you want to check the 
+spelling of.</para>
+<para>To check the entire document, leave all text in the document unsellected, and &kword; will check 
+the entire document.</para></note>
+<para>You can check the spelling of text 2 ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Spellcheck</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Spelling...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>By clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="spell.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on
+the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>Spellchecking your document is controlled through a dialog
+box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="spelldlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>In this example, the misspelled word &kword; found, was
+<emphasis>youve</emphasis>.  The currently suggested replacement word is listed in the text box labeled
+<guilabel>Replace with:</guilabel>.  In the list box labeled <guilabel>Suggested Words</guilabel> is a list of words
+the spelling program has determined as possible correct spellings.</para>
+
+<para>From here you have eight options:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guibutton>Replace</guibutton></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Replaces the current word with the suggested word.  Only replaces this
+occurrence.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guibutton>Replace All</guibutton></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Replaces all occurrences of the current word with the
+suggested word through the entire document.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guibutton>Ignore</guibutton></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Do not make any changes to this occurrence.  Ask again if this
+word appears further down in the document.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guibutton>Ignore All</guibutton></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Do not make any changes to this or any other occurrence of this word.  Do not
+ask about this word again.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guibutton>Add</guibutton></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Add the current word to the dictionary.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guibutton>Stop</guibutton></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Keep the current changes, but stop any further checking.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<!-- FIXME lueck 08.11.2006 -->
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Stop spellchecking.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guibutton>Help</guibutton></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Loads a help file for the spellchecker.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>When the entire document has been checked, &kword; will return the cursor to the same spot 
+in the document that the spellchecking was begun.</para>
+
+<note>
+<para>If the document does not have any spelling errors, &kword; does
+not show a dialog box informing you there were no spelling errors.</para>
+
+<para>When spellchecking is started, it
+will proceed to check all of the document against the dictionary, and
+if there are no spelling errors it will close the spellcheck dialog box.  With short documents, 
+this may happen quickly. &kword; has spellchecked the document!</para>
+</note>
+
+<para>There are several options for configuring the spelling application used.
+For more details, please see the section entitled
+<link linkend="opt-spell">Configure Spelling</link>.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="auto-spell-check">
+<title>Automatically mark misspelled words</title>
+<indexterm><primary>spelling</primary><secondary>automatically mark misspelled words</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; can check the spelling of your document as you edit it.  It will underline in red any word which 
+it cannot find in the dictionary.  This behavior can be turned on and off by the user. By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Spellcheck</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Autospellcheck</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar you can toggle autospellchecking on and off. </para> 
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="thesaurus">
+<title>Finding related word (Thesaurus)</title>
+<indexterm><primary>thesaurus, using</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>Wordnet</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>related words</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; comes with a small thesaurus based on the Wordnet project. For more information on Wordnet, visit the 
+<ulink url="http://www.cogsci.princeton.edu/~wn/">Wordnet homepage</ulink>.</para>
+<para>You can invoke the thesaurus two ways:  </para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>Simply click on the desired word with the &RMB;.  A popup menu will appear.  Select
+<guimenuitem>Show Related Words</guimenuitem> from the menu and a dialog will appear.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Show Related Words</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>Which ever method you choose, &kword; opens the &kthesaurus; dialog box.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="thesaurus.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>The word you selected from your document appears in the combo box labeled <guilabel>Search for:</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>There are three columns of alternate words:  <guilabel>Synonyms</guilabel>, <guilabel>More General words</guilabel> (hypernyms), <guilabel>More Specific Words</guilabel> (hyponyms).</para>
+<para>If you find an appropriate alternate word, simply click on the word in the list, and this word will now be listed in the text box labeled
+<guilabel>Replace With:</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>To finalize the replacement click <guibutton>Replace</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>To keep your original word, click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>To obtain more specific help, or for help on using the full version of Wordnet, click the <guibutton>Help</guibutton> button for help with
+&kthesaurus; (including additional thesauri for non-english languages).</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="autocorrect">
+<title>Autocorrection</title>
+<indexterm><primary>autocorrection</primary><secondary>using</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Auto correction is a system for correcting common typing errors,
+converting abbreviations to their full spelling and adjusting
+capitalization. As you could guess from its name, this all occurs
+automatically, while you are editing your document.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="autocorrection-enable">
+<title>Enabling/Disabling Autocorrection</title>
+
+<para>To toggle autocorrection on, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Autocorrection</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Enable Autocorrection</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.  When enabled, autocorrection makes changes to your document <emphasis>as you type</emphasis>.  You can
+determine which changes to make by <link linkend="configure-autocorrection">configuring autocorrection</link>.</para>
+
+<para>To toggle autocorrection off, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Autocorrection</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Disable Autocorrection</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. When disabled, autocorrection changes are not made. You can, however,
+<link linkend="autoformat">apply autocorrection manually</link>.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="configure-autocorrection">
+<title>Configuring Autocorrection Options</title>
+<indexterm><primary>autocorrection</primary><secondary>configuring</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To adjust the options for autocorrection, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Autocorrection...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.  </para>
+
+<para>A dialog window appears to help you set your options.</para>
+
+<sect3 id="simple-autocorrection">
+<title>Simple Autocorrection</title>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="auto1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<variablelist>
+
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Convert first letter of a
+sentence automatically to uppercase</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When selected, &kword; will automatically capitalize the first
+letter after a period. You can tell &kword; when not to alter capitalization
+in certain instances (ie <quote>Sr.</quote> or <quote>Jr.</quote>.  For more details, see the section entitled
+<link linkend="autocorrection-exceptions">Autocorrection Exceptions</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Convert two uppercase letters to one uppercase and one
+lowercase letter</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When selected, &kword; will automatically convert a double capital
+letter (a common typographical error), into a single capital
+letter. You can tell &kword; when not to alter capitalization
+in certain instances.  For more details, see the section entitled
+<link linkend="autocorrection-exceptions">Autocorrection Exceptions</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Autoformat URLs</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When selected, &kword; will scan text for patterns which suggest a certain section
+of text is a <glossterm linkend="defurl">URL</glossterm> and automatically creates a link.</para>
+<para>For more details on links, see the section entitled
+<link linkend="links">Document Links</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Suppress double spaces</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When checked, &kword; will ignore the second space typed.
+This prevents users from adding double spaces between words or sentences</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Remove spaces at the beginning and end of paragraphs</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When selected, &kword; will automatically remove spaces at the beginning and/or the end of a line of text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Automatically do bold and underline formatting</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When selected, &kword; will look for words surrounded by asterisks ( * ).  It will remove the asterisks and change the font of all
+words in between the two asterisks to bold face.</para>
+<para>&kword; will also look for words surrounded by underscores ( _ ).  It will remove the underscores and underline all
+words in between the two underscores.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Replace 1/2... with ½...</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When selected, &kword; will automatically change 1/2, 1/3 and 3/4 to their single character equivalents.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Use autonumbering for numbered paragraphs</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If you start a paragraph with a number and a symbol (<emphasis> 1) </emphasis> for example).  &kword;  will automatically 
+convert that paragraph to a numbered paragraph.  All future paragraphs will be consecutively numbered. </para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Replace 1st with 1^st</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When selected, &kword; will automatically change 1st to 1<superscript>st</superscript>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Capitalize name of days</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Automatically capitalize the days of the week (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, etc...).</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Use list-formatting for bulleted paragraphs</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When selected, &kword; will look for lines that begin with <emphasis>- </emphasis>, and automatically convert the paragraph style
+to a bulleted list.  The bullet is selected with the left button below this option.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+
+</variablelist>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="quotes-autocorrection"><title>Custom Quotes</title>
+<para>Select the tab labeled <guilabel>Custom Quotes</guilabel></para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="auto4.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Replace double quotes with typographical quotes</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When selected, this option will replace the standard keyboard double
+quotes, with typographical quotation marks.  If you want to change the
+quotation character, click on one of the buttons. Clicking on
+<guibutton>Default</guibutton>, restores the default paragraph marks.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Replace single quotes with typographical quotes</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When selected, this option will replace the standard keyboard single
+quotes, with typographical quotation marks.  If you want to change the
+quotation character, click on one of the buttons. Clicking on
+<guibutton>Default</guibutton>, restores the default paragraph marks.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="advanced-autocorrection">
+<title>Advanced Autocorrection</title>
+
+<para>To switch to the Advanced Autocorrection, click on the tab labeled
+<guilabel>Advanced Autocorrection</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="auto2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject></screenshot>
+<para>This allows you to automatically have &kword; replace one string
+of text with another.  This can be useful for special symbols, commonly
+used abbreviations that you want spelled out, or abbreviations.</para>
+
+<para>&kword; uses different autocorrection strings depending on the language.  
+Set the correct language using the combo box labeled 
+<guilabel>Replacements and exceptions for language:</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>The check box labeled <guilabel>Enable word replacement</guilabel> is used to 
+toggle on and off the autoreplacement features of &kword;.  If there is no mark in the check box, 
+then &kword; will not perform any autoreplacements from the list in this dialog.</para>
+
+<para>If there is a mark in the check box labeled <guilabel>Replace text with format</guilabel> 
+&kword; will not only change the text when it finds a match, but it will change the formatting of the new text. 
+If there is no mark in this check box, then
+&kword; uses the same formatting options for the replaced text as it found in the search text.  For more information 
+on setting the format options for replacement text, see the section on 
+<link linkend="autocorrection-format-options">Changing the format of the autocorrection string</link>.</para>
+
+<sect4>
+<title>Adding an autocorrection string</title>
+
+<para>To add an autocorrection string, simply type the text you want &kword; to
+check for in the text box labeled
+<guilabel>Find</guilabel>, then enter the text you want &kword;
+to substitute in the text box labeled <guilabel>Replace</guilabel>.</para>
+
+
+<note><para>If you want to insert symbols or special characters not available on your
+keyboard, you can click the
+buttons with three periods on them and select a special character from the table provided.</para></note>
+
+<para>When these are entered, click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>. Your text
+strings are now added to the table.</para>
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4>
+<title>Editing an autocorrection string</title>
+<para><emphasis>Changing the text you want to find.</emphasis></para>
+<para>&kword; does not allow you to change the text to search for.
+This is to prevent disastrous mistakes.</para>
+<para>Instead, you must delete the current autocorrection rule and
+add a new text string with the corrected text to find.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Changing the text you want to replace.</emphasis></para>
+<para>Begin by clicking once on the string you want to edit.  It will be
+highlighted and the find and replace text will be listed in the text boxes
+above. You can alter the replacement text. When you
+are done, simply select <guibutton>Modify</guibutton>.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4>
+<title>Deleting an autocorrection string.</title>
+
+<para>Simply click on the string you want to delete.  Now click the
+<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button.  The string is removed.</para>
+
+<warning>
+<para>Be aware that &kword; does not give you a chance to back out once
+you have deleted a string.  Be sure you have selected the correct string
+<emphasis>before</emphasis> you click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>
+button.</para>
+</warning>
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4 id="autocorrection-format-options">
+<title>Changing the format of the autocorrection string.</title>
+<note><para>Currently, you must create the autocorrection string <emphasis>before</emphasis> you can format it.</para></note>
+<para>Once the autocorrection string has been created, simply click on it once with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>Now click on the <guibutton>Change Format...</guibutton> button.  A small dialog will appear:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="finddlg2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>You can use this dialog to select the format of the replaced text.</para>
+<para>The left column consists of 13 check boxes.  If there is a mark in the check box, then &kword; will change
+any replaced text to match the property selected.
+If no mark is in the check box, &kword; does not consider that property when replacing text.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Family:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this combo box to select the font family you want your replacement text to use.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Size:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this spin box to set the font size you want &kword; to use for your replaced text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Color:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Clicking on either of these two buttons allows you to select the font color and/or background color respectively,
+you want &kword; to use.  For more information on selecting a color, see the
+section on <link linkend="select-colors">Selecting Colors from the Color Dialog</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Bold:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Italic:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use these <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>/<guilabel>No</guilabel> radio boxes to determine whether you want &kword;
+to change the fonts to boldface or italicized fonts.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Strikeout:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>None</guilabel>, <guilabel>Single</guilabel>, <guilabel>Double</guilabel> 
+or <guilabel>Simple Bold</guilabel> to use for the replacement text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Underline</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>None</guilabel>, <guilabel>Single</guilabel>, <guilabel>Double</guilabel>, 
+<guilabel>Simple Bold</guilabel> or <guilabel>Wave</guilabel> to use for the replacement text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Vertical alignment:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>Normal</guilabel>, <guilabel>Subscript</guilabel> or
+<guilabel>Superscript</guilabel> to determine what font alignment you want &kword; to use.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Shadow:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Word by word:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use these <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>/<guilabel>No</guilabel> radio boxes to determine whether you want &kword;
+to use shadow text and/or word by word underlining and strikethrough in the replacement text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Capitalization:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select <guilabel>Normal</guilabel>, <guilabel>Uppercase</guilabel>, <guilabel>Lowercase</guilabel>,  or
+<guilabel>Small Caps</guilabel> to determine what capitalization to use for the replacement text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Language:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select the language of the text you will use to replace the found text.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>Once you have selected your options, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to accept your text options.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to ignore all changes.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to restore the options dialog box to the initial values prior to making any changes.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> to remove all marks from the checked options.</para>
+</sect4>
+
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="autocorrection-exceptions">
+<title>Autocorrection Exceptions</title>
+<indexterm><primary>autocorrection</primary>
+<secondary>exceptions</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are instances where &kword; will make autocorrection changes
+that are inappropriate.  You can use the fourth tab of this dialog to define
+<emphasis>exceptions</emphasis> to the rules previously discussed.</para>
+<para>The dialog for exceptions is shown below:</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="auto3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>To prevent &kword; from deciding an abbreviation or other text is
+the end of a sentence, simply enter the text fragment in the text box below
+<guilabel>Do not treat as the end of a sentence:</guilabel>. Then click
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>As an example:  Adding <quote>Jr.</quote> to this dialog prevents</para>
+<para><quote>Robert Jones Jr. is a friend of the family.</quote></para>
+<para>from being changed to:</para>
+<para><quote>Robert Jones Jr. Is a friend of the family.</quote></para>
+<para>To remove an erroneous entry, simply click once on the wrong entry with the &LMB;
+and click on the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button.</para>
+<para>The second set of boxes performs a similar function to the first except
+text entered in these boxes will allow two capital letters in a word if it 
+is entered in this text box.</para>
+<para>Simply enter the word in the text box below
+<guilabel>Accept two uppercase letters in:</guilabel>.  Then click
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>As an example:  Adding <quote>CD</quote> to this dialog prevents</para>
+<para><quote>CD</quote></para>
+<para>from being changed to:</para>
+<para><quote>Cd</quote></para>
+<para>To remove an erroneous entry, simply click once on the wrong entry with
+the &LMB; and click on the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="autoformat">
+<title>Manually applying autocorrection</title>
+<indexterm><primary>autocorrection</primary><secondary>manually
+applying</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>If autocorrection is turned off in your document, you can manually enable <link linkend="autocorrect">autocorrection</link>.</para>
+<para>To manually apply autocorrection, first configure your options by using the
+<link linkend="configure-autocorrection">autocorrection dialogs</link>.</para>
+<para>Then select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Autocorrection</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Apply Autocorrection</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+<para>&kword; will start at the beginning of the document and apply all selected
+autocorrection options to the entire document.</para>
+<para>When &kword; is finished, it will return you to your document for further editing.</para>
+<para>For more information on enabling and disabling autocorrection,
+see <link linkend="autocorrection-enable">Enabling/Disabling Autocorrection</link>.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="autocomplete">
+<title>Autocompletion</title>
+<indexterm><primary>autocompletion</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Autocompletion allows you to type the first few letters of a commonly
+used word (often technical or job specific), and tell &kword; to
+finish typing the word for you.  This is often very useful when you have lengthy
+technical words.</para>
+<sect2 id="autocomplete-using">
+<title>Using autocompletion</title>
+<para>Using autocompletion could not be easier.  Simply type the first few
+letters of the word you want &kword; to finish, and press
+<keycombo>&Ctrl;<keycap>E</keycap></keycombo>. &kword; will look 
+through the list of autocompletion words and if it finds a word which begins 
+with those letters, it will finish entering the remainder of the word.</para>
+<sect3 id="autocomplete-using-add">
+<title>Adding words to autocompletion</title>
+<para>&kword; maintains a list of words for each user that will be used for
+autocompletion.</para>
+<para>You can add words to this list one of two ways:</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>&kword; can automatically add new words to the completion list
+for later approval.
+This is selected using <link
+linkend="autocomplete-dialog">the dialog</link>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Individual words can be added to the list by using 
+<link linkend="autocomplete-dialog">the dialog</link>.</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="autocomplete-dialog">
+<title>Configuring autocomplete</title>
+<para>To configure autocompletion, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure
+Completion...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.  This will bring up a dialog.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="autocompdlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Enable word completion</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>It is used to toggle autocompletion on and off.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Add</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By clicking this button you can manually add 
+an individual word to the completion list.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Remove</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>To remove words from the completion list, select the word with the &LMB;
+from the list, then click this button.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Automatically add new words to suggestion list</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This option will add any word equal to or longer than
+the <guilabel>Characters needed:</guilabel> to the list of proposed
+autocompletion words.</para>
+<para>The large listbox in the center of the dialog contains the current
+proposed list of autocompletion words.</para>
+<note><para>Not all words listed in the list box will be immediatly affected by
+autocompletion when entered into this dialog.</para></note>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Show words in tooltip</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If this option is enabled, a tool tip box will appear when you type the
+beginning of a word that exists in the completion list. To complete the word,
+press the key you set to accept suggestions in the <guilabel>Key to accept
+suggestion:</guilabel> drop-down list.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Characters needed:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this spinbox/slider combination to prevent &kword; 
+from automatically adding short words to the completion list.   You can select
+any value from 5-100 and the words will need to be at least the number of
+characters set here to be added in the list.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Suggest words:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This spinbox/slider combination can be adjusted to allow more or less
+words into the autocompletion list.  This option is most important when
+<guilabel>Automatically add new words to suggestion list</guilabel> is enabled.
+This option keeps the list from becoming too cumbersome. You can select any
+value from 1 to 500.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Append space</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If checked, it adds a single space to the end of a word after
+autocompletion, this means it is not necessary to add the space manually for the
+next word.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Key to accept suggestion:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Set the key you want to use when an autocompleted word is suggested to you
+and you want to accept it. You can choose
+<keycap>Enter</keycap>, <keycap>Tab</keycap>, <keycap>Space</keycap>,
+<keycap>End</keycap> or <keycap>Right</keycap>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Make Default</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>A word is not part of autocompletion until the list is
+<emphasis>saved</emphasis> to disk.  At that moment, &kword; 
+will use that saved list for all autocompletion, until the list is replaced with
+another saved list.</para>
+<para>Some of the words in the autocompletion list may not have been saved
+yet.</para><para>To save the current list to disk and have &kword; begin using
+this new list for autocompletion, 
+click this button.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your options. Click
+<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort all changes. Click 
+<guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to reset to the state after you clicked on the 
+<guibutton>Make Default</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
+
+</chapter>
diff --git a/doc/kword/editpaste.png b/doc/kword/editpaste.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..121448cf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/editpaste.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/edittb.png b/doc/kword/edittb.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8235f46d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/edittb.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/end.png b/doc/kword/end.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..13797589c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/end.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/enumlist.png b/doc/kword/enumlist.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bc5559686
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/enumlist.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/exoffset.png b/doc/kword/exoffset.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9c9998d4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/exoffset.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/expression.png b/doc/kword/expression.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a9c69da4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/expression.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/expressions.docbook b/doc/kword/expressions.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0d0a3f334
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/expressions.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+<sect1 id="expressions">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Expressions </title>
+<indexterm><primary>expressions</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Expressions are a way to quickly insert common phrases into a document.  Once an expression has been selected, the
+text is inserted into &kword;.</para>
+<note><para>  Expressions are different from variables.  Expressions are inserted as regular text, can only be
+changed later by manually editing the text. Variables, insert a placeholder in the document which can be automatically updated at
+a later date.</para></note>
+<sect2 id="expressions-insert"><title>Using expressions</title>
+<para>To use an expression could not be easier.</para>
+<para>Simply place the cursor at the location you want the expression inserted and select
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Expression</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.  This will give you a submenu with groups of expressions.  Select the group that is appropriate
+for your expression.  This will bring up a list of expressions available to you.  Select the appropriate expression.</para>
+<para>Once selected, that expression will be inserted at the cursor position.</para>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="expressions-add"><title>Add, change and delete expression groups and expressions</title>
+<para>Adding an expression is accomplished by selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Edit Personal Expressions...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar. This will bring up a dialog box. </para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="expression.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>The list at the left shows you all available groups (<emphasis>Employees</emphasis> and <emphasis>Notices</emphasis>
+in the example above).
+<emphasis>Notices</emphasis> is the currently selected group.</para>
+<sect3 id="expression-add-group"><title>Add a new group</title>
+<para>You will need to create a new group the first time you want to add a new expression.  &kword;
+ will not allow the user to edit or remove any predefined expressions.  You create a new group by clicking on the
+ <guibutton>New</guibutton> located <emphasis>below the group list</emphasis>.  A new group will be created
+ with the name <emphasis>new group</emphasis>.  You can change the name of the new group by clicking on the
+ newly created group in the group list on the left, then editing the text box on the right labeled <guilabel>Group name:</guilabel>.</para>
+ </sect3>
+<sect3 id="expression-add-rename-group"><title>Change the name of a group</title>
+<para>To change the name of a group, simply click on the group in the list on the left side of the dialog.  Type the new name in the text
+box labeled <guilabel>Group name:</guilabel>.</para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="expression-add-delete-group"><title>Delete a group</title>
+<para>To delete a group, click on the group in the list on the left side of the dialog.</para>
+<warning><para>Be sure you have selected the correct group prior to clicking on the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton>
+button.  &kword; will not give you the opportunity to restore the group if it is accidentally deleted.</para></warning>
+<para>  Click on the
+<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button <emphasis>below the group list</emphasis>. The group and all of the expressions it
+contained are immediately deleted.</para>
+<note><para>Deleting an expression with this dialog does not delete the expression from any document.  It only removes the
+expression from the menus.</para></note>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="expression-add-expression"><title>Add a new expression to a group</title>
+<para>The left side of the dialog box lists all the available groups.  Select the group you want to add your expression to by
+clicking with the &LMB; on the name of the group.  The list on the right of the dialog labeled
+<guilabel>Expressions</guilabel> lists all the current expressions in the current group.</para>
+<para>To add an expression, click on the <guibutton>New</guibutton> located <emphasis>below the expression list</emphasis>.</para>
+<para>A new expression is created called <emphasis>empty</emphasis>.  Type your new expression in the textbox below the list of expressions.</para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="expression-change-expression"><title>Edit an expression in a group</title>
+<para>The left side of the dialog box lists all the available groups.  Select the group that contains your expression to by
+clicking with the &LMB; on the name of the group.  The list on the right of the dialog labeled
+<guilabel>Expressions</guilabel> lists all the current expressions in the current group.</para>
+<para>Click on the expression you want to edit in the expression list on the right.</para>
+<para>Click in the text box below the expression list.  You can now edit your expression in the textbox below the list of expressions.</para>
+<para>When you are finished adding new expressions, simply click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="expression-delete-expression"><title>Delete an expression</title>
+<para>To delete an expression, click on the group in the list on the left side of the dialog.  This will show a list of the expressions 
+belonging to that group in the listbox on the right labeled <guilabel>Expressions</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>Select the expression you want to delete by clicking once with the &LMB;.</para>
+<warning><para>Be sure you have selected the correct expression prior to clicking on the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton>
+button.  &kword; will not give you the opportunity to restore the expression if it is accidentally deleted.</para></warning>
+<para>  Click on the
+<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button <emphasis>below the expression list</emphasis>. The 
+expression is immediately deleted.</para>
+<note><para>Deleting an expression with this dialog does not delete the expression from any document.  It only removes the
+expression from the menus.</para></note>
+<para>When you are finished making changes, simply click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/exst.png b/doc/kword/exst.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..87297239f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/exst.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/exul.png b/doc/kword/exul.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32a366199
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/exul.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fchardlg.png b/doc/kword/fchardlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..444f0601f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fchardlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fchardlg2.png b/doc/kword/fchardlg2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d491493f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fchardlg2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fchardlg3.png b/doc/kword/fchardlg3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..592a342bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fchardlg3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fchardlg4.png b/doc/kword/fchardlg4.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ceadfb81e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fchardlg4.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fchardlg5.png b/doc/kword/fchardlg5.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..942c0e1e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fchardlg5.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/filefloppy.png b/doc/kword/filefloppy.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..57d25a644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/filefloppy.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/filenew2.png b/doc/kword/filenew2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d6ffc9647
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/filenew2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fileopen.png b/doc/kword/fileopen.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5ba1875b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fileopen.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fileprint.png b/doc/kword/fileprint.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b4c9d55da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fileprint.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fileprint2.png b/doc/kword/fileprint2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..51eee9ddf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fileprint2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/filetb.png b/doc/kword/filetb.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d0b1b5b5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/filetb.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/find.png b/doc/kword/find.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..515a840f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/find.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/finddlg.png b/doc/kword/finddlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d8cf12c6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/finddlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/finddlg2.png b/doc/kword/finddlg2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..98fefdf8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/finddlg2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/footcfg1.png b/doc/kword/footcfg1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..713263e45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/footcfg1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/footcfg2.png b/doc/kword/footcfg2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..830094ede
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/footcfg2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/footcfg3.png b/doc/kword/footcfg3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d50fbcf9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/footcfg3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/footend.png b/doc/kword/footend.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6dffe55bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/footend.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/footendnotes.docbook b/doc/kword/footendnotes.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5ec62451f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/footendnotes.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,200 @@
+<sect1 id="endnotes-and-footnotes">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Footnotes and Endnotes</title>
+<indexterm><primary>footnotes</primary><secondary>introduction</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>endnotes</primary><secondary>introduction</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has a complete set of tools to create and manage footnotes and endnotes.  When you assign a footnote, &kword; automatically 
+places the footnote at the bottom of the correct page.  When you assign an endnote, the notation is located in a numbered list at the end of your text.
+  If the footnote or endnote reference point is moved to a new page, the footnote automatically 
+follows and is renumbered as needed (if the user desires). </para>
+<para>&kword; also has the ability to separately manage endnotes and footnotes in the same document.</para>  
+<para>You have the option of having &kword; control the numbering of your footnotes.  Alternatively, you can manually specify each footnote.</para>
+<para>There are multiple automatic numbering schemes and your footnotes can be separated from the text with a dividing line. </para>
+
+<sect2 id="fn-add">
+<title>Add a new footnote or endnote</title>
+<indexterm><primary>footnotes</primary><secondary>creating</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>endnotes</primary><secondary>creating</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To add a new footnote or endnote, place your cursor at the end of the text you want to reference.  Then select 
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Footnote/Endnote...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.  This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="footend.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+
+<para>If you want &kword; to automatically number your footnotes or endnotes for you, make sure that <guilabel>Automatic</guilabel> is selected.
+If you want to manually enter all footnotes in, then select <guilabel>Manual</guilabel> and enter the footnote or endnote entry in
+the text box to the right.</para>
+<tip><para>If at all possible, try to allow &kword; to automatically number the footnotes and endnotes for you.  If &kword; controls the numbering, and you 
+insert, delete or move footnotes, &kword; will automatically renumber or reorder the footnotes for you.</para></tip>
+
+<para>Then select either <guilabel>Footnote</guilabel> or <guilabel>Endnote</guilabel>.  Footnotes will appear at the bottom of the
+page where the notation occurs.  Endnotes will appear as an ordered list at the end of your document.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> to <link linkend="fn-config">change the look</link> of your footnotes or endnotes.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to return to your document without inserting a footnote or endnote.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to insert the footnote or endnote.  &kword; will create the footnote or endnote
+entry, and place the cursor at the beginning of the entry for you to enter the desired reference information. 
+Type your reference information in the space provided.  </para>
+
+<para>When you have finished entering your footnote or endnote reference information, simply move your cursor over the footnote or endnote 
+number.  Click with the &RMB;.  A popup menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Go to Footnote</guilabel> and &kword; will move the cursor back to the text 
+where the reference was made.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="fn-edit">
+<title>Change reference of footnote</title>
+<indexterm><primary>footnotes</primary><secondary>editing</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>endnotes</primary><secondary>editing</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are two ways to change reference information for a footnote:</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>Place the mouse pointer over the footnote you want to change, and click once with the &RMB;.  
+A popup menu will appear.  Select <guimenuitem>Edit Footnote</guimenuitem>.  &kword; will immediately move your 
+cursor to the appropriate footnote reference.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Simply move to the bottom of the page (if it is a footnote) or the end of the document 
+(if it is an endnote).  Locate the footnote or endnote reference, and click once with the &LMB;.</para>
+<tip><para>You can jump to the end of the document by typing <keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>End</keycap></keycombo>.</para></tip></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="fn-delete">
+<title>Delete a footnote or endnote</title>
+<indexterm><primary>footnotes</primary><secondary>deleting</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>endnotes</primary><secondary>deleting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To delete a footnote, simply delete the footnote or endnote number.  &kword; will remove the reference information and resize the footnote frame.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="fn-config">
+<title>Change the look of footnotes</title>
+<indexterm><primary>footnotes</primary><secondary>change appearance</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To configure the appearance of footnotes, select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Format</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Footnote...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.  A dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="footcfg1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>There are 5 predefined numbering methods for footnotes.  Those methods are listed in the left 
+side of the dialog box. Begin by selecting the numbering method you want by clicking once with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>In the text box labeled <guilabel>Prefix text:</guilabel>, you can enter any characters you want to
+appear <emphasis>before</emphasis> the footnote number.</para>
+<para>In the text box labeled <guilabel>Suffix text:</guilabel>, you can enter any characters you want to
+appear <emphasis>after</emphasis> the footnote number.</para>
+<para>You can adjust the starting position of the footnote counter using the spinbox labeled <guilabel>Start at:</guilabel>.</para>
+<!--</sect3> -->
+
+<sect3 id="fn-config-line">
+<title>Change the appearance of separator line</title>
+<para>To change the appearance of the separator line, click on the tab labeled <guilabel>Separator Line</guilabel>.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="footcfg3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>You can determine the alignment of the separator line by selecting <guilabel>Left</guilabel>,
+<guilabel>Centered</guilabel> or <guilabel>Right</guilabel></para>
+<para>Determine the length of the line using the spin box labeled <guilabel>Size on page:</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>The spinbox labeled <guilabel>Width:</guilabel> is used to determine the thickness of the seperator line.</para>
+<note><para>Do not confuse this option with the <guilabel>Size on page:</guilabel> option.  The <guilabel>Width:</guilabel> is used to set the thickness of the line, not its distance across the page.</para></note>
+<para>Use the combo box labeled <guilabel>Style</guilabel> to determine what kind of line is drawn.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to change the look of all footnotes or click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to keep 
+the previous options.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="fn-placement">
+<title>Change the placement of the footnotes</title>
+<para>You can determine how much space separates the main text frame and the footnotes.  Select 
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Page Layout...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. This will bring up a dialog:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="wpfmtpg1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click on the tab labeled <guilabel>Header &amp; Footer</guilabel>. </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="wpfmtpg3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>At the bottom of the dialog is a text box is labeled
+<guilabel>Spacing between footnote and body</guilabel>.  As the label
+suggests, you can use this text box to specify the distance between
+the bottom edge of the main frame, and the top edge of the footnotes.
+When you have entered the desired spacing, click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>, and the footnotes will change position on
+the page.</para>
+
+<para>If both footnotes and endnotes are on the current page, the
+setting will apply to the space between the body and the
+footnotes.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="en-config">
+<title>Change the look of endnote entries</title>
+<indexterm><primary>endnotes</primary><secondary>change appearance</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To configure the appearance of endnotes, select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Format</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Footnote...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.  A dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="footcfg1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>Click on the tab labeled <guilabel>Endnotes</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="footcfg2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>There are 5 predefined numbering methods for footnotes.  Those methods are listed in the left 
+side of the dialog box. Begin by selecting the numbering method you want by clicking once with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>In the text box labeled <guilabel>Prefix text:</guilabel>, you can enter any characters you want to
+appear <emphasis>before</emphasis> the endnote number.</para>
+<para>In the text box labeled <guilabel>Suffix text:</guilabel>, you can enter any characters you want to
+appear <emphasis>before</emphasis> the endnote number.</para>
+<para>You can adjust the starting position of the endnote counter using the spinbox labeled <guilabel>Start at:</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>If you want a line seperating the text of the document from your endnotes, instructions 
+for this can be found in the section entitled <link linkend="fn-config-line">Change the appearance of separator line</link>.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/formabs.png b/doc/kword/formabs.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..df2e5d7ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formabs.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formatchar.docbook b/doc/kword/formatchar.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..724a726cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formatchar.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,319 @@
+<sect1 id="format-characters">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Formatting Characters</title>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>font</primary><secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>formatting text</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This section will cover the changes that can be made to individual characters or
+blocks of characters including:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="change-font">Character size</link></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="change-font">Font</link></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="change-font">Font style (italic, bold, etc).</link></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="change-font">Underlines, superscript, subscript, strikeout, etc.</link></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="change-font">Character color and background color.</link></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="change-font-case">Character case.</link></para></listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<sect2 id="change-font">
+<title>Changing Size, Font, Font Style, Text color and Background Color</title>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>change size</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>change text size</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>change font</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>change text font</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>change color</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>change text color</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>change background color</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>change text background color</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>bold</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>bold text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>italicized</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>italicized text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>underlined</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>underlined text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>strikethrough</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>strikethrough text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>superscript</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>superscript text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>subscript</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>subscript text</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<sect3 id="change-font-keyboard">
+<title>Using the Keyboard or toolbars</title>
+
+<para>There are several keyboard shortcuts which you can use to make
+common changes to character formatting. After selecting the text, you
+can use these key combinations to toggle each attribute.</para>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> toolbar also has buttons which you can use to
+toggle these same attributes.  </para>
+
+<para>The following table details each attribute, the toolbar buttons
+and the keyboard shortcuts.</para>
+
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols="3" align="left">
+<thead>
+<row><entry align="right">Attribute</entry><entry align="center">Toolbar
+Button</entry><entry align="center">Key Combo</entry></row>
+</thead><tbody>
+<row><entry align="right">Font Size</entry><entry align="center"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="chsizebut.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry align="center">
+<para>Decrease font size: <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>&lt;</keycap></keycombo></para> <para>Increase font size: <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>&gt;</keycap></keycombo></para></entry></row>
+<row><entry align="right">Font</entry><entry align="center"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="chfontbut.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry align="center">-</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="right">Bold Face</entry><entry align="center"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="bold.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry align="center"><keycombo>&Ctrl;<keycap>B</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry align="right">Italics</entry><entry align="center"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="ital.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry align="center"><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>I</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry align="right">Underline</entry><entry align="center"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="undl.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry align="center"><keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>U</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry align="right">Strikethrough</entry><entry align="center"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="stkout.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry align="center">-</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="right">Superscript</entry><entry align="center"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="supscbut.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry align="center">-</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="right">Subscript</entry><entry align="center"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="subscbut.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry align="center">-</entry></row>
+<row><entry align="right">Font Color</entry><entry align="center"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="chcolorbut.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry align="center">-</entry></row>
+
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+
+<note>
+<para>You cannot change the all text attributes using the keyboard or a button on a 
+toolbar. For these attributes, you must <link linkend="change-font-dialog">use the dialog
+box</link>.</para>
+</note>
+
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="change-font-dialog">
+<title>Using the Dialog Box</title>
+
+<para>If you have many changes to make, you can also use a dialog box to
+set these same attributes.</para>
+
+<para>You can open the <guilabel>Select Font</guilabel> dialog box in one of three
+ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Font...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Click on the selected text with the &RMB;.  A small menu will appear.  Select <guimenuitem>Font...</guimenuitem> from the
+menu.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use the keyboard shortcut:
+<keycombo>&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>F</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>Either method will open a dialog box</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="fchardlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Using this dialog box, you can select the font, size, 
+italics and boldface options from the top three list boxes.</para>
+
+<para>The preview box along the middle of the dialog, will show you how your current
+settings will appear.</para>
+
+<tip><para>If the default preview string is not appropriate, you can change it by clicking once
+inside the preview box with the &LMB;.  A text cursor will appear. You can edit the text to suit your needs.</para>
+<para>The sample sentence will revert to the default the next time you
+open this dialog.</para>
+</tip>
+
+<para>If you click the tab labeled <guilabel>Highlighting</guilabel>, the dialog changes to:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="fchardlg2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The subsection labeled <guilabel>Underlining:</guilabel> has two combo boxes and a color selector box. 
+In the left most combo box select between
+no underline (<guilabel>None</guilabel>), <guilabel>Single</guilabel>, <guilabel>Simple Bold</guilabel>, 
+<guilabel>Double</guilabel> or <guilabel>Wave</guilabel> underlining.  </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="exul.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+<!--<caption><para>Examples of three underline styles</para></caption>-->
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Use the center combo box to select the style of underlining (Solid line, dashed line, etc.).</para>
+<para>Use the right color selector box to select a color for the underline using the
+<link linkend="select-colors">color selection dialog box</link>.  </para>
+
+<para>The subsection labeled <guilabel>Strikethrough:</guilabel> has two combo boxes.
+Use the left combo box to select between
+no strikethrough (<guilabel>None</guilabel>), <guilabel>Single</guilabel>, <guilabel>Double</guilabel> or 
+<guilabel>Simple Bold</guilabel> strikethrough.  Use the right combo box to select the line style.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="exst.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The checkbox labeled <guilabel>Word by word</guilabel> determines how underlining and strikethrough are drawn.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="wbw.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The section labeled <guilabel>Capitalization</guilabel> lets you select one of four special capitalization options.  
+This will change the capitalization of the selected text.  Examples of each scheme are shown below.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="chcase.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<note><para>The changes to capilalization will only affect the selected text at the current moment.  This formatting is not enforced after closing the dialog box.</para></note>
+
+<para>The third tab labeled <guilabel>Decoration</guilabel> allows you to change the color of the font, change the background color and create artificial shadows for your characters.  Click on the tab:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="fchardlg3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Using the buttons labeled <guilabel>Text color:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Background color:</guilabel> you can change the color of the text or the background behind the text.</para>
+
+<para>To create the illusion of a shadow behind your text, select the color you want your shadow by clicking the button labeled <guilabel>Shadow color:</guilabel>.  Then select the distance between the shadow and 
+the text using  the spin box labeld <guilabel>Shadow &amp; distance:</guilabel>.  Finally, select the direction of your shadow by 
+selecting one of the eight red squares.  A preview of your shadow appears at the bottom of the dialog box.</para>
+
+<para>The fourth tab labeled <guilabel>Layout</guilabel> allows you to create superscripts and subscripts.  It also lets you select automatic hyphenation on a character by character basis.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="fchardlg4.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The section labeled <guilabel>Position</guilabel> has four radio buttons and two spin boxes.  Selecting <guilabel>Normal</guilabel>, produces text of normal height and at the normal vertical position.  Selecting <guilabel>Superscript</guilabel> or <guilabel>Subscript</guilabel> will convert the currently selected text.  If you select <guilabel>Custom</guilabel>, you can use the spin box labeled <guilabel>Offset:</guilabel> to move the selected text up or down relative to normal text alignment.  Look at the example below:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="exoffset.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Notice how a positive offset raises the text, and a negative offset lowers the text.</para>
+
+<para>You can also use the spinbox labeled <guilabel>Relative size:</guilabel> to make the selected font larger or smaller.</para>
+
+<para>The checkbox labeld <guilabel>Auto hyphenation</guilabel> is used to toggle automatic hyphenation on or off for the selected text.</para>
+
+<para>The fifth tab labeled <guilabel>Language</guilabel> allows you to change the language. Click on the tab:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="fchardlg5.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>You can select the language to use on the selected text with the drop down box.  If the selected text allows for automatic hyphenation, 
+&kword; will use general rules of spelling for the selected language to automatically hyphenate the selected text.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will commit your changes to the
+document and close the dialog box.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> will commit your changes to the
+document but keep the dialog box open.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> will restore the default settings to the selected text.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> will abort all changes
+made.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="change-font-case">
+<title>Changing Font Case</title>
+<indexterm><primary>text</primary><secondary>changing case</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>change case of text</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; can change the case (uppercase or lowercase) of large blocks of text to one of five pre-defined styles.  
+Begin by selecting the block of text you want changed.  Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Change Case...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+<para>A small dialog box will appear with five options:</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Uppercase</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Will convert all characters to uppercase.</para>
+<para>Example: KWORD WILL AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE CASES.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Lowercase</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Will convert all characters to lowercase.</para>
+<para>Example: kword will automatically change cases.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Title case</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Will capitalize every word.</para>
+<para>Example: Kword Will Automatically Change Cases.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Toggle case</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Converts all lowercase letters to uppercase <emphasis>and</emphasis>
+converts all uppercase letters to lowercase.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Sentence case</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Capitalizes the first character after a period.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>When you have selected the desired options click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and &kword; will make the changes.</para>
+
+
+
+</sect2>
+
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/formatframes.docbook b/doc/kword/formatframes.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ab081ddde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formatframes.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,503 @@
+<sect1 id="format-frame">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Setting the Properties for a Frame</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>configure</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>For each frame in your document, you can determine:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>how &kword; handles full text frames</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>how text wraps around or through overlapping
+frames</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>the exact size of the frame</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>establish margins within a frame.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>set a background color and pattern for the frame.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>All of these options can be altered using a set of dialog boxes, 
+or by using a previously defined <emphasis>framestyle</emphasis>.</para>
+<para>A <emphasis>framestyle</emphasis> is a predefined set of frameset formatting options which is given a name.  Once a frameset 
+has been assigned a framestyle, any changes made to the framestyle will be reflected in all framesets which are 
+assigned that framestyle.</para>
+<tip><para>You may be noticing that framestyles function in a way similar to <emphasis>text styles</emphasis>.  The main difference, is
+framestyles control the look of the frame, and textstyles control the look of paragraphs within the frame.</para></tip>
+
+<sect2 id="frame-dialogs">
+<title>Using the frame settings dialogs</title>
+
+<para>All of these settings can be determined in the <guilabel>Frame
+Properties</guilabel> dialog box.</para>
+
+<para>In order to adjust the properties of any frame, you must first
+select the frame you want to change.</para>
+
+<para>Simply click once on the frame border of the frame you want to
+edit. (Or by holding down the &Ctrl; key and clicking inside the frame with the
+&LMB;.)</para>
+
+<para>You edit the properties of a frameset using a set of dialogs which you can 
+open one of two ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame/Frameset Properties</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Place the mouse pointer on the border of the frame, and click once
+with the &RMB;.  A small menu
+will appear.  Select <guimenuitem>Frame/Frameset Properties...</guimenuitem>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>The Properties dialog consists of one dialog box, with six index
+tabs labeled <link linkend="format-frame-options">Options</link>,
+<link linkend="format-frame-tra">Text Run Around</link>,
+<link linkend="format-frame-connect">Connect Text Frames</link>,
+<link linkend="format-frame-geometry">Geometry</link>,
+<link linkend="format-frame-background">Background</link> and
+<link linkend="format-frame-borders">Borders</link>.</para>
+
+<sect3 id="format-frame-options"><title>General Options</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>configure automatic creation</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>protect contents of</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="formframe1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The tab labeled <guilabel>Options</guilabel> is used to determine how
+&kword; behaves when there is too much text
+to fit within the current bounds of the
+frame.</para>
+
+<para>&kword; has three solutions to this situation:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Create a new
+page</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>When a frame becomes full, &kword; automatically
+creates a new page. On this new page, it may create a new frame, of the
+same size and position, if you choose.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Resize last
+frame</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>When a frame becomes full, &kword;
+automatically extends the bottom border of the text frame to accommodate
+the new text.  It will continue to expand as new text is added. Conversely, it will shrink again if text is removed from the frame.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Don't show the extra text</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>&kword; does not
+create a new frame or change the current frame in any way.  You will
+need to manually resize the current frame, or add a new frame to the
+frame set.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>Simply make your selection in the section labeled <guilabel>If Text is Too Long for Frame</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>In the section entitled <guilabel>On New Page Creation</guilabel>, you have three options available.  You must select one.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Reconnect frame to current flow</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Create a new frame, the same size and shape on a new page, and make it the last frame in the frameset.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Do not create a followup frame</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Creates a new page, but not a new frame.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Place a copy of this frame</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Creates a new page, with a new frame the same size, shape and position on the page.  Additionally, &kword;
+copies the contents of the frame from the previous page.</para>
+<tip><para>This is useful for title frames, headers and footer frames.  Each page will have an automatic copy of this information
+on any new pages.</para></tip></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+
+
+<para>If you place a mark in the check box labled <guilabel>Changes will be applied to all
+frames in frameset</guilabel>, then any changes made in the frame properties dialog box
+will automatically be applied to all frames within the frameset.</para>
+
+<para>If you place a mark in the check box labeled <guilabel>Protect content</guilabel>, &kword;
+will not allow any changes to the text within the frame, or the formatting of the text within the frameset.</para>
+
+<note><para>You can still reshape or even delete the frame, but the content within the frame is locked.  To lock the location
+and size of the frame, see the <link linkend="format-frame-geometry">Geometry</link> tab.</para></note>
+
+<para>To make changes to the text, you need to remove the mark from <guilabel>Protect content</guilabel>.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="format-frame-tra"><title>Text Flow around frames</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>force text around</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To adjust how text flows around overlapping frames, click the tab
+labeled <guilabel>Text Run Around</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="formframe2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>When you overlay two text frames, and text from both frames is
+competing for the same space on the page, &kword; can (at your option),
+make sure that text from two frames does not overlap. </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="intro3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+<!--<caption><para>Example of text wrapping.</para></caption>-->
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+
+
+<para>As you can see from the options in the dialog box, there are three
+possible choices.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Text will run through this frame</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting this option, &kword; will ignore this frame
+when it displays the text in overlapping frames.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Text will run around the frame</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting this option, &kword; will wrap the text
+of overlapping frames around this frame.</para>
+<para>If this option is selected, you can determine which side the text runs around in the section labeled
+<guilabel>Run Around Side</guilabel>.  Simply choose <guilabel>Left</guilabel>, <guilabel>Right</guilabel>,
+or <guilabel>Longest side</guilabel>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Text will not run around this frame</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting this option, &kword; will not wrap any
+text around the edges of this frame, but instead, will skip down below
+this frame before continuing to display text in overlapping frames.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>You can also determine how close your frames appear by setting the
+<guilabel>Distance Between Frame &amp; Text</guilabel> in the spin boxes provided. If you place a mark in the 
+checkbox labeled <guilabel>Synchronize changes</guilabel>
+&kword; will make all distances equal.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="format-frame-connect"><title>Move a frame to a new frameset</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>edit framesets</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>framesets</primary><secondary>edit</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can change which frameset the current frame belongs to by selecting 
+the <guilabel>Connect Text Frames</guilabel> tab.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="formframe3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This dialog gives you the option to create a new frameset for the current frame or move the selected frame to a current frameset.</para>
+<para>Select <guilabel>Select existing frameset to connect frame to:</guilabel>, to add the current frame to a previously created
+frameset.  Choose one of the
+framesets listed in the table below to specify which frameset.</para>
+<para>To create a new frameset, select <guilabel>Create a new frameset:</guilabel> and type the name of the new frameset in the
+text box labeled <guilabel>Name of frameset</guilabel>.  &kword; will create a new frameset with the current frame
+as the only frame in the frameset (for now).</para>
+<tip><para>It is helpful to name your framesets with descriptive names.   Name the frameset with a description of the contents
+so that you can quickly refer to it again later.</para></tip>
+
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="format-frame-geometry"><title>Frame size and position</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>geometry</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>determine size (dialog box)</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>determine position (dialog box)</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can adjust the size and position of your frame by
+clicking on the tab labeled <guilabel>Geometry</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="formframe4.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This dialog box allows you to specify <emphasis>exactly</emphasis>
+where the frame goes and how large it is.</para>
+
+<para>If you put a mark in the check box labeled <guilabel>Protect size and position</guilabel>, the frame size and position will
+be fixed at their current location.  You will not be able to move the frame on the page until this box is unchecked.</para>
+
+<sect4 id="format-frame-geometry-size"><title>Determine Size and Position</title>
+<para>You can locate your frame on the page by first entering the <guilabel>Left:</guilabel>
+and <guilabel>Top:</guilabel> measurements.  This determines where the top left corner of the
+frame will be.  All measurements are from the top left corner of the
+page.</para>
+
+<para>You can also determine the exact size of the frame by entering its
+<guilabel>Height:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Width:</guilabel> in the text boxes provided.  These two measurements are
+relative to the top left corner of the frame you specified above. not to the size of the page.</para>
+</sect4>
+<sect4 id="format-frame-geometry-margin"><title>Determine Margins in the Frame</title>
+
+<para>Using the boxes labeled
+<guilabel>Left:</guilabel>, <guilabel>Right:</guilabel>, <guilabel>Top:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Bottom:</guilabel>, you can establish
+margins <emphasis>within the frame</emphasis>.  This should not be confused with margins for the page, which are defined in the
+<link linkend="page-format">page properties dialog box</link>.</para>
+
+<tip><para>If the <guilabel>Synchronize changes</guilabel> check box has a mark in it, &kword; will take any changes you
+make to one margin, and automatically apply them to the other 3 margins.</para>
+
+<para>In other words, if this check box is selected, and you enter a margin of 1 cm in any of the 4 margin boxes, all 4 frame margins will now 
+become 1 cm in size.</para>
+
+<para>If this option is off, each text box can be given a different value.</para>
+
+</tip>
+</sect4>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="format-frame-background"><title>Frame Background</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>background colors and patterns</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can adjust the background color of the text frame by selecting the <guilabel>Background</guilabel> tab.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="formframe5.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Select the color of the background by clicking on the button labeled 
+<guibutton>Background color:</guibutton>.  The color is selected using the
+<link linkend="select-colors">Color selection dialog</link>.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="format-frame-borders"><title>Frame Borders</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>borders</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can change the borders of the text frame by selecting the <guilabel>Borders</guilabel> tab.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="formframe6.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Select the <guilabel>Style:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Width:</guilabel> of the borders
+with the two drop down boxes on the left side of the dialog.</para>
+<para>Select the color of the borders by clicking on the button labeled 
+<guibutton>Color:</guibutton>.  The color is selected using the
+<link linkend="select-colors">Color selection dialog</link>.</para>
+<para>Use the four icons (<guiicon>Border Left</guiicon>, <guiicon>Border Right</guiicon>, <guiicon>Border Top</guiicon> 
+and <guiicon>Border Bottom</guiicon>) below the <guibutton>Color</guibutton> button
+to determine on which side of the frame you want to have a border.</para>
+<para>A <guilabel>Preview</guilabel> of the selected settings is shown on the right side of the dialog.
+</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to accept all of your changes and to close the dialog box.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to accept all of your changes without closing the dialog box.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to forget all of your changes.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="framestyles">
+<title>Using frame styles</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>frame styles</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>frame style</primary><secondary>using</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<sect3 id="framestyles-use">
+<title>Formatting a frame with a framestyle</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frame style</primary><secondary>apply frame style to a frame</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To format a frame using a predefined framestyle simply:</para>
+<para>Select the frame(s) by holding down &Ctrl; and clicking within the frame with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guisubmenu>Framestyle</guisubmenu></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.  A submenu will appear, listing all the currently defined framestyles.  Select the name of the framestyle
+you want and all selected frames will automatically be formatting using the options of that framestyle.</para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="framestyle-edit">
+<title>Editing a framestyle</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frame style</primary><secondary>editing</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To change the options of a framestyle, you will need to use the framestyle manager.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="framestylist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>All of the currently defined framestyles are listed in the listbox on the left.  The currently selected framestyle is highlighted, and 
+the name of the currently selected framestyle is listed in the text box labeled <guilabel>Name</guilabel>. (In this example, 
+the currently selected framestyle is <emphasis>Light Gray</emphasis>.)</para>
+<para>Select the framestyle you want to change by clicking on the name of the framestyle in the listbox on the left.</para>
+<para>There are three tabs in on the right side of the dialog box:  <guilabel>General</guilabel>, <guilabel>Borders</guilabel> 
+and <guilabel>Background</guilabel></para>
+<para>In the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab, you can change the name of the liststyle by typing the new name in the text box 
+labeled <guilabel>Name</guilabel>.  You can also see a preview of what your frame will look like in the preview box.</para>
+<para>The <guilabel>Borders</guilabel> tab works the same as the tab of the same name when formatting a paragraph.  For more specific
+information click <link linkend="para-borders">here</link>.</para>
+<para>The <guilabel>Background</guilabel> tab operates identically to the same tab when formatting a frame. Click 
+<link linkend="format-frame-background">here</link> for more specific instructions.</para>
+<para>Once all changes have been made, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes. All of the affected framesets will 
+be changed to reflect the new options.</para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="framestyle-add">
+<title>Creating a new framestyle</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frame style</primary><secondary>create new</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To create a new framestyle, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="framestylist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>Select a framestyle from the list at the left which most closely matches your new desired framestyle by clicking on the name with the &LMB;.
+The selected framestyle will be used as a template for the new framestyle.</para>
+<para>Click on the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button.  &kword; will generate a new framestyle, which is a copy
+of the previously selected framestyle.</para>
+<para>Choose a name for your new framestyle, and type it in the text box labeled <guilabel>Name</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>You can now change your frame border and background options.  For details, see 
+<link linkend="framestyle-edit">Editing a framestyle</link>.</para>
+<para>When you are finished creating your framestyle, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, and your framestyle is saved.</para>
+<note><para>Framestyles are specific for each document.  A framestyle created in one document can not be used in another document unless you 
+<link linkend="framestyle-import">import the framestyle</link> from that document.</para></note>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="framestyle-delete">
+<title>Deleting a framestyle</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frame style</primary><secondary>deleting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To delete framestyle, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="framestylist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>Select the framestyle you want to delete by clicking once with the &LMB; in the list on the left.</para>
+<para>Click on the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button.</para>
+<note><para>&kword; will not allow you to delete the <emphasis>Plain</emphasis> framestyle. </para></note>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="framestyle-reorder">
+<title>Changing the order of the framestyles in the list</title>
+<para>To change the order that the framestyles are listed, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="framestylist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>The order  the framestyles are listed in the menu is determined by the order of the framestyles in the list on the left.</para>
+<para>Select the framestyle you want to move from the list at the left by clicking once with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>Now click on the up and down arrows located at the bottom of the list of framestyles.  This will move the
+selected framestyle up or down in the list of framestyles.</para>
+<para>When you are satisfied with the order of the list, select <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="framestyle-import">
+<title>Importing a framestyle from another &kword; file</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frame style</primary><secondary>importing from another file</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To import a framestyle from another &kword; file, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="framestylist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>Click the button labeled <guibutton>Import From File...</guibutton> to open the 
+<link linkend="file-dialog">file selection dialog</link>. 
+  Choose your file, and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>A new dialog box will appear listing all available framestyles for importing.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="styleimport.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<tip><para>If &kword; encounters a duplicate framestyle name in the selected file, it will append a number to the end of the 
+framestyle name to identify the imported style.</para>
+<para>As an example, if you import the <emphasis>Plain</emphasis> framestyle from another &kword; file, &kword; will change
+the name to <emphasis>Plain-1</emphasis>.</para></tip>
+<para>Select <emphasis>all</emphasis> the framestyles you want to import.  Then click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>The framestyles will now appear at the bottom of your list of framestyles.  Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> 
+to save the framestyles to the new document.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/formatpara.docbook b/doc/kword/formatpara.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..88d78aa5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formatpara.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,388 @@
+<sect1 id="format-para">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Formatting Paragraphs</title>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>This section will detail all the options available to format paragraphs.</para>
+
+<para>To format a paragraph, place the cursor in the paragraph.  To format more than
+one paragraph at a time, simply <link linkend="select">select the paragraphs with the mouse or keyboard</link>.</para>
+
+<para>You can format one or more paragraphs one of three ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paragraph...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem><para>Type <keycombo action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo></para></listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Place the mouse pointer in the paragraph and click once
+with the &RMB;.  A small menu
+will appear.  Select <guimenuitem>Paragraph...</guimenuitem>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>A dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Paragraph Settings</guilabel> dialog consists of five tabbed sections
+labeled <link linkend="indents-and-spaces">Indent and Spacing</link>, <link
+linkend="para-aligns">General Layout</link>, <link linkend="para-borders">Borders</link>,
+<link linkend="para-bullets-and-numbers">Bullets/Numbering</link>, and
+<link linkend="tab-stops">Tabulators</link>.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="indents-and-spaces">
+<title>Indents and Spaces</title>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>indent lines</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>change line spacing</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>keep lines and paragraphs together</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>With this dialog box the
+spacing between lines, and the spacing between paragraphs can be specified.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="fpara1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The first section of this dialog box is labeled
+<guilabel>Indent</guilabel>, and consists of three spin boxes:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Left</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Enter a value in this box to indent the lines of the selected paragraphs away from the left margin.  
+The first line is unaffected by this spin box.  To
+alter the first line, specify that value in the spin box labeled <guilabel>First Line</guilabel>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Right</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Enter a value in this spin box to indent all lines of the selected paragraph
+(including the first line) away from the right
+margin.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>First Line</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Enter a number in this spin box to indent the first line of a paragraph away from the left
+margin.</para>
+<tip><para>Entering a negative value in this spin box will create a <link linkend="defhangingindent">hanging indention</link>.</para></tip></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+
+<para>The next section is labeled <guilabel>Line Spacing</guilabel>.  It
+consists of a combo box and a spin box.</para>
+
+<para>The combo box determines the method of calculating the spacing between lines.  It has several choices:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Single, 1.5 Lines and Double</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If any of these options are selected, the paragraph will have single, 1 and 1/2 or double spacing respectively.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Proportional</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If this option is selected, the spin box is enabled.  When you enter a number in the spin box, &kword; uses that number as a multiplier for line spacing.  To look at it another way, if you enter 1.00 in this box, &kword; will use single spacing.  If you enter 2.00 in this box, &kword; will use double spacing.  If you enter 3.00 in this box, &kword; will use triple spacing, etc.  You are not limited to whole numbers.  You could enter 1.87 in this box and &kword; would use 1.87 line spacing.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Line Distance</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If this option is selected, the spin box is enabled.  When you enter a number in the spin box, &kword; places a measured amount of space between each line.  As an example, if you enter 0.75 and the units used by &kword; are inches, then &kword; will place 0.75 inches between each line.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>At least</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This sets the minimum line spacing value.  This can be useful if you have paragraphs with widely differing font sizes.  Typically, &kword; calculates the distance between lines by looking at the tallest character in the line.  You can use this feature to overide close linespacing in small font paragraphs to make them even with large font paragraphs.  &kword; will not cause any fonts to overlap using this spacing technique.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Fixed</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This sets the distance between the tops of each line to a specific unit of measure.  If this option is set too small, &kword; will overlap characters, which will obscure the bottom parts of the characters.  </para>
+<para>This should not be confused with <guilabel>Line Distance</guilabel> which inserts a specific unit of space between lines.  <guilabel>Fixed</guilabel> specifies the distance between the top of one line and the top of the next line.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>The last section is labeled <guilabel>Paragraph Space</guilabel>.
+It consists of two entries:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Before</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By entering a value here, additional spacing is added before each paragraph.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>After</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By entering a value here, additional spacing is added after each paragraph.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>On the right of the dialog box, is a preview box, which will
+<emphasis>approximate</emphasis> the final layout of your
+document.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="para-aligns">
+<title>General Layout</title>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>justification</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>center paragraph</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>left/right aligns</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>horizontally align paragraphs</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This section determines how the text is placed <emphasis>within
+the line</emphasis>.  With other applications, you may have referred to
+this simply as <emphasis>alignment</emphasis>, or
+<emphasis>justification</emphasis>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="fpara2.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Once again, a preview pane is shown on the right side of the dialog box.</para>
+
+<para>In the upper left corner of the dialog box is a section labeled <guilabel>Alignment</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>If <guilabel>Left</guilabel>,
+<guilabel>Right</guilabel> or <guilabel>Center</guilabel> are selected, the text will
+be moved on the line so that it aligns with the left margin, aligns with
+the right margin, or is centered between the margins
+respectively.</para>
+
+<para>If <guilabel>Justify</guilabel> is selected, &kword; will increase
+the space <emphasis>between</emphasis> words, so that each line (with
+the exception of the last line in a paragraph), reaches both the left
+and right margins.</para>
+
+<tip><para>You can use toolbar buttons to quickly change the justification of one or more paragraphs</para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Button</entry><entry>Command</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="alignLeft.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Left Align </entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="alignCenter.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Center  Align </entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="alignRight.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Right  Align </entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="alignBlock.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Justify Text </entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+</tip>
+
+
+<para>The lower section controls how &kword; divides paragraphs when a 
+paragraph will not fit entirely within the current frame or page.</para>
+
+<para>The first option is labeled <guilabel>Keep lines
+together</guilabel>.  If this option is selected, then all of the lines
+of the paragraph will remain on the same page.  If this is not selected,
+&kword; may choose to move part of a paragraph to a new page or frame.  
+For most work, this option is usually left
+unchecked.</para>
+
+<para>The next two options are labeled <guilabel>Insert Break Before Paragraph</guilabel>
+ and <guilabel>Insert Break After Paragraph</guilabel>.
+When one of these options is checked, and the paragraph moves to the
+next frame in the frame set, a hard frame break will be inserted in front
+of the current paragraph or after the previous paragraph (depending on the option selected).
+This will serve to keep the paragraph in the
+next frame, even if text prior to that frame is deleted.  This option is
+often used in conjunction with <guilabel>Keep lines together</guilabel>,
+to ensure that the paragraph does not creep back onto the page during
+editing. </para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="para-borders">
+<title>Decorations</title>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>borders</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The next section is used to define the background color of the current paragraphs and configure graphical borders
+around your paragraphs.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="fpara3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Clicking the color button to the right of <guilabel>Background color:</guilabel>, will let you select a color to serve as the background 
+of your paragraph. </para>
+<para>&kword; can surround (on some or all sides) a
+paragraph with a border.  This border can be solid or not, of any color
+and of many sizes.  This dialog panel is used to adjust the
+borders.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Style</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this combo box to select the overall type
+of the new border. </para>
+<para>The choices are previewed in each selection.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Width</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This will determine how wide the resulting border will be.  It is
+measured in points.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Color</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Clicking on the color bar will allow you to select a color using the <link
+linkend="select-colors">color selection dialog
+box</link>.</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>Now that it is determined how the borders should look, specify which edges of the paragraphs need borders.</para>
+
+<informaltable frame="none">
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<tbody>
+<row>
+<entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="borbutL.png"
+format="PNG" align="right"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry>
+<entry valign="middle">Select/Unselect <guiicon>Left Border</guiicon>.  Clicking this
+button will apply the current options to the left paragraph border.
+Clicking a second time will remove the left paragraph border.</entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="borbutR.png"
+format="PNG" align="right"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry>
+<entry valign="middle">Select/Unselect <guiicon>Right Border</guiicon>.  Clicking this
+button will apply the current options to the right paragraph border.
+Clicking a second time will remove the right paragraph border.</entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="borbutT.png"
+format="PNG" align="right"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry>
+<entry valign="middle">Select/Unselect <guiicon>Top Border</guiicon>.  Clicking this button
+will apply the current options to the top paragraph border.  Clicking a
+second time will remove the top paragraph border.</entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="borbutB.png"
+format="PNG" align="right"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry>
+<entry valign="middle">Select/Unselect <guiicon>Bottom Border</guiicon>.  Clicking this
+button will apply the current options to the bottom paragraph border.
+Clicking a second time will remove the bottom paragraph border.</entry>
+</row>
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+<tip><para>It is possible to mix and match border styles, widths and colors in one paragraph.</para>
+<para>Simply determine the border style, width and color for one border edge, and select the border 
+using the border buttons.  Now alter the style width or color to create a new border look and click the new border button.</para>
+</tip>
+
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Preview</guilabel> window will show you how your
+paragraph borders will look.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="para-bullets-and-numbers">
+<title>Bullets and Numbering</title>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>bulleted</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>numbered</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>lists</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A very common element of a document, is a list of items.  The list
+contains several elements which may be numbered, for easy
+reference.  Alternatively, the list elements may be simply set off from
+the rest of the text with a special character preceding each element.  These special characters
+are called bullets.</para>
+
+<para>This dialog box is used to define your bullets or the
+numbering method of lists in the document.  This dialog box can also be used to number chapters and sections.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="fpara4.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The top section of the dialog box has three options:  <guilabel>None</guilabel>, <guilabel>List</guilabel>
+and <guilabel>Chapter</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>If <guilabel>None</guilabel> is selected, the text is not marked as 
+either a list or a chapter.  No other features of this dialog
+box will alter the text when this option is chosen.</para>
+
+<para><guilabel>List</guilabel> is used to create
+lists in the document.  These lists are
+automatically numbered and formatted to appear similar.  
+For more information on lists, see the section entitled <link linkend="lists">Lists</link>.</para>
+
+<para><guilabel>Chapter</guilabel> is used to
+number chapters and sections of a document.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="para-tabulators">
+<title>Tabulators</title>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="fpara5.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This dialog is used to adjust the tab stops.  For more details,
+see <link linkend="tab-stops">Using Tab Stops</link>.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/formbrac.png b/doc/kword/formbrac.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c9f471d43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formbrac.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formcbrac.png b/doc/kword/formcbrac.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d15b971c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formcbrac.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formfrac.png b/doc/kword/formfrac.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5cf409d6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formfrac.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formframe1.png b/doc/kword/formframe1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c922d70b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formframe1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formframe2.png b/doc/kword/formframe2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dff85d2d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formframe2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formframe3.png b/doc/kword/formframe3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..12dba009f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formframe3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formframe4.png b/doc/kword/formframe4.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8d7a18d1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formframe4.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formframe5.png b/doc/kword/formframe5.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c9cfb0a73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formframe5.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formframe6.png b/doc/kword/formframe6.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..713a2b6a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formframe6.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/forminteg.png b/doc/kword/forminteg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..12a1aad44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/forminteg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formllind.png b/doc/kword/formllind.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..72ea58a0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formllind.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formlrind.png b/doc/kword/formlrind.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6c7ba3244
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formlrind.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formmat.png b/doc/kword/formmat.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a49be623
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formmat.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formover.png b/doc/kword/formover.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..da6b9c1f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formover.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formprod.png b/doc/kword/formprod.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f8ea9d64b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formprod.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formsbrac.png b/doc/kword/formsbrac.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b14e5db89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formsbrac.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formspecchar.png b/doc/kword/formspecchar.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e00f843a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formspecchar.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formsqrt.png b/doc/kword/formsqrt.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fbeca9f9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formsqrt.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formsum.png b/doc/kword/formsum.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..580dd2a2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formsum.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formtb.png b/doc/kword/formtb.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b6ba11e1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formtb.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formulas.docbook b/doc/kword/formulas.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa8d9344f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formulas.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+<sect1 id="formulas">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Formulas</title>
+<indexterm><primary>formulas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has the ability to directly create formulas using the formula editor common to all &koffice; applications.</para>
+<note><para>This is a formula editor for creating graphical versions of formulas.  &kword; does not currently have the ability 
+to solve mathematical equations.</para></note>
+
+<sect2 id="formulas-add"><title>Add a formula</title>
+<para>There are three ways to insert a formula into a document:</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Formula</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Using the keyboard shortcut: <keycap>F4</keycap></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>or by clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="part-kformula.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>&kword; creates a formula frame at the current cursor location.</para>
+<note><para>Formula frames behave differently than most other frames in &kword;: </para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para><emphasis>All</emphasis> formula frames are inserted <glossterm linkend="definlineframe">inline</glossterm> by default.
+This frame can later be
+converted to a <emphasis>non-inline</emphasis> frame later.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Formula frames expand and contract depending on the resulting size of the formula.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Formula frames automatically determine where in the line they are lined up.</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+</note>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="formula-move"><title>Moving a formula</title>
+<para>By default, formula frames are created as <glossterm linkend="definlineframe">inline</glossterm> frames by default.  The formula frame
+will move with the text as any other inline frame would.</para>
+<para>If you want to have more control over where the formula is placed, you can convert it to a framed formula by clicking on the 
+frame surrounding the formula with the &RMB;.  A popup menu will appear.  Simply select <guilabel>Inline Frame</guilabel> and the formula will 
+now be a freely movable frame. </para>
+<para>Once converted to a freely movable frame, you can <link linkend="move-frame">move the frame</link> 
+just like any other frame in &kword;.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="formula-delete"><title>Removing a formula</title>
+<para>To delete a formula in &kword;, simply <link linkend="delete-frame">delete the frame</link> around it.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="formula-edit"><title>Editing a formula</title>
+<para>Editing a formula is beyond the scope of this documentation.  
+Please see the &kformula; handbook for help with the editing of the formula.</para>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
diff --git a/doc/kword/formulind.png b/doc/kword/formulind.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..35128d7d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formulind.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formunder.png b/doc/kword/formunder.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2ae09dfc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formunder.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/formurind.png b/doc/kword/formurind.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f8fe2afc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/formurind.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/forward.png b/doc/kword/forward.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..03f5200fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/forward.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fpara1.png b/doc/kword/fpara1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..452c02d9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fpara1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fpara2.png b/doc/kword/fpara2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..978eb0d44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fpara2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fpara3.png b/doc/kword/fpara3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f88d63caf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fpara3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fpara4.png b/doc/kword/fpara4.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c797b8ec0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fpara4.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fpara5.png b/doc/kword/fpara5.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d3165325d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fpara5.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fpicture.png b/doc/kword/fpicture.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d73158ee1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fpicture.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/framers.png b/doc/kword/framers.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0460c83e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/framers.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/frames.docbook b/doc/kword/frames.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..639538ee8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/frames.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,435 @@
+<sect1 id="frames">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Working with Frames</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>introduction</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>Since &kword; is a frames based word processor, an understanding of
+frames and framesets is necessary for all but the most simple of documents.</para>
+
+<para>This section is designed to give you a firm understanding of how
+to create, destroy and manipulate frames so &kword; can provide you with
+the exact document you want.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="framesets">
+<title>Framesets</title>
+<indexterm><primary>framesets</primary><secondary>introduction</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Before we continue our discussion of Frames, its important that we
+define a couple terms now:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Frame</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>A frame is a rectangular space on the page.  This space defines an
+area where text (or other data), can be placed.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Frameset</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>A frameset is a group of frames.  Each frame in the frameset has a
+position within the frameset</para>
+
+<para>The position is determined by their placement on the page.  If frames extend across the entire width of the page, the frame which begins closest 
+to the top of the page is Frame #1.  The next frame that is closest to the top of the page is Frame #2, etc. 
+If the frames do not extend across the width of the page, the frame whose 
+left edge is closest to the left margin will be frame #1.  In this case, 
+the vertical position of the frame is ignored.</para>
+
+<para>All text flows from one frame to another <emphasis>within a
+frameset, and only within a frameset.</emphasis> Text flows from frame
+to frame within the frameset <emphasis>according to the position of each
+frame</emphasis> on the page (and therefore the order of the frames within the frameset).</para>
+
+<para>As an example:  If we have a frameset that consists of three
+frames (#1, #2, and #3).</para>
+
+<para>As we type text into Frame #1, the text is shaped to the outline
+of Frame #1.</para>
+
+<para>When the text will no longer fit within Frame #1, it is
+automatically continued into Frame #2.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>Text moves freely between frames
+within a frameset.  If you insert text in the middle of a frame, all text after the inserted text is
+rearranged as you type.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="select-frame">
+<title>Selecting a frame</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>selecting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can select a frame within a frameset two ways:</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>By clicking on the text frame border of the frame you want
+to select. </para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>By holding down the &Ctrl; key and clicking anywhere within the frame.</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>There should now be 8 squares around the edges of the frame.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="add-text-frame">
+<title>Adding a Text Frame to a Document</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>adding a text frame</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Adding a text frame can be done one of three ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Text
+Frame</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use the keyboard shortcut:
+<keycombo><keycap>F10</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>or by clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="tfcreatebut.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>Whatever method you choose, &kword; responds by changing the cursor
+to a set of cross hairs.</para>
+
+<para>Using the mouse, place the crosshairs at the desired position of the upper left corner of the
+new text frame.</para>
+
+<para>Click once with the &LMB;.</para>
+
+<para>Alternative, first position the text caret at the place where you want to insert
+the frame.  When the mouse cursor changes to crosshairs, press &Enter;.
+</para>
+
+<para>A dialog box appears.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="formframe3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This dialog box is used to determine which frameset this new frame will belong to.</para>
+
+<para>Using the screenshot as an example, a new text frame has been created in a
+document which currently has two framesets (called <guilabel>Text Frameset
+1</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Text Frameset 2</guilabel>).</para>
+
+<para>You now have the option of either:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Add the new frame to one of the previously created
+framesets.</term>
+
+<listitem><para>To do this, simply select the frameset you want the new frame to belong to.
+ (Either <guilabel>Text Frameset 1</guilabel>, or
+<guilabel>Text Frameset 2</guilabel> in the example.)</para>
+
+<para>When this text frame is created, the new text frame will become
+a member of the selected frameset.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry><term>Create a new frameset.  </term>
+
+<listitem><para>If you want this to be a new frameset, you should enter a descriptive
+name for your new frameset.  (A name which will tell you what you might
+find in that frameset).  This name should be entered in the text box
+labeled <guilabel>Name of frameset:</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>This newly added frame will be the
+only frame in the frameset.</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>The other tabs in this dialog box, can be used to set some options
+for this frame.  For more information on these options, see the section
+entitled <link linkend="format-frame">Setting the properties for a frame</link>.</para>
+
+<para>If you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, the new frame will be
+created.</para>
+
+<para>If you click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, the new frame will not
+be created, and you will be returned to editing your document.</para>
+
+<tip>
+<para>By default, &kword; creates a small frame with the upper left corner of the 
+frame located on the page where you clicked with the mouse cursor.  After the frame is 
+created, you are expected to reshape the frame to fit your needs.</para>
+
+<para>If you would prefer to establish the shape of your frame <emphasis>while you are
+creating</emphasis> the frame, simply click the &LMB; where you want the upper left corner to 
+be placed and hold the button down.  Drag the mouse towards the opposite corner of the frame to establish the 
+boundaries of the new frame.  As
+you drag the mouse, you will see a box drawn.  This box represents the
+boundaries of your new text frame.  When you are satisfied with the size and shape of the new text
+frame, release the mouse button.  </para></tip>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="delete-frame">
+<title>Deleting a Frame From a Document</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>deleting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You may decide you no longer need a frame in your document.  You
+could leave it blank (so it would not be visible in the final output),
+but you should delete it to keep your document as simple as
+possible.</para>
+
+<para>Begin by clicking on the text frame border of the frame you want
+to delete. (Or holding down the &Ctrl; key and clicking inside the frame with the
+&LMB;.)</para>
+
+<para>There are now 8 squares on the edges of the frame.</para>
+
+<para>If this is the frame you want to delete, you can do so by:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>Press the <keycap>Delete</keycap> key.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Delete
+Frame</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>While the cursor is on the border of the frame you want to delete,
+click once with the &RMB;. A small menu will appear.  Select <guimenuitem>Delete
+Frame</guimenuitem>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="move-frame">
+<title>Moving a Frame</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>moving</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Moving a frame around on the page is easy.</para>
+
+<para>Begin by clicking on the text frame border of the frame you want
+to move. (Or holding down the &Ctrl; key and clicking inside the frame with the
+&LMB;.)</para>
+
+<para>There are now 8 squares on the edges of the frame.</para>
+
+<para>Click and hold the &LMB; on the border again and drag the cursor in the direction you want to move the
+frame.</para>
+
+<para>You will see an outline of the frame as you move it.  When the
+outline is where you want it, release the mouse button.</para>
+
+<tip><para>A faster way to move the frame, can be done by holding down the
+&Ctrl; and &Shift; keys on the keyboard and click and hold with the &LMB;.  Drag
+the mouse cursor on the page and when the frame is in the correct location, release
+the &LMB;.</para></tip>
+
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="resize-frame">
+<title>Resizing a Frame</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>resizing</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>It is also easy to change the size or shape of a frame.</para>
+
+<para>Begin by clicking on the text frame border of the frame you want
+to change. (Or holding down the &Ctrl; key and clicking inside the frame with the
+&LMB;.)  This selects
+this frame as the current frame.</para>
+
+<para>There are now 8 squares on the edges of the frame. By moving
+these squares, you will be able to drag the frame border(s) to a new
+location.</para>
+
+<para>Each square will move a different combination of borders.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="framers.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>As an example:  To move the bottom border of a frame, place the
+mouse over the box at the six o'clock position in the frame.  When the
+mouse is over the box, it will change to a double headed arrow.</para>
+
+<para>Now click with the &LMB;
+and hold the button down.  As you move the mouse up and down on the
+page, you will see that the frame changes shape to match the movements of
+the  mouse. When the bottom edge of the frame is at the new location,
+simply release the mouse button, and the changes will become
+permanent.</para>
+
+<note>
+<para>If you are using a Text Oriented Template, you cannot change
+the size of the primary frame by dragging the edges of the frame.  If you
+want to resize this frame, you must do so by <link
+linkend="page-format">Changing the margins</link> </para>
+</note>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="connect-frame">
+<title>Reconnecting Frames in a Frameset/Changing text flow.</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>create/edit framesets</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Normally, each new text frame is created with a specific
+purpose.  Sometimes, however, as the document is changed, changes to the text flow
+will need to be made.  To accomplish this, you will need
+to know how to move a frame from one frameset to another.</para>
+
+<para>First click on the frame border of the frame you want to
+move to another frameset.</para>
+
+<para>You can change the frameset of the currently selected frame by
+selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame/Frameset Properties</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar</para>
+
+<tip><para>You can also accomplish this by clicking on the frame border once with the &RMB;, and selecting
+<guilabel>Frame/Frameset Properties...</guilabel> from the popup menu.</para></tip>
+
+<para>This will bring up a dialog box with five tabs.  Select the tab
+labeled <guilabel>Connect Text Frames</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>You will be presented with a list of framesets.  Simply select the new
+frameset.</para>
+
+<para>When you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, the currently selected frame will be added
+to that frameset.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="raise-frame"><title>Raise and Lower Frames</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>raise</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>lower</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>When two frames occupy the same place on a page, they must overlap.  
+When they overlap, one frame sits <emphasis>above</emphasis> the other frame.</para>
+<para>You can raise and lower the frames to change which frame sits above the other frames by using four commands.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Bring to Front</term>
+<listitem><para>To raise a frame, select the frame by clicking once on the frame border with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Bring to Front</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+<para>This will place the frame on top of <emphasis>all other frames</emphasis> that it overlaps.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Raise Frame</term>
+<listitem><para>To raise a frame, select the frame by clicking once on the frame border with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Raise Frame</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+<para>This will move the frame up <emphasis>one level</emphasis> of any frame that it overlaps.</para>
+<tip><para>Pressing <keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>R</keycap></keycombo> is the
+same as selecting <guilabel>Raise Frame</guilabel> from the menubar.</para></tip>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Send to Back</term>
+<listitem><para>To lower a frame, select the frame by clicking once on the frame border with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Send to Back</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+<para>This will place the frame below <emphasis>all other frames</emphasis> that it overlaps.</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Lower Frame</term>
+<listitem><para>To lower a frame, select the frame by clicking once on the frame border with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Lower Frame</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+<para>This will move the frame down <emphasis>one level</emphasis> of any frame that it overlaps.</para>
+<tip><para>Pressing <keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>L</keycap></keycombo> is the
+same as selecting <guilabel>Lower Frame</guilabel> from the menubar.</para></tip>
+</listitem></varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="hard-break">
+<title>Hard Frame Breaks</title>
+<indexterm><primary>frames</primary><secondary>frame breaks</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>page breaks</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A hard frame break is a special formatting character.  It is
+invisible on the final printed output.</para>
+
+<para>The purpose of a hard frame break, is to force all the
+text that follows it into the next frame in the frameset.</para>
+
+<para>If we have the following sentence:  <quote>We have nothing to
+fear but fear itself</quote></para>
+
+<para>and we insert a Hard Frame Break, just before the word
+<quote>but</quote>, we will end up with one frame containing <quote>We have nothing
+to fear</quote>, and the next frame in the frameset beginning with
+<quote>but fear itself</quote>.</para>
+
+<para>To add a Hard Frame Break, you should first place the keyboard
+cursor where you want the break to be located in the document.</para>
+
+<para>A Hard Frame Break can be inserted one of two ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Page Break</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use the keyboard shortcut:
+<keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Return</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>If you want to remove a Hard Frame Break, you simply delete it
+like you would any other character.</para>
+<tip><para>Since this is not a character that
+you can normally see in &kword;, it will be easier to delete a Hard Frame Break with the following procedure.</para>
+
+<orderedlist>
+
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Formatting
+Characters</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.  This will make the breaks visible.</para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para>Find the newly revealed Page Break, labeled <guilabel>--- Frame Break ---</guilabel>.
+  Place the mouse pointer in
+front of this and click once with the &LMB;. This will place the cursor directly in front of the page break.</para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para>Now press the <keycap>Delete</keycap> key.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist></tip>
+
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/framestylist.png b/doc/kword/framestylist.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9f6b059e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/framestylist.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/fundimentals.docbook b/doc/kword/fundimentals.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2556809d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/fundimentals.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+<chapter id="fundamentals">
+<chapterinfo>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</chapterinfo>
+
+<title>Fundamentals</title>
+<para>This section of the documentation discusses starting &kword;, introduces the user to templates and
+discusses an important difference between two major types of templates.</para>
+
+
+<sect1 id="starting-kword">
+<title>Starting &kword;</title>
+<indexterm><primary>starting &kword;</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; can be started one of four ways:</para>
+
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select &kword; through the system menus, under:
+<menuchoice><guimenu>K-Button</guimenu><guimenuitem>Office</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>KWord</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para> 
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>If you are in a terminal program (&konsole;, <application>Xterm</application>, &etc;), you can type:
+<screen><prompt>$</prompt> <userinput><command>kword &amp;</command></userinput></screen></para>
+
+<para>Or</para>
+
+<para><screen><prompt>$</prompt> <userinput><command>kword</command> <replaceable>filename</replaceable> &amp;</userinput></screen></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Using &konqueror;, you can click on your data file (&kword;
+documents end in <literal role="extension">.kwd</literal>).  This will
+automatically start &kword; and begin editing the file.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Using the &koffice; Workspace.</para>
+</listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="template-intro">
+
+<title>An Introduction to Templates</title>
+<indexterm><primary>templates</primary><secondary>introduction</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>OK, so the first question a new user may have is:</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Why do I need to use a frames based word processor, when
+I am perfectly happy writing my letters on my current (page layout) word
+processor? </emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Well the good news is, adjusting to a frames based word processor
+is easy and once a template is selected, &kword; can act just like a
+page layout word processor.  There are templates
+available for simple correspondence and day to day use.</para>
+
+<para>When a more complex document (newsletters,
+posters, &etc;) needs to be created, you will not need to switch to a different
+application to generate these special documents. There are templates in
+&kword; which will help generate newsletters or other more
+complicated documents.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>What are templates and what can they do for
+the user?</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>A template can be thought of as an initial mold for a document.</para>
+
+<para>When a user sits down to write a document, they already have an idea of
+what the final product will look like. If they are writing a letter to a
+business, a document with only one column, which goes all the
+way across the page, and from top to bottom of the page is appropriate.  When a user sits
+down to author a newsletter for a local organization, however, they may
+want a large title across the top, and several columns for quick news
+articles.</para>
+
+<para>With &kword;, this predetermined notion of how the
+document should look is used to select a template.  By using a template, 
+a set of frames is created to approximate this final layout. For
+a business letter, a document with one large frame that covers the
+page from top to bottom and side to side would be selected. 
+For a newsletter, however, a two or
+three column document is more appropriate. Once this
+template is selected, &kword; will create the frames automatically.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>What if the user decides to change the
+layout after a template is selected?</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>This is not a problem. If a document begins as a single
+column document and it is decided later that two columns is better, another column can be added. 
+The purpose of templates is not to
+limit the ability to change the layout of a document, but rather to take some of the
+work load off the user whenever possible.  Choosing the correct template when
+beginning a document will simplify the formatting (as opposed to
+always selecting the default template and making changes later).
+Choosing the wrong template
+will not limit the flexibility of the document later on.</para>
+
+<para>The next section, consists of one more important topic which
+you should understand before we begin using &kword;.</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="wp-vs-dtp">
+
+<title>The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout
+templates</title>
+<indexterm><primary>templates</primary><secondary>Text oriented/Page Layout</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>It is vital that the
+difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates is clear in
+your mind.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Text Oriented</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>The Text Oriented templates are designed to act like page-oriented
+word processors. When you select a Text Oriented template, you will
+create a template with one or more frames. The first frame is distinctly
+tied to the paper size of your document.  When you increase or decrease
+the paper size or change the margins, the frame size is automatically
+adjusted.  You are <emphasis>not</emphasis> able to move this frame
+around on the page and you cannot delete this frame. If you need to
+adjust the size or position of this frame, you must <link
+linkend="page-format">adjust the margins</link>. On top of the first
+frame, you can, of course, add additional frames. These frames can
+contain pictures, text or whatever you want. These new frames can be
+moved, re-sized and deleted to suit your needs. If you want it, &kword;
+will even wrap the text from the first frame around any information in
+any subsequent frames.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Page Layout</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>These templates are designed for desktop publishing.  When you
+select a template from this class, all of the frames are created
+equal. This is where the difference between Page Layout and Text
+Oriented template lies. None of the frames in a Page Layout template are
+tied to the page as tightly as the main frame in a Text Oriented
+template is. Each of the frames is independent of the page size, and can
+be moved or re-sized without changing margins, &etc; Of course this also
+means that altering the margins or paper size of your document requires
+that you individually move/resize each frame.  </para>
+
+<note><para>In addition to not having a main text frame, Page Layout
+documents cannot use the automatic headers or footers (though these can be
+added in as frames).  Additionally, footnotes must be managed by hand while
+in Page Layout Mode.</para></note>
+
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>As you can see, the choice between Page Layout and Text Oriented
+templates is a choice between flexibility (Page Layout) and convenience
+(Text Oriented).  You can create any document you like with either type
+of template.</para>
+
+<para>If the concept of templates is still unclear, please follow along
+with the following tutorial. The first document you create will use a
+Page Layout template. This should help clarify exactly how templates
+function.</para> 
+
+</sect1> 
+</chapter>
diff --git a/doc/kword/graphics.docbook b/doc/kword/graphics.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6e46b5ecb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/graphics.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+<sect1 id="graphics">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Graphics</title>
+<indexterm><primary>graphics</primary><secondary>introduction</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; is very good at handling textual information.  &kword; can also be used to incorporate
+graphical images with text.  </para>
+<tip><para>A source of great clipart that is free to use is the <ulink url="http://www.openclipart.org">Open Clip Art Library</ulink>. This project has a large collection of vector graphics indexed and sorted by category, all released into the public domain.</para></tip>
+<para>Pictures can be inserted into a document as either <emphasis>framed</emphasis> or <emphasis>inline</emphasis> images.</para>
+<para>Framed images are pictures that have a frame around them.  The frame around a picture functions 
+exactly the same as a frame around text.  It contains the picture and determines the size and shape of the picture.</para>
+<para>An inline image has a frame around it, but this frame is inserted <emphasis>within</emphasis> the current text
+frame. If text is inserted in front of the picture, the picture travels down the frame just like any text would.  This means the picture will
+stay in the same area of the page as the text that surrounds it.</para>
+<para>Framed pictures, on the other hand, need to be moved by hand on the page.  </para>
+
+<para>&kword; can use pictures <link linkend="insert-graphics">already stored in a file</link> or <link linkend="scan-graphics"> acquire an image from a scanner</link>.</para>
+<sect2 id="insert-graphics"><title>Insert Graphics from a file</title>
+<indexterm><primary>graphics</primary><secondary>inserting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are three ways to insert a picture into a document:</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Picture...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Using the keyboard shortcut: <keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>F5</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>or by clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="fpicture.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>All three methods open a file selection dialog.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="insgrph1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para><link linkend="file-dialog">Use this dialog</link> to select the picture.</para>
+
+<tip><para>Pressing <keycap>Esc</keycap> at this point will cancel the insertion of a picture into your document.</para></tip>
+
+<para>Once the appropriate picture file is located, click on the filename once with the &LMB;.  Click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to continue.</para>
+<para>A new dialog box appears.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="insgrph2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>The right half of this dialog box contains a preview window.  The picture should be visible in this window.</para>
+<para>The left part of this box contains one button and two check boxes.</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guibutton>Choose Picture...</guibutton></term>
+<listitem><para>Click this button and &kword; will open a
+new file dialog to choose a different picture.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Insert Picture Inline</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>If there is a mark in this check box, the picture will be an inline picture.  If there is no mark, a new frame will be
+created.  For details on the differences, see the <link linkend="graphics">introduction</link>.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Retain original aspect ratio</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para><glossterm linkend="defaspectratio">Aspect ratio</glossterm> is defined in the &kword; glossary.</para>
+<para>If a there is a mark in this check box, &kword; will not allow any change the aspect ratio of the picture.  This prevents
+inappropriate stretching and compressing of the image.  It will still be possible to change the overall size of the image, but it 
+will not be possible to change the horizontal measurement without also changing the vertical measurement.</para>
+<para>If there is no mark in this check box, the horizontal and vertical sizes of the picture can be changed independently.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+<para>To insert the picture, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  To abort the picture entirely, click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>If an inline picture was selected, click with the mouse in the appropriate location.   The picture will be inserted.</para>
+<para>If a framed picture was selected, the mouse cursor will change to crosshairs.  Locate one corner of the location of the new picture
+frame with the mouse.  Click and hold the &LMB; down.  Drag the cursor to adjust the size of the picture frame.  When the size of the 
+picture frame is correct, release the &LMB;.  &kword; will insert the picture into the frame, and resize the picture to fit within the
+frame.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="scan-graphics"><title>Using a picture from a scanner</title>
+<note><para>A complete discussion of how to operate a scanner is beyond the scope of this documentation.  This document will confine itself to the controls available in &kword; but will not 
+go into detail on the use of these controls.</para></note>
+<para>To use a scanner to insert a picture into your kword document, begin by selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Scan Image...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+<para> &kword; will open a dialog box for you to choose your scanner.  Simply click on the radio button to the left of your scanner.  Then click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  This will bring up the scanning dialog:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="scan.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>You should begin by selecting the image type that you want to scan and the resolution.  First determine the picture type using the drop down box labeled 
+<guilabel>Scan Mode</guilabel>.  You can choose between <guilabel>Color</guilabel>, <guilabel>Greyscale</guilabel> or <guilabel>Binary</guilabel> image.</para>
+<para>If you want to select a different scanner, click the <guibutton>Source...</guibutton> button.</para>
+<para>If you have selected a <guilabel>Binary</guilabel> image, you can use the drop down box labeled <guilabel>Halftoning</guilabel> to select your halftone protocol.</para>
+<para>Select your resolution using the drop down box labeled <guilabel>Resolution</guilabel></para>
+<para>Now place the object you want to scan in the scanner and click <guibutton>Preview Scan</guibutton>.  Your scanner will take a low resolution 
+scan and preview it in the window in the far right of the dialog</para>
+<para>Using your mouse, click on the upper left corner of he area you want to scan with the &LMB; and hold the button down.  Drag the mouse down and 
+to the right to create a box for a high-resolution scan. When you have an appropriate sized box, release the &LMB;. Once the box is drawn, you 
+can adjust the selection box using the mouse. </para>
+<para>You can refer to the box to the left of the preview window labeled <guilabel>Selection</guilabel>.  This box will show you the height and 
+width of your selection and the amount of disk space you will need to store this image in the &kword; file. </para>
+<para>Once you are satisfied with the size and position of the selection box, click <guibutton>Final Scan</guibutton>.  The scanner will scan the selected area at the resolution you selected.  </para>
+<para>When the scanner is finished, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to close the dialog box.  Your cursor will now be crosshairs.  Using this cursor, draw the size and position you want your picture on the 
+page. The scanned image will be inserted in a separate frame.  You can now adjust the size of the picture by <link linkend="resize-frame">changing the size of the frame</link></para>
+<sect3 id="scan-adjust"><title>Adjusting the image prior to final scanning</title>
+<para>You can use the lower left part of this dialog to adjust your image prior to scanning. </para>
+<para>By moving the slider bar labeled <guilabel>Threshold</guilabel> you can adjust the cutoff point of white in the scanned image.  </para>
+<para>By moving the slider bars labeled <guilabel>Brightness</guilabel> and <guilabel>Sharpness</guilabel> you can adjust the relative brightness and the sharpness of the scanned image.</para>
+<note><para>The preview window will not show you the effects of changes to your scanned image in the preview window.</para></note>
+<para>You can select from one of three pre-defined gamma tables or you can select the <guilabel>User defined</guilabel> option from the drop 
+down box labeled <guilabel>Use custom gamma table</guilabel>.  If you selected <guilabel>User defined</guilabel> you can click the <guibutton>Edit...</guibutton> 
+to alter the <guilabel>Brightness</guilabel>, <guilabel>Contrast</guilabel> and <guilabel>Gamma</guilabel> for your customized gamma table. </para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="scan-preview"><title>Adjusting the preview scan size</title>
+<para>If you know the size of the object you are scanning, you can select the preview area from the drop-down box labeled <guilabel>Scan size</guilabel>.  You can also use the radio buttons 
+labeled <guibutton>Landscape</guibutton> and <guibutton>Portrait</guibutton> to change the orientation of the preview area.</para>
+<note><para>Changing the orientation between portrait and landscape does not change the orientation of the scanned text or image.</para></note>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="scan-autosel"><title>Using auto-selection</title>
+<para>&kword; can try to automatically select the object you want to scan.  It does this by looking for an area within the preview window that seems to 
+define an object in the picture.  By default this option is disabled.  You can enable autoselection in this dialog.</para>
+<para>The autoselection area of the dialog is located just to the left of the preview window in the middle of the dialog box. It consists of three controls:</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Checkbox</term>
+<listitem><para>If a mark is placed in the checkbox, auto-selection is enabled.
+ If there is no mark in the checkbox, then auto-selection is disabled.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Drop down box</term>
+<listitem><para>This drop down box contains two possible choices:  <guilabel>Black</guilabel> and <guilabel>White</guilabel>.  If 
+<guilabel>Black</guilabel> is chosen, then &kword; will look for an area surrounded by black to select automatically.  
+If <guilabel>White</guilabel> is chosen, then &kword; will look for an area surrounded by white to select automatically.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry> 
+<varlistentry>
+
+<term>Slider bar labeled <guilabel>Threshold</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>By adjusting this slider bar, you determine the threshold auto-selection uses to determine the area to select automatically.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="scan-misc"><title>Miscellaneous scanning options</title>
+<para>There are two additional options for scanning that are accessed by clicking on the <guilabel>Options</guilabel> tab.</para><screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="scan2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>The checkbox labeled <guilabel>Ask for the scan device on plugin startup</guilabel> toggles the scanner selection dialog on and off.  If there is a mark in this 
+checkbox, &kword; will ask you to select your scanner each time you insert a scanned image into your document.  If there is no mark, then &kword; uses the previously 
+selected scanner.  If you have access to only one scanner, or you only use one scanner, you should remove any mark from this box.</para>
+<para>The checbox labled <guilabel>Query the network for scan devices</guilabel> is also used to select scanners.  If there is a mark in this checkbox, 
+&kword; will check your local network for scanners that are avaialbe.  If there is no mark in this box, &kword; will only look for scanners connected directly to 
+your machine.</para>
+<para>To save these options, click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="resize-Graphics"><title>Changing the size of a picture</title>
+<indexterm><primary>graphics</primary><secondary>change the size of</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Resizing a picture is done by changing the size of the frame that surrounds it.  &kword; will automatically change the picture to fill the
+entire frame.</para>
+<para>For information on changing the size of a frame, see <link linkend="resize-frame">Resizing frames</link>. </para>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="move-graphics"><title>Move Pictures</title>
+<indexterm><primary>graphics</primary><secondary>moving</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The only way to move an inline image around on the page, is to alter the flow of the text that surrounds it.  If this
+is causing problems, the picture can always be <link linkend="switch-graphics">changed to a framed picture</link>.</para>
+<para>To move a framed picture in &kword; is the same as <link linkend="move-frame">moving any frame</link> in &kword;.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="delete-graphics"><title>Delete Graphics</title>
+<indexterm><primary>graphics</primary><secondary>deleting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To delete a graphic in &kword;, simply <link linkend="delete-frame">delete the frame</link> around it.</para>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="save-graphics"><title>Saving Graphic in separate file</title>
+<indexterm><primary>graphics</primary><secondary>saving in a separate file</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can save a picture or graph to a separate file (for use in another document or to archive the graphic).</para>
+<para>Simply click once on the graphic with the &RMB;.  A popup menu will appear.  Select <guilabel>Save Picture...</guilabel>. 
+A dialog will appear that will allow you to specify where to save the graphic.</para>
+<note><para>This does not remove the picture from the &kword; document file.  It is simply a way to extract a picture from a 
+document so it can be archived or used in another application.</para></note>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="switch-graphics"><title>Switching between inline and framed pictures</title>
+<indexterm><primary>graphics</primary><secondary>switching between inline and framed</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Switching between inline pictures and framed pictures is easy in &kword;.</para>
+<sect3 id="inline-to-frame"><title>Change an inline picture to a framed picture</title>
+<para>To change in inline picture to a framed picture, click on the desired picture with the &LMB; once.  This selects the frame
+of the picture.</para>
+<para>Now click and hold with the &RMB; and a popup menu will appear.  In this menu, is an item labeled
+<guilabel>Inline Frame</guilabel>, with a mark in front of it.  Select this option by clicking with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>The frame is now
+an independent and can be moved around freely.</para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="frame-to-inline"><title>Change a framed picture to an inline picture</title>
+<para>To change a framed picture into an inline picture, click on the desired picture with the &LMB; once.  This selects the frame
+of the picture.</para>
+<para>Now click and hold with the &RMB; and a popup menu will appear.  In this menu, is an item labeled
+<guilabel>Inline Frame</guilabel>.  Select this option by clicking with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>&kword; has now converted this to an inline frame.</para>
+<note><para>&kword; tries to make a reasonable estimation of where in the text the inline image should be inserted.</para>
+</note>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
diff --git a/doc/kword/headerfooter.docbook b/doc/kword/headerfooter.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..25221cd66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/headerfooter.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<sect1 id="headers-and-footers">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Headers/Footers</title>
+<indexterm><primary>headers</primary><secondary>using</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>footers</primary><secondary>using</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<sect2 id="headers-and-footers-intro"><title>Introduction</title>
+<para>With multi-page documents, you might want to provide certain
+information at the top or bottom of each page throughout the document.
+Headers or footers can provide the reader with important information and they tie your
+documents together visually. </para>
+
+<para>Headers and footers are special frames.
+You can edit the text and data within the headers and
+footers just as you would any other text frame. What makes headers and footers
+different from most other frames in &kword; is that they are automatically created at the top and bottom
+of each page.</para>
+
+<note><para>Headers and footers are only available when using text oriented templates.</para></note>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="headers-and-footers-use"><title>Using headers and footers</title>
+<para>You can toggle headers and footers on and off independently at any
+time.</para>
+
+<para>You can toggle the headers by selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enable/Disable Document Headers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+
+<para>You can toggle the footers by selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enable/Disable Document Footers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+
+<para>The footers will be
+added below the margins you set under page setup.  The text within the
+main frames will be moved so the headers and/or footers do not overlap
+any text.</para>
+
+<para>Since headers and footers are simply text frames that are placed on each page, you can use all of the
+tools and techniques you are familiar with to create your header and footer information.</para>
+
+<para>For more information on options for headers and footers, see the section on
+<link linkend="page-format">Formatting the page</link>. </para>
+<para>For information on page numbers see the section on <link linkend="page-number">Page Numbering</link>.</para>
+<para>For information on formatting the frame, see the section on
+<link linkend="format-frame">Setting the Properties for a Frame</link>.</para>
+<para>For an example of how to place the page numbers on the outside of even and odd pages, see the
+<link linkend="qd-page-numbers">How do I?</link> section.</para>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/incindbut.png b/doc/kword/incindbut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0ecefb2fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/incindbut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/index.docbook b/doc/kword/index.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3a07e5c8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/index.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,1852 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" ?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//KDE//DTD DocBook XML V4.2-Based Variant V1.1//EN" "dtd/kdex.dtd" [
+  <!ENTITY kappname "&kword;">
+  <!ENTITY % addindex "IGNORE">
+  <!ENTITY fundamentals SYSTEM "fundimentals.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY tutorial SYSTEM "tutorial.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY basics SYSTEM "basics.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY storeprint SYSTEM "storeprint.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY editing SYSTEM "editing.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY pageformat SYSTEM "pageformat.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY frames SYSTEM "frames.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY formatframe SYSTEM "formatframes.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY formatpara SYSTEM "formatpara.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY tabstops SYSTEM "tabstops.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY formatcharacters SYSTEM "formatchar.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY styles SYSTEM "styles.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY columns SYSTEM "columns.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY tabls SYSTEM "table.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY headersfooters SYSTEM "headerfooter.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY templatecreation SYSTEM "templatecreation.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY guides4 SYSTEM "kwordguides4.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY mbtb SYSTEM "mbtb.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY opt SYSTEM "opt.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY filedlg SYSTEM "filedlg.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY techstuff SYSTEM "techinfo.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY graphics SYSTEM "graphics.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY toc SYSTEM "toc.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY parts SYSTEM "kparts.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY formulas SYSTEM "formulas.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY lists SYSTEM "lists.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY variables SYSTEM "docvariables.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY expressions SYSTEM "expressions.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY links SYSTEM "doclinks.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY comments SYSTEM "doccomments.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY footend SYSTEM "footendnotes.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY a11y SYSTEM "a11y.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY struct SYSTEM "docstruct.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY mmerge SYSTEM "mailmerge.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY insfile SYSTEM "insertfile.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY bookmarks SYSTEM "bookmarks.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY migrating SYSTEM "migrating.docbook">
+  <!ENTITY chapnumb SYSTEM "chapnumb.docbook">
+
+  <!ENTITY % English "INCLUDE" > <!-- change language only here -->
+]>
+
+<book lang="&language;">
+<bookinfo>
+<title>The &kword; Handbook</title>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<author>
+<firstname>Gary</firstname>
+<surname>Cramblitt</surname>
+<affiliation>
+<address><email>garycramblitt@comcast.net</email></address>
+</affiliation>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+<copyright>
+<year>2000-2006</year>
+<holder>Michael McBride</holder>
+</copyright>
+<copyright>
+<year>2006</year>
+<holder>Gary Cramblitt</holder>
+</copyright>
+
+<legalnotice>&FDLNotice;</legalnotice>
+
+<date>2006-04-23</date>
+<releaseinfo>1.5</releaseinfo>
+
+<abstract>
+<para>
+&kword; is a complete word-processing and simple desktop publishing program. It is part of the
+&koffice; suite of utilities.
+</para>
+<para>
+This manual describes &kword; 1.5.
+</para>
+</abstract>
+
+<keywordset>
+<keyword>KDE</keyword>
+<keyword>KWord</keyword>
+<keyword>KOffice</keyword>
+<keyword>word processing</keyword>
+</keywordset>
+
+</bookinfo>
+
+<chapter id="introduction">
+<title>Introduction</title>
+
+<sect1 id="introduction1">
+<title>Introduction</title>
+<indexterm><primary>introduction</primary></indexterm>
+<para>
+&kword;, is a full featured
+
+<acronym>WYSIWYG</acronym> (What You See Is What You Get)
+Word-processor/Desktop Publishing Program.
+</para>
+
+<indexterm><primary>&koffice;</primary><secondary>applications</secondary></indexterm><para>
+&kword; is part of the &koffice; productivity suite for the K Desktop
+Environment.  Other applications in &koffice; include:
+</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>&kspread; (A spreadsheet application.)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&kpresenter; (A presentation creator.)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&karbon14; (A vector drawing program.)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&kivio; (A flowchart creator)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&krita; (A pixel based drawing program.)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&kugar; (A report generation tool.)  </para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&kexi; (An integrated environment for databases.)  </para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&kchart; (A chart and graph creator.)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><application>KPlato</application> (An integrated project management and planning tool.)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>and a simple integrated office desktop, to help organize your
+work.</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>
+All &koffice; applications were designed from the beginning to take
+advantage of the features of &kde;. Because of this, &kword; (like
+all of &koffice;), supports many advanced features you expect from todays desktop environment.
+</para>
+
+<para>
+&kword; is a word-processor which can work either as a traditional word
+processor, or as a simple but powerful desktop publishing
+application. This is possible because &kword; is a frame oriented word
+processor, not a page oriented word processor (&Microsoft;
+<application>Word</application>,&Wordperfect;
+and <application>Applixware</application> are all page oriented word
+processors).
+</para>
+
+<para>
+Frame oriented word processors work by creating one or more
+<emphasis>frames</emphasis> per page. Each frame acts as a boundary (like
+a frame which surrounds a photograph), which limits the text to the
+boundaries of the frame.  You can move and re-size boundaries to define
+exactly where on the page the text will be placed.  As you re-size
+frames, the text is reworked to fit within these frames.
+</para>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata format="PNG" fileref="intro1.png" align="center"/>
+        </imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Button</phrase></textobject>
+</mediaobject>
+
+<para>
+You can easily <emphasis>connect</emphasis> one frame to the next. When
+you connect two frames, any text which does not fit within the first
+frame, flows easily and automatically into the next.
+</para>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata format="PNG" fileref="intro2.png"
+               align="center"/> </imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Button</phrase></textobject>
+</mediaobject>
+
+<para>
+In addition to text, you can include virtually anything inside a frame.
+A frame can contain a spreadsheet, pictures, a database form,
+or nearly any piece of data. Since each page can have any number of
+frames, documents can appear quite sophisticated while still remaining
+easy to edit.
+</para>
+
+<para>
+&kword; users also benefit from the auto wrap features of &kword;. When
+you place one frame on top of part of another frame, the text from the
+<emphasis>lowest</emphasis> frame can be automatically wrapped around
+the newly created frame. This reformatting occurs in a
+<acronym>WYSIWYG</acronym> Graphical User Interface, and happens
+automatically while you edit.
+</para>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata format="PNG" fileref="intro3.png" align="center"/>
+        </imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Button</phrase></textobject>
+</mediaobject>
+
+<indexterm><primary>&kword;</primary><secondary>features</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>
+As a word-processor, &kword; includes the most used options of many other
+word processors, while maintaining a simple interface. In addition to
+the features you expect from a modern word-processing package (text
+entry, bold face, italics, text alignment, text printing, &etc;),
+&kword; can:
+</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use predefined templates, to generate complex document layout with
+one click of the mouse. As a user, you can build your own templates,
+download templates from the web, or use the current document to create a
+new template.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; provides automatic numbering of lists and automatic bulleting of lists with any character or shape you want. <!--You are not
+limited to numbers or letters, you can define your own series for your
+special lists.--> </para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Define paragraph layout styles, frame layout styles and table layout styles, to shorten the editing time of
+your document, and ensure consistency throughout a long document.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Edit headers and footers for your documents.  You can have
+different headers for even and odd pages, or the same headers
+throughout.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Search through your document for text. You can further refine
+your search by specifying font, format, font size and many other
+features of the text. By adding wild-cards to your search, the search and
+replace functions can become very powerful.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Footnotes and Endnotes.  &kword; has all the tools necessary to manage footnotes or endnotes.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Tables. You can either use the table formatting capabilities of
+&kword;, or you can import any spreadsheet from &kspread;.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; has built in support for KParts.  KParts allows you to
+insert any spreadsheet, picture, chart, graph, document, or any other
+data type from any &koffice; application.  You are free to edit that
+KPart using the tools designed for that task, without needing to start
+the application at all.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; can zoom in or out to make the editing of your documents
+easier on any computer, and with any font size. </para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; supports customizable toolbars and menus.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; has extensive internationalization support including right-to-left and left-to-right text flow.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can embed formulas directly into &kword; using the integrated
+formula editor.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can have &kword; auto-correct many of the most common spelling and punctuation mistakes.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; can check the spelling of your document. &kword; can automatically mark misspelled words as you type.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can access an on-line thesaurus (English only) to find the exact word you are looking for.</para>
+</listitem><listitem>
+<para>&kword; can automatically create a table of contents, and keep it up to date.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; has optional autocompletion for commonly used words.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; has support for document bookmarks, to easily navigate large documents..</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; has support for Internet hyperlinks and email addresses.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; has the ability for proofreaders to make comments about portions of the text.  These
+comments are stored in the &kword; file, and can be changed or deleted easily.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; can merge data from an outside database, spreadsheet, document or text file to create mailinglists, form letters, invoices, etc.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; can load and save documents from other wordprocessing programs with an extensive list of filters.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem><para>&kword; can create PDF files.</para></listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can edit one document from multiple views.  This allows you to have several windows open on 
+<emphasis>one document</emphasis>.  Edits in one window are immediately updated in the other window.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; can surround your frames with borders and you can set the background color of each frame separately if you want.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>&kword; has several accessibility features, including the ability to speak all or part of
+a document using Text-to-Speech (KTTS) and manipulate documents using the keyboard only.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>The best part about &kword;, is the effort that has been placed to
+make &kword; a productive tool for all your needs from the simplest
+letter, to the most complex document you might need to work on.</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="who-reads">
+<title>What parts of this guide should I read?</title>
+<indexterm><primary>getting started</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Anyone who has looked at the table of contents has surely come to
+the conclusion that reading this manual from cover to cover, is an
+unreasonable (and fortunately unnecessary) task.</para>
+
+<para>This user guide is designed to be helpful to a wide variety of
+users, from the very experienced, to the novice user.  Since different users will have different needs, each section of
+this manual is self-contained.  The user is not expected to have read all of
+the previous sections of the manual to find the instructions
+useful.</para>
+
+<para>To help determine what
+should be read before starting to work with &kword;, a suggested
+reading list for three levels of users is given below.</para>
+
+<para>If each of these sections is read <emphasis>before</emphasis>
+ starting to use &kword;, using &kword; will be easier.</para>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="3">
+<thead>
+<row>
+<entry>Experience Level</entry>
+<entry>Previous Experience</entry>
+<entry>What you should read</entry>
+</row>
+</thead>
+
+<tbody>
+<row>
+<entry>Novice</entry>
+<entry>No previous computer experience</entry>
+<entry>
+<simplelist type="vert" columns="1">
+<member><link linkend="fundamentals">Fundamentals</link></member>
+<member><link linkend="tutorial">Step by Step Tutorial</link></member>
+<member><link linkend="kword-screen">The &kword; Screen</link></member>
+<member><link linkend="store-print">Document Storage and Printing</link></member>
+<member><link linkend="guides-2">Editing Your Document</link></member>
+<member><link linkend="menu-intro">Introduction to Menu Bars and Toolbars</link></member>
+<member><link linkend="wp-vs-dtp">The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates</link></member>
+</simplelist>
+</entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Intermediate</entry>
+<entry>Comfortable with other page based word processors (&Microsoft;
+<application>Word</application>, <application>Word Perfect</application>
+or <application>Applixware</application>.)</entry>
+<entry><simplelist type="vert" columns="1">
+<member><link linkend="fundamentals">Fundamentals</link></member>
+<member><link linkend="tutorial">Step by Step Tutorial</link></member>
+<member><link linkend="wp-vs-dtp">The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates</link></member>
+</simplelist></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Advanced User</entry>
+<entry>Comfortable with other frames based word processors (<application>Frame Maker</application>,
+&etc;).</entry>
+<entry><simplelist type="vert" columns="1">
+<member><link linkend="wp-vs-dtp">The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates</link></member>
+</simplelist></entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+<para>These sections will help with the basic information. As other specific questions or situations arise, the
+other sections of this manual can be used as a reference.</para>
+
+<para>Obviously this will not cover everyone's needs.  Please use it as a guide to help
+determine which parts of the manual will be helpful to read before you begin using &kword;.</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+</chapter>
+
+<!-- **************************************************************************************************** -->
+&fundamentals;
+&tutorial;
+&basics;
+&storeprint;
+&editing;
+
+<chapter id="guides-3">
+<title>Detailed Guides: Document Layout</title>
+
+<para>This section of the guide is designed to help the user with the format and layout of their
+documents.  The section will begin with information on changing the size and shape of the page
+and the margins, and work progressively through smaller and smaller
+blocks of text (frames, then paragraphs, then characters). At each level, all of the format and
+layout options will be explained.</para>
+
+<para>After discussing the formatting of individual characters, the manual will elaborate on styles
+(to provide consistent formatting through the document), lists, multi-column documents, tables and finally the use of headers
+and footers in a document.</para>
+
+<para>The final part will show you how to save a document as a template for future documents.</para>
+
+&pageformat;
+&frames;
+&formatframe;
+&formatpara;
+&tabstops;
+&formatcharacters;
+&styles;
+&columns;
+&lists;
+&tabls;
+&headersfooters;
+&templatecreation;
+</chapter>
+
+<chapter id="guides-4"><title>Detailed Guides: More than just text</title>
+<para>Up to this point in the documentation, we have been focusing on text.  That is about to change!</para>
+<para>This chapter will discuss inserting a table of contents, graphics, page numbers, links to web pages and how to
+insert other types of &koffice; data into a document.</para>
+<para>This chapter will also cover document information and its relationship to document variables.</para>
+<sect1 id="documentinfo"><title>Entering Document information </title>
+<indexterm><primary>document information</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&kword; can store information about the author and the document in the same file as the text and data of the document.</para>
+<para>Entering this information into &kword; has two potential benefits:</para>
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para>This information will always be available for reference.  This is especially important in situations where
+there are many possible authors (employees) and hundreds (or thousands) of documents.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>The information supplied here, can be inserted automatically into the document as a
+<link linkend="variables">document variable</link>.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+<para>To enter document information, simply select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Document Information...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar.  This will bring up a dialog box with two tabs.</para>
+<para>The first tab is labeled <guilabel>General</guilabel>. Enter a document <guilabel>Title</guilabel>, <guilabel>Subject</guilabel> lines, <guilabel>Keywords</guilabel> and an <guilabel>Abstract</guilabel>. </para>
+<para>The bottom of this page displays the <guilabel>Type</guilabel> of the document, the date of the creation and modification, the last printing date, the <guilabel>Total editing time</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Revision number</guilabel>. Click on <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to clear all data and set the actual date as creation date.</para>
+<tip><para>Both the document <guilabel>Title</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Abstract</guilabel> can be accessed through<link linkend="variables">document variables</link>.</para></tip>
+<para>The second tab is labeled <guilabel>Author</guilabel> and has blanks to enter the authors name, <guilabel>Initials</guilabel>, <guilabel>Title</guilabel>, <guilabel>Position</guilabel>, <guilabel>Company</guilabel> and contact information (email address, telephone numbers and physical address).</para>
+<tip><para>Every value entered in this dialog can be inserted as a
+<link linkend="variables">document variables</link>.</para></tip>
+<para>At the bottom of the dialog is a button labeled <guibutton>Load From Address Book</guibutton>. Clicking on this button will automatically insert your information contained in the &kde; address book into this &kword; document information dialog.</para>
+<note><para>You must inform the &kde; address book which entry corresponds to your information.  </para>
+<para>To do this, open the &kde; address book, select the entry that contains your name and address.  Now select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Set as Personal Contact Data</guimenuitem></menuchoice>from the menubar in the &kde; address book. This only needs to be performed once.</para>
+<para>&kword; will now insert the entered information when the <guibutton>Load From Address Book</guibutton> button is clicked.</para></note>
+<para>The second button <guibutton>Delete Personal Data</guibutton> allows you to remove all data of the entries on this page.</para>
+<para>When finished entering the information, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to apply the changes.
+If any document variables were changed, &kword; will update their values throughout the document.</para>
+</sect1>
+&graphics;
+&toc;
+&variables;
+&expressions;
+&links;
+&comments;
+&footend;
+&parts;
+&insfile;
+&bookmarks;
+&formulas;
+</chapter>
+
+<!-- **************************************************************************************************** -->
+<!-- Detailed Guides: For Users with Disabilities -->
+&a11y;
+
+<!-- **************************************************************************************************** -->
+<chapter id="advanced-topics"><title>Advanced Topics</title>
+<para>The sections that are included in this chapter are for advanced users.  The instructions for these sections
+will assume you are familiar with the basic operation of &kword;.</para>
+&struct;
+<!--&chapnumb;   Still needs to be written-->
+&mmerge;
+</chapter>
+
+<!-- **************************************************************************************************** -->
+<!--&migrating;   Still needs to be written-->
+<!-- **************************************************************************************************** -->
+<chapter id="quickdirty">
+<title>How do I...</title>
+<para>The next part of &kword; documentation is designed to provide examples on how to solve specific
+problems using &kword;.</para>
+<para>Each section is a self contained list of steps, and refers the reader to other sections of the documentation
+for more complete information on different aspects of &kword;.</para>
+<para>These examples were selected to:</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>Show how &kword; might function differently from other word processors you are used to.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Show how to combine several elements to create the desired document.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Illustrate the power of &kword;.</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>You can use these examples as recipes for your document, or modify them to create the look or content
+you desire.</para>
+<sect1 id="qd-page-numbers">
+<title>How do I get the pages numbers on the outsides of the pages and
+the title in the middle of the header (like a novel)?</title>
+<indexterm><primary>insert page numbers</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This first example shows how you can combine center tabs and variables in a header to create a common format to your document.</para>
+<note><para>Your document must be at least 2 pages long <emphasis>before</emphasis> you begin this procedure. </para></note>
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Document Information</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click on the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click once in the text box labeled <guilabel>Title</guilabel> with the &LMB; and enter
+the desired document title.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Page Layout...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click on the <guilabel>Header &amp; Footer</guilabel> tab.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Select <guilabel>Different header for even and odd pages</guilabel>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Then click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enable Document Headers</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Move to an odd numbered page in your document, and click in the header box.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paragraph...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>The <guilabel>Paragraph Settings</guilabel> dialog will appear. Click on the <guilabel>Tabulators</guilabel> tab.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Using the arrows of the spinbox labeled <guilabel>Position</guilabel> enter a value that is exactly 1/2 the frame width.  The frame width is
+ listed directly below the <guilabel>Position</guilabel> spin box.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Center</guibutton> radio button in the section entitled <guilabel>Alignment</guilabel>.</para></listitem>
+ 
+<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button again.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Using the arrows of the spinbox labeled <guilabel>Position</guilabel> enter a value that is slightly less than the frame width.  The frame width is
+ listed directly below the <guilabel>Position</guilabel> spin box.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Right</guibutton> radio button in the section entitled <guilabel>Alignment</guilabel>.</para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para>Then click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click in the header again with the &LMB;.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Type the &Tab; key.  This will move the cursor to the center of the header.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Variable</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Document Information</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Document Title</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Type the &Tab; key again.  This will move the cursor near the right margin of the header.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Variable</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Page</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Page Number</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Move to an even numbered page in your document, and click in the header box.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paragraph</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>The <guilabel>Paragraph Settings</guilabel> dialog will appear. Click on the <guilabel>Tabulators</guilabel> tab.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Using the arrows of the spinbox labeled <guilabel>Position</guilabel> enter a value that is exactly 1/2 the frame width.  The frame width is
+ listed directly below the <guilabel>Position</guilabel> spin box.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click the <guibutton>Center</guibutton> radio button in the section entitled <guilabel>Alignment</guilabel>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Then click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click in the header again with the &LMB;.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Variable</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Page</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Page Number</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Type the &Tab; key.  This will move the cursor to the center of the header.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Variable</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Document Information</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Document Title</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+<para>That completes the procedure. Your document now has the title of the document in the center along the top of each page, and
+the page numbers on the outside corners of the pages.  </para>
+<para>If you want page numbers on the bottom of the pages, you can use <link linkend="headers-and-footers">Footers</link> instead of
+headers in your document.</para>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="qd-pdf">
+<title>How do I create a <literal role="extension">.pdf</literal> file?</title>
+<indexterm><primary>creating a PDF file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>PDF, creating</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; differs slightly from other word processors here.  Instead of saving your file as a
+<literal role="extension">.pdf</literal> file, you <emphasis>print</emphasis> your file to create the
+<literal role="extension">.pdf</literal> file.</para>
+<para>When you are ready to create a <literal role="extension">.pdf</literal> file from your document:</para>
+
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+<para>This will bring up the <guilabel>Print</guilabel> dialog.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>In the combo box labeled <guilabel>Name</guilabel>, select <guilabel>Print to File (PDF)</guilabel></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Enter your desired filename in the <guilabel>Output file:</guilabel> text box.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>If you wish to make any changes to the PDF formatting, select <guibutton>Properties</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>A complete explanation to all these properties, is beyond the scope of this document.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+<para>Your PDF file will be created and saved at the location specified in <guilabel>Output file</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>For more information on printing in &kde;, visit <ulink url="http://printing.kde.org">The &kde; Print web page</ulink>.</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="qd-template-remove">
+<title>How do I remove template categories from the startup dialog.</title>
+
+<para>Templates can only be removed using the <guilabel>Create Template</guilabel> dialog. For instructions, click
+<link linkend="template-delete-group">Removing template group</link>.</para>
+</sect1>
+
+<!--
+<sect1 id="qd-watermark">
+<title>How do I create a watermark for my document</title>
+<para>To be written</para>
+</sect1>
+-->
+</chapter>
+
+<!-- **************************************************************************************************** -->
+&mbtb;
+&opt;
+<!-- **************************************************************************************************** -->
+
+<chapter id="q-and-a">
+<title>Questions and Answers</title>
+<indexterm><primary>FAQ</primary></indexterm>
+
+<qandaset id="faq">
+<qandaentry>
+<question>
+<para>When I try to load a document or picture, it does not appear in my dialog
+box, but I know I saved it there. Why can I not see it?</para>
+</question>
+<answer>
+<para>Check to make sure that you have selected the correct file type in the <link linkend="file-dialog">open dialog box</link>.
+If you save a file in one format, but ask
+&kword; to show you the files from another format, you will not see your saved file.</para>
+</answer>
+</qandaentry>
+
+<qandaentry>
+<question>
+<para>What is a <literal role="extension">kwd</literal> file?
+What is a <literal role="extension">kwt</literal> file?</para>
+</question>
+<answer>
+<para>A <literal role="extension">kwd</literal> file is a &kword; document.  </para>
+<para>A <literal role="extension">kwt</literal> file is a &kword; template file.  </para>
+</answer>
+</qandaentry>
+
+<qandaentry>
+<question id="updates">
+<para>Where can I get updates?</para>
+</question>
+<answer>
+<para>For updates to &kword; you should always check the following sites:</para>
+<para>The &koffice; website (<ulink url="http://koffice.kde.org">http://koffice.kde.org</ulink>) is the first place to look for updates.
+Any software updates, bug fixes or announcements of new releases of &koffice; will be found here. </para>
+<para>Addons for &koffice; can be found at <ulink url="http://koffice.kde.org/addons/">http://koffice.kde.org/addons/</ulink>.</para>
+</answer>
+</qandaentry>
+
+<qandaentry>
+<question id="themes">
+<para>How do themes affect &kword;?</para>
+</question>
+<answer>
+<para>&kword; (like all of &koffice;) is completely themeable.  You can use any QT or &kde; theme to customize the look of &kword;.</para>
+</answer>
+</qandaentry>
+
+<qandaentry>
+<question id="readdoc">
+<para>Can I use &kword; to read &Microsoft; Word files?</para>
+</question>
+<answer>
+<para>&kword; does have the ability to import &Microsoft; Word files.  The conversion process is not perfect,
+and some formatting information will be lost.  For more details please refer to the
+<link linkend="filters">Import/Export Filters</link> section of the documentation.</para>
+</answer>
+</qandaentry>
+
+<qandaentry>
+<question id="writedoc">
+<para>Can I save my &kword; document as a &Microsoft; Word file?</para>
+</question>
+<answer>
+<para>At the moment, &kword; does not yet provide support for exporting to &Microsoft; Word
+documents. If you need to exchange documents with MS Word,
+you should use Rich Text Format as an intermediate file format.
+Rich Text Format files
+are converted well by both &Microsoft; Word and &kword;,</para>
+</answer>
+</qandaentry>
+
+<qandaentry>
+<question id="writepdf">
+<para>Can I save my &kword; document as a PDF file?</para>
+</question>
+<answer>
+<para>Yes.  Instructions on creating a PDF file are found
+<link linkend="qd-pdf">here</link>.</para>
+</answer>
+</qandaentry>
+
+<qandaentry>
+<question id="exchangedoc">
+<para>I have to exchange documents with a friend who does not have &kword;; what is
+the best way to do this ?</para>
+</question>
+<answer>
+<para>What you and your friend need to do is agree on a file format that both word processors
+can read and write effectively.  Rich Text Format is probably a good choice.</para>
+</answer>
+</qandaentry>
+
+</qandaset>
+</chapter>
+<!-- **************************************************************************************************** -->
+
+<chapter id="credits">
+<title>Credits and Licenses</title>
+<indexterm><primary>credits</primary><secondary>options</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>licenses</primary><secondary>options</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; Copyright 1999-2005 by The &kword; Team</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<title>&kword; Developers (Alphabetically)</title>
+<listitem><para>Dag Andersen <email>danders@get2net.dk</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>John Califf <email>jcaliff@compuzone.net</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Frank Dekervel <email>frank.dekervel@student.kuleuven.ac.be</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Krister Wicksell Eriksson <email>krister.wicksell@spray.se</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&David.Faure; &David.Faure.mail;</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Nicolas Goutte <email>goutte@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Shaheed Haque <email>srhaque@iee.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&Simon.Hausmann; &Simon.Hausmann.mail;</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Nash Hoogwater <email>nrhoogwater@wanadoo.nl</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&Stephan.Kulow; &Stephan.Kulow.mail;</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Sven L&uuml;ppken <email>sven@kde.org></email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Laurent Montel <email>montel@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&Daniel.Naber; &Daniel.Naber.mail;</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Reginald Stadlbauer <email>reggie@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Werner Trobin <email>trobin@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Torben Weis <email>weis@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&Joseph.Wenninger; <email>jowenn@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Thomas Zander <email>zander@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<title>&kword; Import/Export Filter Developers (Alphabetically)</title>
+<listitem><para>Enno Bartels <email>ebartels@nwn.de</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Wolf-Michael Bolle</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>&Matthias.Kalle.Dalheimer; <email>kalle@dalheimer.de</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Clarence Dang <email>dang@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Frank Dekervel <email>frank.dekervel@student.kuleuven.ac.be</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Nicolas Goutte <email>goutte@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Tomasz Grobelny <email>grotk@poczta.onet.pl</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Shaheed Haque <email>srhaque@iee.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Ariya Hidayat <email>ariya@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Robert Jacolin <email>rjacolin@ifrance.com</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Michael Johnson</para></listitem>
+<!--<listitem><para>Alexandros Karypidis<email>mailto:karypid@inf.uth.gr</email></para></listitem>-->
+<listitem><para>Ewald Snel <email>ewald@rambo.its.tudelft.nl</email></para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<title>&kformula; developers</title>
+<listitem><para>Andrea Rizzi <email>rizzi@kde.org</email></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Ulrich Kuettler <email>ulrich.kuettler@mailbox.tu-dresden.de</email></para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>Documentation by &Mike.McBride;</para>
+
+<!-- TRANS:CREDIT_FOR_TRANSLATORS -->
+&underFDL;
+<para>This program is licensed under the terms of the <ulink
+ url="http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/library.html#SEC1">&GNU; Library General
+Public License v2</ulink>.</para>
+
+
+</chapter>
+
+<!-- **************************************************************************************************** -->
+<appendix id="installation">
+<title>Installation</title>
+<indexterm><primary>&kword;</primary><secondary>installation</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<sect1 id="getting-kword">
+<title>How to obtain &kword;</title>
+
+<para>&kword; is part of the &kde; project <ulink
+url="http://www.kde.org">http://www.kde.org</ulink>.  &kword; is located
+in the &koffice; package which can be obtained from &kde-ftp;, the
+main ftp site of the &kde; project. </para>
+
+<para>Many distributions offer precompiled binaries on their ftp sites.  Please check your distribution's web sites for more information.</para>
+
+<para>If you want to compile &kword; from source, then you should read through the next few sections for help on compilation.</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="requirements">
+<title>Requirements</title>
+<indexterm><primary>&kword;</primary><secondary>requirements</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>In order to successfully use &kword;, you need:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>&Qt; Toolkit 3.2 or later.  This can be obtained from <ulink
+url="http://www.trolltech.com">Trolltech</ulink>.</para>
+<tip><para>While &koffice; will compile and run with any version of &Qt; 3.2 or later, it is recommended that you compile and install
+&Qt; 3.3.4 to take advantage of all the bug fixes (including some security fixes) that have occurred.</para></tip>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>&kde; 3.3.0 libraries (kdelibs) and the &kde; 3.3.0 base package
+(kdebase).  These can be obtained from the <ulink
+url="http://www.kde.org">&kde; web page.</ulink></para>
+<tip><para>While &koffice; will compile and run with any version of &kde; 3.3.0 or later, it is recommended that you compile and install
+&kde; 3.4 to take advantage of all the bug fixes that have occurred.</para>
+<para>It is also recommended that you install the arts package 1.3.2 from the
+<ulink url="ftp://ftp.kde.org">&kde; &FTP; site</ulink>.</para></tip>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>&GNU; c++ compiler or any c++ compiler that supports exceptions.  For help on obtaining this, please refer to
+your distribution's web site.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para><application>autoconf 2.53</application> or later and <application>automake 1.7</application> or later</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<note><para>In order to use external databases for mail merging documents, you must have
+the QT toolkit compiled with SQL support.  To add SQL support (as a plugin), simply include
+<option>-plugin-sql-<replaceable>driver</replaceable></option> in your configure line.</para>
+<para><replaceable>driver</replaceable> should be replaced with <replaceable>mysql</replaceable>, <replaceable>odbc</replaceable>,
+<replaceable>CVS</replaceable>, or <replaceable>psql</replaceable> as is appropriate for your database needs.</para></note>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="compilation">
+<title>Compilation and Installation</title>
+
+<para>Complete instructions on installing &koffice; from source are located at
+<ulink url="http://www.koffice.org/download/source.php">http://www.koffice.org/download/source.php</ulink>.</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</appendix>
+
+<appendix id="commandline">
+<title>&kword; Command Line Options</title>
+<indexterm><primary>&kword;</primary><secondary>command line options</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can specify some initial actions for &kword;.  The most
+commonly used options are discussed below with instructions on finding
+help on the rest of the command line options.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Specifying the file name</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Probably the most common command line option used is to specify
+the file to edit.</para>
+
+<para>The format for specifying the file name is:</para>
+
+<screen width="40">
+<prompt>$</prompt> <userinput><command>kword</command> <replaceable>filename</replaceable></userinput>
+</screen>
+
+<para>Example:</para>
+<informalexample><screen width="40">
+<prompt>$</prompt> <userinput><command>kword</command> <filename>Resume.kwd</filename></userinput>
+</screen></informalexample>
+<para>This will cause &kword; to load <filename>Resume.kwd</filename> for editing.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Show &kword; version</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>To see the version numbers for the QT toolkit, &kde;, and &kword; type:</para>
+
+<screen width="40">
+<prompt>$</prompt> <userinput><command>kword -v</command></userinput>
+</screen>
+
+<para><emphasis>Show the license for &kword;</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>To see the license for &kword; type:</para>
+
+<screen width="40">
+<prompt>$</prompt> <userinput><command>kword --license</command></userinput>
+</screen>
+
+
+<para><emphasis>Show &kword; developer list</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>To see the list of developers for &kword; type:</para>
+
+<screen width="40">
+<prompt>$</prompt> <userinput><command>kword --author</command></userinput>
+</screen>
+
+<para><emphasis>Other command line options</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>There are many other, rarely used, command line options.  You can get detailed help on these options by typing:</para>
+<screen width="40">
+<prompt>$</prompt> <userinput><command>kword</command> <option>--help</option></userinput>
+</screen>
+
+</appendix>
+
+<appendix id="filters">
+<title>Import/Export Filters</title>
+<indexterm><primary>&kword;</primary><secondary>filters</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>filters</primary></indexterm>
+
+<sect1 id="filter-intro"><title>Introduction to Filters</title>
+<para>&kword; has the ability (with varying success) to load data
+from foreign (non-&koffice;) data files.  &kword; also has the ability to
+save data as non-&koffice; data files.  This is provided to help users
+of &kword; to interact more seamlessly with people who use other
+operating systems and wordprocessors.</para>
+
+<para>&kword; does this by loading a non-&koffice; datafile into
+memory and passing the data through a <emphasis>filter</emphasis>
+to extract as much information as possible from the data file.  Some
+formatting information will be lost or changed by the filter in the
+attempt.</para>
+
+<para>When &kword; reads data <emphasis>into</emphasis>
+&kword; from a non-&koffice; file format, it is
+<emphasis>importing</emphasis> the data.</para>
+
+
+<para>When &kword; saves a &kword; document as a non-&koffice;
+file format, it is <emphasis>exporting</emphasis> the data.</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 id="filters-included"><title>Filters included in &kword;</title>
+
+<para>&kword; comes with the following filters:</para>
+
+<informaltable>
+
+<tgroup cols="3">
+<thead><row><entry>Application</entry><entry>Import</entry><entry>Export</entry></row></thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>Abiword</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>AmiPro</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Applixword</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>No</entry></row>
+<row><entry>&HTML;</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>&kpresenter;</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>No</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Hancom Word</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>No</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Magic Point Presentation</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>No</entry></row>
+<row><entry>&Microsoft; Powerpoint</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>No</entry></row>
+<row><entry>&Microsoft; Word</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>No</entry></row>
+<row><entry>&Microsoft; Write</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Oasis OpenDocument</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Openoffice.org Presentation</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>No</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Openoffice.org Text Document</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Palm Document</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>PDF</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>No</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Plain Text</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>RTF</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>SGML</entry><entry>No</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>TeX Document</entry><entry>No</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>WML</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>Wordperfect</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>Yes</entry></row>
+<row><entry>&XML;</entry><entry>Yes</entry><entry>No</entry></row>
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+<para>For details on each filter, please refer to the <ulink 
+url="http://koffice.org/filters/">&koffice; filters web page</ulink>. </para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+
+
+</appendix>
+
+<appendix id="keys">
+<title>Key Bindings Summary</title>
+<indexterm><primary>keyboard shortcuts</primary><secondary>table of</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Keybindings for Working with Documents</para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2"><tbody>
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-new">Start New
+Document</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>N</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-open">Open
+Document</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>O</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-save">Save
+Document</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>S</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-print">Print
+Document</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-close">Close
+Document</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>W</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-quit">Quit
+&kword;</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Q</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+
+<para>Keybindings for Character Selection</para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2"><tbody>
+<row><entry>Move selection one character to the left.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Left Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry>Move selection one word to the left.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Left Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry>Move selection one character to the right.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Right Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry>Move selection one word to the right.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Right Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+
+<row><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the character directly up one line.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Up Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the first character of the line directly above.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Up Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+
+<row><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the character directly down one line.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Down Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the last character of the line directly below.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Down Arrow</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+
+<row><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the beginning of the line.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Home</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the beginning of the document.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Home</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+
+<row><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the end of the line.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>End</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry>Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the end of the document.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>End</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+
+<row><entry>Moves the current endpoint one screen up.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Page-Up</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry>Moves the current endpoint one page up. The endpoint is located at the first character of this page.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Page-Up</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+
+
+<row><entry>Moves the current endpoint down one screen.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Page-Down</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+
+<row><entry>Moves the current endpoint down one page.  The endpoint is located at the first character of this page.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl; &Shift;<keycap>Page-Down</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+<row><entry>Select all text in the current frame.</entry><entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>A</keycap></keycombo></entry></row>
+
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+<para>Keybindings for Character Formatting</para>
+<informaltable>
+
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<tbody>
+<row>
+<entry>Toggle Boldface On/Off</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>B</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Toggle Italics On/Off</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>I</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Toggle Underline On/Off</entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>U</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="format-font">Format Font</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>F</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Decrease Font Size</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>&lt;</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Increase Font Size</entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>&gt;</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+
+
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+
+<para>Keybindings for Paragraph Formatting</para>
+<informaltable>
+
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<tbody>
+<row>
+<entry>Align Block (Justify)</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>J</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Align Center</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>C</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Align Left</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>L</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Align Right</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>R</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Format Paragraph</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+
+<para>Keybindings for Basic Editing Functions and Search and
+Replace</para>
+<informaltable>
+
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<tbody>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-copy">Copy</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>C</keycap></keycombo> (<keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Insert</keycap></keycombo>)</entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-cut">Cut</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>X</keycap></keycombo> (<keycombo
+action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Delete</keycap></keycombo>)</entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-paste">Paste</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>V</keycap></keycombo> (<keycombo
+action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Insert</keycap></keycombo>)</entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-find">Find</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>F</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link
+linkend="menu-replace">Replace</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>R</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-undo">Undo</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-redo">Redo</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+<para>Keybindings for Inserting</para>
+<informaltable>
+
+<tgroup cols="2"><tbody>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-create-text-frame">Create Text
+Frame</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F10</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-insert-picture">Insert
+Picture</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>F5</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-create-formula">Create
+Formula Frame</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F4</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-create-table">Create
+Table</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul"><keycap>F5</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link
+linkend="menu-insert-special-character">Insert Special
+Character</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Alt;&Shift;<keycap>C</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Insert Non-breaking Space</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Space</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Insert Soft Hyphen</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>-</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Insert Line
+Break</entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Return</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link
+linkend="menu-insert-hard-frame-break">Insert Hard Frame
+Break</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Return</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+
+<para>Keybindings for Accessibility</para>
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2"><tbody>
+<row>
+<entry>Popup Context Menu</entry>
+<entry><keycap>Menu</keycap> (see note below)</entry>
+</row>
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="a11y-motor-panel-sizing">Resize Panel Forward</link></entry>
+<entry><keycap>F8</keycap></entry>
+</row>
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="a11y-motor-panel-sizing">Resize Panel Reverse</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>F8</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="a11y-motor-moving-focus">Set Focus to Widget</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Alt;<keycap>F8</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+<row>
+<entry>Enter keyboard <link linkend="a11y-mouse-emulation">Mouse Emulation</link> mode</entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Alt;<keycap>F12</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+<row>
+<entry>Click mouse in <link linkend="a11y-mouse-emulation">Mouse Emulation</link> mode</entry>
+<entry><keycap>spacebar</keycap></entry>
+</row>
+<row>
+<entry>Go to Document Structure</entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Alt;<keycap>1</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+<row>
+<entry>Go to Document</entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Alt;<keycap>2</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+
+<note><para>
+On most keyboards, the <keycap>Menu</keycap> key is on the righthand side between
+the &Windows; and &Ctrl; keys.  It has a menu icon on it.
+</para></note>
+
+<para>Keybindings for <link linkend="a11y-mouse-navigation">Mouse Navigation</link></para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="mousenav.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Miscellaneous Keyboard Shortcuts</para>
+<informaltable>
+
+<tgroup cols="2"><tbody>
+<row>
+<entry>&kword; Handbook</entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Whats This?</entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Completion</entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>E</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-lower-frame">Lower Frame</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>L</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-raise-frame">Raise Frame</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>R</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry><link linkend="menu-format-stylist">Show Stylist</link></entry>
+<entry><keycombo action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>S</keycap></keycombo></entry>
+</row>
+
+
+
+
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</appendix>
+
+<appendix id="technical-info">
+<title>&kword; Technical details</title>
+
+&techstuff;
+<sect1 id="mimetype">
+<title>Kword &MIME; types</title>
+<indexterm><primary>&kword;</primary><secondary>&MIME; types</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The &kword; &MIME; type is :  application/x-kword</para>
+</sect1>
+</appendix>
+
+<!-- **************************************************************************************************** -->
+
+<glossary id="glossary">
+<title>Glossary</title>
+
+<glossentry id="defaspectratio">
+<glossterm>Aspect Ratio</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>This is the ratio of the measurement of a screen, picture or document
+horizontally compared to the vertical measurement.  All standard
+computer monitors have the same aspect ratio, regardless of their
+resolution. Any &kword; document that conforms to the standard
+screen will look good on any monitor.</para>
+<para>For many images, it is important to maintain the aspect ratio.  This prevents
+distortion to the picture.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defbinarycode">
+<glossterm>Binary code</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Binary code is the actual instructions for the computer. So if we
+refer to <emphasis>binaries</emphasis> we mean the executable &kword;
+program.  While computers have no difficulties reading binary files,
+they are not easily understood by people.  Compare this distribution method to <glossterm
+linkend="defsourcecode">Source Code</glossterm>. For more information on compiling &kword;, see
+the section entitled <link
+linkend="installation">Installation</link></para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defbitmap">
+<glossterm>Bitmap Image</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Bit mapped images are composed of individual dots.  This type of
+file is very good for photographs and complex drawings. The downside of
+using bitmap images, is that when you change the size of the image on
+the page, there is a loss of detail. The file names of such pictures
+often end in <emphasis>jpeg</emphasis>, <emphasis>png</emphasis> or
+<emphasis>gif</emphasis>. </para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defcell">
+<glossterm>Cells</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Tables are made up of rows and columns of cells.  Each cell is
+defined by a combination of the row and column of a heading.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defclipboard">
+<glossterm>Clipboard</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>The clipboard is a temporary storage area in memory.  Whenever you
+use the <guimenuitem>Cut</guimenuitem> or
+<guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem> command, you are placing the object that
+was selected into this memory location.  Then when you use the
+<guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem> command, you insert the information
+from the clipboard into the document.  For more information see the
+section on <link linkend="clipboard">Cut/Copy/Paste</link>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defcompiling">
+<glossterm>Compiling</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>When you compile a program, you are converting it from
+a source file (which is easily edited by a programmer) into a binary
+file (which the computer uses). Compare this distribution method to <glossterm
+linkend="defbinarycode">Binary Code</glossterm>.</para>  
+<para>Compiling programs
+is not as easy as installing binary versions. Users who are only interested in 
+using &kword; are encouraged to find a binary version of &kword; for their computer.  For 
+users who want to learn more about programming, more information on compiling &kword; is 
+available in the section entitled <link
+linkend="installation">Installation</link>.</para></glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defcustomvariables">
+<glossterm>Custom Variables</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Using custom variables you can store certain values (&eg; numbers
+or text) for later use in your document or in a script. If you want to
+find out more about custom variables, see <link
+linkend="variables">Document Variables</link>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defdeb">
+<glossterm>DEB</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>This is a binary file format that is used by Debian and Debian-based
+distributions.  This will be the suffix of a file
+specifically for
+these distributions.  An example would be
+<filename>koffice-1.2.deb</filename>. For more information on installing
+these files, refer to the <ulink url="http://www.debian.org">Debian Web
+Site</ulink>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defdialogbox">
+<glossterm>Dialog Box</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>A dialog box is a small window that appears on top of your working
+document.  This window usually has questions, information or
+configuration options related to the task you are performing.  When you
+are finished with the dialog box, it will disappear and return you to
+your document (possibly after making some changes to the
+document).</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defdtp">
+<glossterm><acronym>DTP</acronym></glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Stands for <emphasis>DeskTop Publishing</emphasis>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="deffaq">
+<glossterm><acronym>FAQ</acronym></glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Stands for <emphasis>Frequently Asked Questions</emphasis> and
+normally means a document, where questions that arise many times are answered. If you
+have a question to the developers of &koffice;, you should always have a
+look at the <acronym>FAQ</acronym> first; you can find the latest version
+<ulink
+url="http://koffice.kde.org/faq">here</ulink>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="deffilemask">
+<glossterm>File Mask</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>A file mask can be thought of as a strainer for you.  On the
+average computer, there are several thousand files. These files are
+sorted into sub-directories, but it is not uncommon for many users to
+have 100's of data files in a single sub-directory.</para>
+<para>Fortunately for us, most applications use a suffix to their
+filenames.  By applying a file mask, &kword; will only show you the
+files which are not filtered out by the mask. (That is to say &kword;
+only shows the files that fit through the strainer).  This can be
+helpful if you have many files from many different applications. The
+file mask is incorporated in the <guilabel>Filter:</guilabel> line of
+the <guilabel>Save Document</guilabel> and <guilabel>Open Document</guilabel> dialog boxes.</para>
+<para>As an example. If you use a file mask for &kword; files, the file
+mask will try to filter out all files that are not for
+&kword;.</para></glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="deffilter">
+<glossterm>Filter</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>A filter takes a document file from one program (&eg; &Microsoft;
+<application>Word</application>), and <emphasis>filters</emphasis> out
+the text and formatting information and converts that information into a
+&kword; document.  Filters are used to read and write files for other
+programs.  More information on the filters included with &kword;
+is available in the section entitled <link linkend="filters">Import/Export Filters</link>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="deffooter">
+<glossterm>Footer</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>The footer of a page is an area below the normal text area. Often
+it contains the page numbering and maybe some additional
+information. The contents of the footer are normally the same for most
+pages, and changing the footer on one page will change all other pages
+as well. See <glossterm linkend="defheader">Header</glossterm>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defframe">
+<glossterm>Frame</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Nearly everything in &kword; is in a frame. Text is always in
+a text frame. Pictures are in picture frames. Parts are in part
+frames. A frame is basically just a rectangle that can contain some part
+of your document. Frames can be moved, resized, deleted etc.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defframeset">
+<glossterm>Frameset</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>A frame-set is a group of frames which are connected together. If
+you are writing text that does not fit into the first frame of a frame-set,
+it will continue in the next frame belonging to that frame-set.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defftp">
+<glossterm>&FTP;</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>&FTP; is the <emphasis>File Transfer Protocol</emphasis>; it is an
+Internet protocol that allows you to retrieve files from so-called &FTP;
+servers. If you want to download &koffice; from the Internet, you will
+probably use &FTP;.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defhardramebreak">
+<glossterm>Hard Frame Break</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Normally, &kword; automatically adjusts text so it fits into a
+text frame. By inserting a hard frame break you can force &kword; to
+always start the next frame in the frameset with the text that follows
+the break.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defhangingindent">
+<glossterm>Hanging indention</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>A paragraph where the first line of the paragraph extends outwards to 
+the left compared with other lines in the paragraph.</para>
+
+
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defheader">
+<glossterm>Header</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>The header of a page is an area above the normal text area. Often
+it contains the page numbering and maybe some additional
+information. The contents of the header normally are the same for most
+pages, and changing the header on one page will change all other pages
+as well. See <glossterm linkend="deffooter">Footer</glossterm>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defhtml">
+<glossterm><acronym>&HTML;</acronym></glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Stands for <emphasis>HyperText Markup Language</emphasis>. Most
+web pages on the Internet are written in
+&HTML;. &kword; can read and write
+&HTML; documents for publishing on the World Wide
+Web.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defhue">
+<glossterm>Hue</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Hue is a more technically correct term for what we generally refer to as <emphasis>color</emphasis>.</para>
+<para>Examples of hues include red, green, blue and purple.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="definlineframe">
+<glossterm>Inline frame</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>An inline frame is a special frame type in &kword;.  Inline frames are associated with a position in a text frame.
+&kword; will keep the inline frame near the specified text.  You will not be able to determine where exactly on a page the
+frame will appear, but it will be located close to the specified text.</para>
+<para>If you insert or delete text in front of the specified text, the inline image will move up or down the page to follow the
+specified text</para>
+<para><tip><para>Inline frames are very useful when they contain a picture, graph or figure.  Simply place the inline frame within the
+text which describes the object, and &kword; will make sure both the text and the inline frame are always near each other.</para></tip></para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defkde2">
+<glossterm>&kde;</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Stands for the <emphasis>K Desktop Environment</emphasis>.  Part of &kde; is
+required for &kword; to operate.  The K Desktop Environment is a user
+interface which allows users to manipulate files and operate programs
+graphically.  For more information, please visit <ulink
+url="http://www.kde.org">www.kde.org</ulink>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defkeybinding">
+<glossterm>Key Binding</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>All of the features of &kword; are available through the menubar.
+You will find, however, that there are certain features of &kword; that
+you use on a regular basis.  You can <emphasis>bind</emphasis> a certain
+key combination to that function.  Once this combination is bound to the
+function, you can use it as a shortcut to the function.  &kword; comes
+with several <link linkend="keys">predefined key-bindings</link>. For
+more information on changing the default key-bindings, click <link
+linkend="options-keybindings">here</link>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="deflandscape">
+<glossterm>Landscape</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>When you have a standard sheet of paper, you can either orient
+your document with the long side vertically or horizontally.  When the
+horizontal dimension is greater than the vertical, this is termed
+Landscape.</para>
+<para>Example: <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="landscape.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></para>
+<para> Compare
+with <glossterm linkend="defportrait">Portrait</glossterm>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defmenubar">
+<glossterm>Menubar</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>The menubar is located at the top of the &kword; screen.  You can
+use it to access all features of &kword;.</para>
+<para>Menubar: <inlinemediaobject><imageobject> <imagedata
+fileref="basic.png" format="PNG"
+align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defportrait">
+<glossterm>Portrait</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>When you have a standard sheet of paper, you can either orient
+your document with the long side vertically or horizontally.  When the
+vertical dimension is greater than the horizontal, this is termed
+Portrait.</para>
+<para>Example: <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="portrait.png" format="PNG"
+align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></para>
+<para>Compare with <glossterm
+linkend="deflandscape">Landscape</glossterm>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defrpm">
+<glossterm><acronym>RPM</acronym></glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>This is the binary file format for distributions based on the
+&RedHat; package manager, a widely used packaging tool for the &Linux;
+operating system.  If you still have to get &koffice; and your system
+supports <acronym>RPM</acronym> packages, you should get &koffice;
+packages ending in <literal role="extension">.rpm</literal>. They are
+very easy to use.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defsaturation">
+<glossterm><acronym>Saturation</acronym></glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Saturation refers to the subjective quantity of a specific hue in a color.  Colors with a low saturation appear more white.
+Colors with high saturation appear more richly colored.</para>
+<para>This is a set of four red dots which increase in saturation from left to right.
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="saturation.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defscalingpicture">
+<glossterm>Scaling Pictures</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Whenever you change the size of a graphics image, you are scaling
+that image.  In &kword; you scale the pictures by changing the shape of
+the frame which surrounds the graphic.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defsourcecode">
+<glossterm>Source Code</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Source code is the human readable version of an application (such
+as &kword;).  Computers cannot use source code directly.  Instead,
+source code must be <glossterm linkend="defcompiling">compiled</glossterm> into
+binary code, before use.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="deftar">
+<glossterm>TAR</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Tar is a tool used for the archiving of files in so-called
+<emphasis>tar-files</emphasis> which you recognize by their suffix
+<literal role="extension">.tar</literal>.  You can find &koffice; source
+and binary distributions as <glossterm linkend="deftgz">gzipped
+tar-files</glossterm>; however, you should not use them if there are special
+packages for your system and package manager. See <glossterm
+linkend="defrpm">RPM</glossterm>, <glossterm linkend="defdeb">DEB</glossterm>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="deftargz">
+<glossterm><literal role="extension">tar.gz</literal></glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>See <glossterm linkend="deftgz"><acronym>TGZ</acronym></glossterm>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="deftgz">
+<glossterm><acronym>TGZ</acronym></glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Files ending in <literal role="extension">.tar.gz</literal> or
+<literal role="extension">.tgz</literal> are <glossterm
+linkend="deftar">tar-files</glossterm> compressed with the
+<command>gzip</command> program.  This makes the tar files smaller and
+quicker to download.  You can find &koffice; source and binary
+distributions in this format; however, you should not use them if there
+are special packages for your system and package manager. See <glossterm
+linkend="defrpm">RPM</glossterm>, <glossterm linkend="defdeb">DEB</glossterm>.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="deftoolbar">
+<glossterm>Toolbar</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>A toolbar is a line of buttons which are shortcuts to more of the
+commonly used features of &kword;.  More information on toolbars can be
+found <link linkend="toolbars">here</link>.</para>
+<para>Example Toolbar: <inlinemediaobject><imageobject> <imagedata
+fileref="filetb.png" format="PNG"
+align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defurl">
+<glossterm>&URL;</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>&URL; is an abbreviation for Universal Resource Locater.  A universal resource locater is
+the technical term for what is commonly referred to as a websites address.</para>
+<para>Examples of &URL;s include <ulink url="http://www.koffice.org">http://www.koffice.org</ulink> and
+<ulink url="http://www.kde.org">http://www.kde.org</ulink></para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defvalue">
+<glossterm><acronym>Value (color)</acronym></glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Color value refers to how bright or dark a color is.  Colors with low value are more black in appearance.  Colors with high
+value are more richly colored.</para>
+<para>This is a set of four red dots which increase in value from left to right.
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="value.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+
+<glossentry id="defvectorimage">
+<glossterm>Vector Image</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>A vector based graphic is described in terms of lines and shapes,
+not in terms of dots.  These files 
+scale better than bit-mapped images. </para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defwysiwyg">
+<glossterm><acronym>WYSIWYG</acronym></glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>Stands for <emphasis>What You See Is What You Get</emphasis>.
+&kword; is a <acronym>WYSIWYG</acronym> word processor, which means that
+the document will appear the same on the screen while you are editing
+it, as it will on the printed page.</para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+<glossentry id="defx">
+<glossterm>&X-Window;</glossterm>
+<glossdef>
+<para>The &X-Window; (also known simply as <quote>X</quote>) is
+required for &koffice; to operate.  More information on &X-Window; for
+&Linux; can be found at <ulink
+url="http://www.xfree86.org">http://www.xfree86.org</ulink></para>
+</glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
+</glossary>
+
+&documentation.index;
+</book>
diff --git a/doc/kword/inscoldlg.png b/doc/kword/inscoldlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4af996944
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/inscoldlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/insdate.png b/doc/kword/insdate.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..12a11f354
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/insdate.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/insertfile.docbook b/doc/kword/insertfile.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cf792062f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/insertfile.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<sect1 id="insert-file">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Inserting files</title>
+<indexterm><primary>inserting files</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has the ability to insert a previously saved &kword; file into the current document.  This is especially useful for 
+large documents that have multiple authors.</para>
+<para>To insert a &kword; file into the current document, place the cursor at the desired insertion point of the document.</para>
+<para>Selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>File...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar. You will be given a <link linkend="file-dialog">file selection dialog</link> to select the &kword; file you want to insert.</para>
+<para>When you have located the &kword; file, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, and the new &kword; file will be inserted into the 
+current document at the current cursor position.</para>
+<para>&kword; will integrate the newly inserted document into the structure of the current document.</para>
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/insgrph1.png b/doc/kword/insgrph1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c404ae67c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/insgrph1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/insgrph2.png b/doc/kword/insgrph2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d1ccc60e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/insgrph2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/insrowdlg.png b/doc/kword/insrowdlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..32c55a380
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/insrowdlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/instab1.png b/doc/kword/instab1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7d4771b16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/instab1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/instb.png b/doc/kword/instb.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..72d4135a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/instb.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/instime.png b/doc/kword/instime.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dc88fb44f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/instime.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/intro1.png b/doc/kword/intro1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a8d2261dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/intro1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/intro2.png b/doc/kword/intro2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0f4fe903e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/intro2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/intro3.png b/doc/kword/intro3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..04b6c138c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/intro3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/ital.png b/doc/kword/ital.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..79a643539
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/ital.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/joincell.png b/doc/kword/joincell.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ae9cd44c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/joincell.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/kbd-focus-ext.png b/doc/kword/kbd-focus-ext.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..541e124e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/kbd-focus-ext.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/kformappcol.png b/doc/kword/kformappcol.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..31083ce50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/kformappcol.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/kformapprow.png b/doc/kword/kformapprow.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..df9b1389e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/kformapprow.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/kforminscol.png b/doc/kword/kforminscol.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1c3391fbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/kforminscol.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/kforminsrow.png b/doc/kword/kforminsrow.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0d3273fc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/kforminsrow.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/kformremcol.png b/doc/kword/kformremcol.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..452eb974c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/kformremcol.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/kformremrow.png b/doc/kword/kformremrow.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8dd870faf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/kformremrow.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/kpart.png b/doc/kword/kpart.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f70b6b1d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/kpart.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/kparts.docbook b/doc/kword/kparts.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..67ac3357e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/kparts.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+<sect1 id="kparts">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>KOffice Data</title>
+<indexterm><primary>inserting &koffice; data</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>&koffice;</primary><secondary>inserting data into &kword;</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The applications which make up &koffice; are capable of a fine degree of integration between each other.</para>
+<note><para>Because the actual process of inserting a component varies depending on the application, this chapter will not detail 
+every step of the process.  You will need to be familiar with the basics of using the other application in order to correctly insert 
+a component from that application</para>
+<para>Refer to the help files of the other applications for more specific information.</para></note>
+<sect2 id="kparts-insert"><title>General instructions</title>
+<para>There are two ways to insert a component (spreadsheet, presentation, graph, etc) from another application in &koffice;:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>Selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Object Frame</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+<para>You will be given a list of &koffice; applications to choose from.  Select the application you desire.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>or by clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="kpart.png" format="PNG"
+align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on the
+toolbar.</para>
+<para>A dialog box will appear with a list of &koffice; applications to choose from.  Select the application you desire.</para>
+
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>&kword; 
+will now ask you to define a frame for this object. Place the mouse pointer where you want the upper left corner of the frame to 
+be located.  Click and hold with the &LMB;.  Drag the mouse to draw a square for your new object.  When you are happy with the size of the object frame, release the &LMB;</para>
+<para>&kword; will now execute the application you selected <emphasis>from within &kword;</emphasis>.  The details of each
+application are different.  Please see the application manuals for the specific &koffice; application for details on the use of that
+application. (In other words, from this point on, if you insert a spreadsheet from &kspread;, then the windows will act the same
+as &kspread;.)</para>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="kparts-edit"><title>Working with the inserted component</title>
+<para>To edit the data within the component, simply double click with the mouse pointer and &kword; will change the toolbars, menuitems and
+application structure to match the &koffice; application.  This way, you can use the application specific tools to refine your component.</para>
+<note><para>The frame that contains the embedded data, can be <link linkend="frames">manipulated</link> 
+the same as any other frame in &kword;.</para></note>
+<para>When you save your document, the component is saved within the &kword; document.</para>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/landscape.png b/doc/kword/landscape.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c9c796110
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/landscape.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/larrow.png b/doc/kword/larrow.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1da2e7386
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/larrow.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/lbord.png b/doc/kword/lbord.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7814e3dc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/lbord.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/linkdlg.png b/doc/kword/linkdlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..620b2c6b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/linkdlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/listdepth1.png b/doc/kword/listdepth1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9f5ce1370
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/listdepth1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/listdepth2.png b/doc/kword/listdepth2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8539363a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/listdepth2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/listdepth3.png b/doc/kword/listdepth3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..382f8e4b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/listdepth3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/lists.docbook b/doc/kword/lists.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4e7f8b18d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/lists.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+<sect1 id="lists">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Lists</title>
+<indexterm><primary>lists</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has a simple and flexible list creation system.
+Using the same interface, &kword; can create bulleted or enumerated lists of nearly any depth.  
+For easy, simple lists, &kword; offers
+a toolbar button for both enumerated and bulleted lists.</para>
+
+<para>An enumerating style is a series of letters or
+numbers which proposes an order or hierarchy within the list. Bullets 
+simply mark the item as part of the list and usually consist of a symbol or shape.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="list-simpl"><title>Simple lists</title>
+
+<para>To quickly create a single level list, &kword; provides two toolbar buttons.</para>
+<para>To create a simple enumerated list, simply select <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="enumlist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> from the 
+<link linkend="paragraph-toolbar">paragraph toolbar</link>.
+A small menu will list different enumerated list styles.  Select the appropriate style and the selected
+paragraphs are converted into a list of that style.</para>
+<para>To create a simple bulleted list, select <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="bullist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> from the 
+<link linkend="paragraph-toolbar">paragraph toolbar</link>.
+A small menu will list different bulleted list styles.  Select the appropriate style and the selected
+paragraphs are converted into a bulleted list of that style.</para>
+<tip><para>You are still able to make changes to the list styles by <link linkend="list-complex">using the dialog</link>.</para></tip>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="list-complex"><title>Complex lists</title>
+<para>All complex list formatting is done through the <guilabel>Paragraph Settings</guilabel> dialog.  To get to the <guilabel>Paragraph Settings</guilabel> dialog you can:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paragraph...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem><para>Type <keycombo action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo></para></listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Place the mouse pointer in the paragraphs that will become the list and click once
+with the &RMB;.  A small menu
+will appear.  Select <guimenuitem>Paragraph...</guimenuitem>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>A dialog will appear.  To find the tab specific to lists, click once on the tab labeled <guilabel>Bullets/Numbers</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<sect3 id="list-dialog">
+<title>List type</title>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="fpara4.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>To format the selected text as a list, select the radio button labeled <guilabel>List</guilabel> from the top section of the dialog box.</para>
+
+<para>There is a list of five bullets types and five enumerating styles along the left
+side of the dialog box.  Select the desired list style from the list on the left.</para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="list-look"><title>Changing the look of the list</title>
+
+<para>The text box labeled <guilabel>Prefix text:</guilabel> allows the user to add text before
+the enumeration or bullet.</para>
+
+<para>The text box labeled <guilabel>Suffix text:</guilabel> allows the user to add text after
+the enumeration or bullet.</para>
+
+<para>For example:  If <quote>Step</quote> is typed into the <guilabel>Prefix text:</guilabel>
+box, and <quote>-</quote> is typed into the <guilabel>Suffix text:</guilabel> text box, the list will look like this:</para>
+
+<informalexample><simplelist>
+<member>Step 1 - Place 1 cup of flour in a large mixing bowl.</member>
+<member>Step 2 - Add 1/4 tablespoon of yeast.</member>
+<member>Step 3 - ....</member>
+</simplelist></informalexample>
+
+<para>If an enumerated list style is selected, the starting number/letter for the list can be set in the spin box
+labeled <guilabel>Start at:</guilabel>.  If you have selected a bulleted list style, this box will be inactive.</para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="list-depth"><title>Multi-level lists</title>
+
+<para>The spin box labled <guilabel>Depth:</guilabel> is used to add subsections to your list.  By selecting a depth greater than one,
+you are adding a subsection to the list.  </para>
+
+<para>Example of a multilevel enumerated list:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="listdepth1.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>An example of a multilevel bulleted list:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="listdepth2.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Adjust the depth setting to determine where in the list this text occurs.</para>
+<para>By adjusting the spin box labeled <guilabel>Display levels:</guilabel> you can determine if previous levels are displayed.  For example, with a list where <guilabel>Depth:</guilabel> is set to three and 
+<guilabel>Display levels:</guilabel> is set to one might be: </para>
+ 
+<informalexample><simplelist>
+<member>i. This is a step</member>
+<member>ii. This is another step</member>
+</simplelist></informalexample>
+
+<para>If you change the <guilabel>Display levels:</guilabel> to two, it would change to: </para>
+
+<informalexample><simplelist>
+<member>A.i. This is a step</member>
+<member>A.ii. This is another step</member>
+</simplelist></informalexample>
+
+<para> You can always refer to the preview section of the dialog for an example of how
+your list will look.</para>
+
+
+
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="lists-custom-bullets"><title>Custom Bullets</title>
+<para>If you select <guilabel>Custom Bullet</guilabel> from the list of styles, you can click on the button labeled 
+<guilabel>Custom character:</guilabel> to choose the letter or symbol you want for your bulleted list.</para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="lists-restart"><title>Restart new list</title>
+<para>If you select the checkbox labeled <guilabel>Restart numbering at this paragraph</guilabel> &kword; will start 
+numbering your list at the beginning.</para>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="lists-multiline"><title> Multiple paragraphs in one list element</title>
+<para>Each new paragraph represents a new list element.  Sometimes, however, it will be desireable to have multiple 
+paragraphs on a single list element.  This is accomplished by inserting a New Line character instead of a Paragraph Break.</para>
+
+<para>To insert a New Line, type <keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>Return</keycap></keycombo>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="listdepth3.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+</sect3>
+
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/ltab.png b/doc/kword/ltab.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..60d29657b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/ltab.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/ltab2.png b/doc/kword/ltab2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f38b40f80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/ltab2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/mailmerge.docbook b/doc/kword/mailmerge.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c0adac9d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/mailmerge.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,475 @@
+<sect1 id="mail-merge">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Mail Merge</title>
+<indexterm><primary>mail merge</primary><secondary>introduction</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has the ability to use data from an outside database (or internal database) to <emphasis>personalize</emphasis> your 
+documents for individual members/clients/friends.</para>
+<para>This section of the manual will cover all aspects of creating, merging and printing documents that are specific to &kword;.  This 
+manual will not cover:</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>Creating an external database.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Security issues regarding databases.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Detailed instructions on SQL.  It is assumed you have some knowledge regarding SQL if you are using a 
+SQL database for your data source.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Accessing the network or Internet.</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>For answers to these questions, other documentation is available on the Internet that is specific to the software you have chosen.</para>
+<para>You can retreive your mail-merge data from a number of sources:  </para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>If you want to use an outside SQL database, click <link linkend="mail-merge-sql">here</link> for instructions.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>If you want to use a &kspread; file for your data, click <link linkend="mail-merge-kspread">here</link>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>If you want use information from your &kde; Address Book, click <link linkend="mail-merge-ab">here</link>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>If you want to use the internal database of &kword;, click <link linkend="mail-merge-internal">here</link>.</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<sect2 id="mail-merge-sql">
+<title>Using an external SQL database as a data source</title>
+<indexterm><primary>mail merge</primary><secondary>SQL databases</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has the ability to use several of the most popular open source databases as a source of data for personalized documents.</para>
+<note><para>In order to access an outside database using SQL, your machine needs to have the appropriate database module compiled 
+into your copy of QT.</para>
+<para>For more information see the <link linkend="installation">installation section of this documentation</link>.</para></note>
+<para>The database can be located on the same machine as &kword;, or on any computer which is accessable through your computer 
+network or the Internet.</para>
+<para>In order to use the database, you must know the following information:</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>Name of the database</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Host name/IP address of the computer the database is located on</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>The port address on the specified computer granting SQL access</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>A valid user name for the database</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>A valid password for the user name</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>If you have all this information at your finger tips, you are ready to proceed.</para>
+<para>Using an outside database to create personalized documents is a three step process:</para>
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-sql-data">Connect to the database and select your query.</link></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-fields">Insert the merge fields</link> to tell &kword;
+where to insert the database information.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-print">Print</link> the personalized documents.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+<sect3 id="mail-merge-sql-data">
+<title>Locate the database and query the records.</title>
+<para>To begin, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Mail Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click on <guibutton>Open Existing...</guibutton>.  Another small dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1a.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Select <guilabel>QT-SQL Source</guilabel> and click on
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  A new dialog box will appear.<anchor id="mail-merge-login"/></para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmergesql1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Enter the &URL; or IP address of the computer that holds the database in the text box labeled <guilabel>Hostname:</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>Select the driver named <guilabel>QMYSQL3</guilabel> from the combo box labeled <guilabel>Driver:</guilabel>.  </para>
+<para>Enter the database name you were provided in the text box labeled <guilabel>Database name:</guilabel> and a
+user name in the text box labeled <guilabel>Username:</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>If the database access is through a port other than the default port enter that port number in the text box labeled 
+<guilabel>Port:</guilabel>.</para>
+<tip><para>If you are going to be using this database at other times, you can click on the button labeled
+<guibutton>Keep settings...</guibutton>. &kword; will ask for a descriptive name.</para>
+<para>When you want to restore these settings on future sessions, simply select the descriptive name from the combo box in the 
+upper left of the dialog box.</para>
+</tip>
+<para>When all information is correct, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  &kword; will ask you for a password to that database.  Enter 
+the password in the text box, and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>&kword; will now ask if you want to replace your current data source with the source you have selected.  Click <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. </para>
+<para>You are now connected to the database.  Now you need to select the data from the database. This dialog box has re-appeared.  </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click on <guibutton>Edit Current...</guibutton>.  Another dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmergesql2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This dialog is designed to help you enter and test your database query.  The dialog is divided into three
+sections:  Database information, Query information and Query line.</para>
+<para>The database information section is labeled <guilabel>Information</guilabel> and consists of two combo boxes.  The
+left combo box (<guilabel>Available tables:</guilabel>) gives you a list of all available tables within the current database.
+Select the desired table from the list by clicking on the table name with the &LMB;.  
+A list of all available fields from that table will appear in the right combo box.</para>
+<para>The query line is a text box located near the bottom of the dialog labeled <guilabel>Query:</guilabel>.  Simply type your 
+SQL query into this text box and click <guibutton>Execute</guibutton>.  &kword; will query the database and return the specified query
+in tabular format in the <guilabel>Query Result</guilabel> box.  You can alter, or edit your query on the query line and each time you 
+click <guibutton>Execute</guibutton>, the new query results will appear.</para>
+<note><para>&kword; does not limit your query strings.  They can be simple and straight forward:</para>
+<para><userinput>select * from Clients</userinput></para>
+<para>Or complex multitable queries:</para>
+<para><userinput>select Clients.FirstName, Clients.LastName, Clients.address, data.Birthday, 
+data.EyeColour from eMail, data where data.FirstName=Clients.FirstName and 
+data.LastName=Clients.LastName
+</userinput></para>
+</note>
+<para>Clicking <guibutton>Setup</guibutton>, will allow you to <link linkend="mail-merge-login">log into a different database</link>.</para>
+<para>When you have the correct query in the <guilabel>Query:</guilabel> text box, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to select that query.
+</para>
+<para>This will return you to the mail merge main dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para>Now that you have selected your data query, it is time to insert the merge fields in the document.  Click 
+<link linkend="mail-merge-fields">here to continue</link>.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="mail-merge-kspread">
+<title>Using a &kspread; file as a data source</title>
+<indexterm><primary>mail merge</primary><secondary>using &kspread; file</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; can use data in a &kspread; document for personalizing documents.</para>
+<note><para>In order to use this data, you only need to know the location of the &kspread; document and the worksheet (page) number the data is located on.</para></note>
+
+<para>Using a &kspread; document to create personalized documents is a three step process:</para>
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-kspread-data">Select the file the data is located within.</link></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-fields">Insert the merge fields</link> to tell &kword;
+where to insert the database information</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-print">Print</link> the personalized documents.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+<sect3 id="mail-merge-kspread-data">
+<title>Selecting the file that contains the data.</title>
+<para>To begin, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Mail Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click on <guibutton>Open Existing...</guibutton>.  Another small dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1a.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Select <guilabel>&kspread; Table Source</guilabel> from the drop down box labeled <guilabel>Available sources:</guilabel> and click on
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  A new dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmergekspread1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Enter the &URL; or file name of the &kspread; document in the text box labeled <guilabel>URL:</guilabel>.  You can type the file name 
+directly into the text box, or click on the button with the blue folder and use the file dialog to select the &kspread; file.</para>
+<para>Once you have selected the &kspread; document, the drop down box labeled <guilabel>Page number:</guilabel> will show you all the available pages or worksheets 
+within the &kspread; document.  Select the page (or worksheet) that contains the mail merge data.</para>
+<para>When all information is correct, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  &kword; will ask you if you want to replace the current data source.  Click <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> to continue.</para>
+
+
+<para>You will again see the mail merge main dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para>Now that you have selected your data query, it is time to insert the merge fields in the document.  Click 
+<link linkend="mail-merge-fields">here to continue</link>.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="mail-merge-ab">
+<title>Using your &kde; Address book as a data source</title>
+<indexterm><primary>mail merge</primary><secondary>using &kde; Address Book</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; can use data in your address book for personalizing documents.</para>
+
+<para>Using address book entries to create personalized documents is a three step process:</para>
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-ab-data">Select the people you want included in the mail merge.</link></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-fields">Insert the merge fields</link> to tell &kword;
+where to insert the database information</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-print">Print</link> the personalized documents.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+<sect3 id="mail-merge-ab-data">
+<title>Select the people you want included</title>
+<para>To begin, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Mail Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click on <guibutton>Open Existing...</guibutton>.  Another small dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1a.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Select <guilabel>&kde; Addressbook Plugin</guilabel> from the drop down box labeled <guilabel>Available sources:</guilabel> and click on
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  A new dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmergeab1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The dialog consists of two listboxes labeled <guilabel>Address Book</guilabel> and <guilabel>Selected Addresses</guilabel>.  By moving entries from your Address book to the <guilabel>Selected Addresses</guilabel> listbox, you will be including those entries in your merge document.  </para>
+<para>To add an entry, select the entry in the left listbox by clicking with the &LMB;.  Then click <guibutton>Add</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>To remove an entry, select the entry in the right listbox by clicking with the &LMB;.  Then click <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>.</para>
+<tip><para>You can locate entries quickly by entering the first 2-3 letters of an entries name in the textbox labeled <guilabel>Filter on:</guilabel></para></tip>
+<note><para>You can load the full address book application by clicking the <guibutton>Address Book...</guibutton> button.</para>
+<para>You can also save a distribution list using the <guibutton>Save as Distribution List...</guibutton> button.  For more information on distribution lists, see the documentation on the &kde; Addressbook.</para></note>
+
+<para>When you have selected all the entries and distribution lists you want, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  &kword; will ask you if you want to replace the current data source.  Click <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> to continue.</para>
+
+
+<para>You will again see the mail merge main dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para>Now that you have selected your data query, it is time to insert the merge fields in the document.  Click 
+<link linkend="mail-merge-fields">here to continue</link>.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+
+<sect2 id="mail-merge-internal">
+<title>Using an internal representation of tabular data to create documents</title>
+<indexterm><primary>mail merge</primary><secondary>using &kword; data tables</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>For small sets of data, or when you do not currently have a database containing the merge data, &kword; 
+offers you the ability to enter the data <emphasis>directly into &kword;</emphasis> in tabular form.  This internal data 
+structure can then be used to create documents with this data inserted at predefined locations.</para>
+<para>Using an internal representation of the data to create personalized documents is a three step process:</para>
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-internal-data">Enter the data</link> into &kword;</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-fields">Insert the merge fields</link> to tell &kword;
+where to insert the database information</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="mail-merge-print">Print</link> the personalized documents.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+<para>After the data has been created once, you can go back and change the data as needed, and produce another set of
+personalized documents from that data.</para>
+
+<sect3 id="mail-merge-internal-data">
+<title>Enter the data</title>
+<para>To begin, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Mail Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click on <guibutton>Create New...</guibutton>.  Another small dialog will appear.</para>
+<para>There is currently only one option in this dialog box <guilabel>Internal Storage</guilabel>. Click on
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  A new dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This is a record card for creating your tabular data file.  Along the top is a toolbar and the main part of the dialog is space to hold
+your entry/data pairs.</para>
+<sect4 id="mail-merge-internal-data-entry"><title>Defining the structure of your data table</title>
+<para>First, we need to add one or more entries (merge fields).  This is accomplished by clicking the
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="addentry.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> 
+(<guilabel>Add entry</guilabel>)
+button (third button from the right along the toolbar). A small dialog box will appear.  Type a descriptive name of your entry
+in the dialog box (Name, Address, Balance Due, etc....). </para>
+<note><para>This is for the name of the entry, not the data that is contained within the entry.</para></note>
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, and the entry is added to the card.</para>
+<para>Repeat this process until all needed entries are visible on this first card.</para>
+<para>If you want to delete an entry, simply click once on the entry name with the &LMB; and select <inlinemediaobject><imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="delentry.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+(<guilabel>Remove entry</guilabel>). </para>
+<warning><para>Be <emphasis>very</emphasis> sure you have selected the correct entry name.  Once you tell &kword; to delete 
+the entry, the entry <emphasis>and all of the data within those entries will be deleted immediately</emphasis>.  You will not be
+given the option to stop or reverse the process once it is begun.</para></warning>
+
+</sect4>
+<sect4 id="mail-merge-internal-data-value"><title>Entering the data into the table</title>
+<para>Now that the structure of your data is defined, you can enter the data into your entries.</para>
+<para>At the top of the dialog box, are 4 buttons surrounding a spin box.  The spin box gives the current record number.  All
+records are numbered in the order they are added starting with number 1.  You can use the spin box to go directly to 
+the desired record or you can use the arrows to graphically move
+through the list of records.</para>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Button</entry><entry>Action</entry></row>
+</thead><tbody>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="beginning.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Move directly to record one</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="back.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Move back one record</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="forward.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Move forward one record</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="end.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Move to the last record in the dataset</entry></row>
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+<para>To enter the data, simply place the cursor in the text box to the right of the entry name, and type in the data. (&kword; uses 
+<quote>No Value</quote> as the default value for all entries in newly created records.)</para>
+<para>To add a record, click the 
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="addrecord.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> button.</para>
+<para>To delete a record, click the 
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="delrecord.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> button.</para>
+<warning><para>Be careful when you are deleting records.  Once deleted, the record cannot be retrieved.</para></warning>
+<para>Continue to enter all data until your dataset is complete.</para>  
+<para>After your dataset is complete, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to 
+save the changes to your dataset.  This will bring up the mail merge main dialog:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton>.  Now it is time to insert the merge fields in the document.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="mail-merge-fields">
+<title>Insert merge fields in document</title>
+<para>Now that &kword; knows the entries available in your data source, you can insert the merge fields into your document.</para>
+<para>A merge field is a placeholder within the document.  This placeholder will be replaced in each personalized document with the
+value of the entry for that individual record.</para>
+
+<sect4 id="mail-merge-field-insert">
+<title>Insert a merge field</title>
+<indexterm><primary>mail merge</primary><secondary>inserting merge fields</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To insert a merge field, place the cursor at the desired place in the document.  Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Variable</guimenuitem>
+<guimenuitem>Mail Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.  A list of available entries will appear.  Select the desired entry, and click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>The merge field is inserted at the current cursor location.  The merge field is surrounded by brackets.</para>
+<para>You can place the cursor in a new location in the document and insert another placeholder.  When you are done inserting placeholders, 
+you can proceed to printing your document.</para>
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4 id="mail-merge-field-delete">
+<title>Delete a merge field</title>
+<indexterm><primary>mail merge</primary><secondary>deleting a merge field</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can delete a merge field two ways.</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>Place the cursor at the end of the merge field, and press the &Backspace; key. </para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Place the cursor at the beginning of the merge field, and press the <keycap>Delete</keycap> key. </para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+</sect4>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="mail-merge-print">
+<title>Previewing and printing the merged document</title>
+<indexterm><primary>mail merge</primary><secondary>merging data and text</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Once you have inserted all the merge fields you want, you are ready to preview and print the personalized documents.</para>
+<sect4 id="mail-merge-print-preview">
+<title>Preview your documents before printing</title>
+<para>To preview your document select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Mail Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="mmerge1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Click <guilabel>Print Preview...</guilabel>.  You will be able to see the final output of your personalized documents prior to 
+printing.</para>
+</sect4>
+<sect4 id="mail-merge-print-printing">
+<title>Print your personalized documents.</title>
+<para>You print personalized documents using the same methods that you do to print traditional documents.  For more information on printing 
+see the section on <link linkend="printing">Printing a Document</link>.</para>
+</sect4>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/mbtb.docbook b/doc/kword/mbtb.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e28f8dbc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/mbtb.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,2628 @@
+<!-- <?xml version="1.0" ?>
+<!DOCTYPE chapter PUBLIC "-//KDE//DTD DocBook XML V4.1-Based Variant V1.0//EN" "dtd/kdex.dtd">
+
+To work on this document standalone, uncomment the prolog.
+Comment it out again when you are done -->
+	
+<chapter id="menu-items">
+<chapterinfo>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</chapterinfo>
+<title>The Menu Items/Toolbars</title>
+
+<sect1 id="menu-intro">
+<title>Introduction to the Menubar and Toolbars</title>
+
+<para>The key to getting the most out of &kword;, is found in the menu
+bars and the toolbars.</para>
+
+<para>The menubar is organized into groups of functions (&eg; file
+functions, table functions, &etc;).  Below each of these groups, is a
+submenu of actions.  Some of these submenus will have sub menus of
+their own.</para>
+
+<para>The toolbars are also organized into groups.  Each toolbar
+consists of a set of buttons.  Each button performs a specific
+function.  The toolbars are designed to act as shortcuts for more
+commonly used functions.</para>
+
+<para>The first part of this section of the manual discusses the
+manipulation of &kword;'s toolbars to suit your needs.</para>
+
+<para>The second part of this section, takes a detailed look at each
+menubar function, and each standard toolbar button, and provides you with a
+brief summary of its action.  Many of these sections  also provide you with a link to more detailed
+information located elsewhere in the &kword; Handbook.</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="toolbars">
+<title>Hiding, Changing, and Moving Toolbars</title>
+<indexterm><primary>toolbars</primary><secondary>hiding</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; offers the user great flexibility when it comes to
+toolbars.  This first section will show you some of the many options
+you have for relocating, reformatting and removing toolbars.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="hide-toolbar">
+<title>Hiding Toolbars </title>
+
+<para>When you start &kword; for the first time, several toolbars
+are visible.  If you don't think you will need a toolbar, and want to
+reclaim that desktop space, you can hide any or all of the toolbars</para>
+
+<para>To hide a toolbar, Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Toolbars</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.  This will bring up a submenu.  All of the toolbars are
+listed.  Simply select the toolbar you want to hide or restore.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="move-toolbar">
+<title>Moving Toolbars around</title>
+<indexterm><primary>toolbars</primary><secondary>moving</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Toolbars can be located on the screen in 5 places.</para>
+
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic">
+<listitem><para>Top</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Bottom</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Left</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Right</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Floating</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+<para><guilabel>Top</guilabel>, <guilabel>Bottom</guilabel>,
+<guilabel>Left</guilabel> and <guilabel>Right</guilabel> refer to the
+edges of the &kword; screen.</para>
+
+<para>By locating a toolbar in the <guilabel>Bottom</guilabel>
+position, for example, you move the toolbar into a horizontal position
+below the Document Area, and along the bottom of the &kword;
+window. By locating a toolbar in the <guilabel>Left</guilabel>
+position,however, you move the toolbar into a vertical position to the
+left of the Document Area, and along the left edge of the &kword;
+window.</para>
+
+<para>Multiple toolbars can be located at each of these points in the
+screen.  (You could, for instance, move all the toolbars to the top of
+the screen).  &kword; will shuffle toolbars around, to fit in the most
+compact way at that location.</para>
+
+<para>There are two ways to move any toolbar.</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Click on the striped area of the toolbar with the &LMB; and hold
+the button down.  Drag the toolbar to the desired location.  You will
+see a rectangular shape indicating the position and orientation of the
+toolbar.  When at the desired location, release the &LMB; and the
+toolbar will be inserted there.</para>
+
+<para>or</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Click on the toolbar with the &RMB;. A
+popup menu will appear.  Select
+<guimenuitem>Orientation</guimenuitem>. A small submenu will
+appear.  Select <guimenuitem>Top</guimenuitem>,
+<guimenuitem>Bottom</guimenuitem>, <guimenuitem>Left</guimenuitem>, 
+<guimenuitem>Right</guimenuitem>, <guimenuitem>Floating</guimenuitem> or
+<guimenuitem>Flat</guimenuitem>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>If you select <guilabel>Floating</guilabel> for any toolbar, a new window will be created just for that toolbar.  This window can be moved independently from the &kword; window.</para>
+
+<para>Finally, if you select <guilabel>Flat</guilabel> for any toolbar, the toolbar will be reduced to a horizontal section of lines located directly below the menubar.  To restore this menubar, simply double click with the &LMB; on the flattened toolbar and the toolbar will be restored to its original size and position.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="toolbar-options">
+<title>Changing the look of your toolbars</title>
+<indexterm><primary>toolbars</primary><secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Toolbars can have their buttons displayed different ways.  Below
+are examples of the four options for the <emphasis>File</emphasis>
+toolbar.</para>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<tbody>
+<row>
+<entry>Icons Only</entry>
+<entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject> <imagedata fileref="tb1.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Text Only</entry>
+<entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject> <imagedata fileref="tb2.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Text Aside Icons</entry>
+<entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject> <imagedata fileref="tb3.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry>
+</row>
+
+<row>
+<entry>Text Under Icons</entry>
+<entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject> <imagedata fileref="tb4.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject> </inlinemediaobject></entry>
+</row>
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+<para>To change the appearance of a toolbar, place the cursor over on
+the toolbar you want to change, and click with the &RMB;.</para>
+
+<para>A small menu will appear at the mouse cursor.  Select
+<guimenuitem>Text Position</guimenuitem>. This will open a submenu,
+select your preference from the list.</para>
+
+<sect3 id="toolbar-options-size">
+<title>Changing Icon Size</title>
+<indexterm><primary>toolbars</primary><secondary>changing size</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can also select the size of the icons by clicking on the
+toolbar with the &RMB;.  A small popup menu will appear.  Select
+<guimenuitem>Icon Size</guimenuitem> and then your preferred icon
+size.</para>
+
+<note> 
+<para>Setting the look of one toolbar does not alter the look
+of another toolbar.</para> 
+</note>
+
+</sect3>
+
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="basic-menubar">
+<title>Menubar</title>
+     
+<para>The Menubar contains all commands available to &kword;.  It is
+divided into 10 general categories.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="basic.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+     
+<sect2 id="file">
+<title><guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+<para>By clicking on the <guimenu>File</guimenu> menu, you can begin
+new documents, load previously edited documents, print your documents,
+close the current document (so you can load another document), or quit
+&kword; entirely.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-new">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>N</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice></term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action> Allows you to open new files for editing.</action> For
+Step by Step instructions see <link linkend="new-doc">Beginning a New
+Document</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>N</keycap></keycombo> or clicking
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="filenew2.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is equivalent to
+using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-open">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>O</keycap></keycombo></shortcut>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Open...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action> For opening previously created</action> &kword; files.
+For Step by Step instructions see <link linkend="loading">Retrieving a
+Saved Document</link>.</para>
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>O</keycap></keycombo> or clicking
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject> <imagedata fileref="fileopen.png"
+format="PNG"/> </imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is equivalent to
+using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-save">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guisubmenu>Open
+Recent</guisubmenu></menuchoice></term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>For opening the most recently edited files. Once you
+have clicked on this option, a list of recently edited files will
+appear. Select the file you want and &kword; will open the
+file. </action></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut> 
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>S</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem></menuchoice></term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Saves your current file to disk.</action>  If you have
+not saved the file yet, you will be prompted for a filename. For more
+details, see <link linkend="saving">Saving a Document</link>.</para> 
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>S</keycap></keycombo> or clicking
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="filefloppy.png"
+format="PNG"/> 
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is equivalent to
+using the menubar. </para> 
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Save
+As...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to save your file under another name or another
+format.</action>  For more details, see <link linkend="command-save-as">Saving a
+Document</link>.</para> 
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-reload">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reload</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Reloads the current file from disk, erasing any changes to the document since the last time it was saved.</action></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-import">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Import...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Will load a file from another application.</action> &kword; attempts to decipher as much of the file as it can.  For many files, some information will be lost.  For more 
+information on the ability to import files from other applications, see the section on <link linkend="filters">filters</link> at the end of this documentation.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-export">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Will save a file using the format of another application.</action> &kword; attempts to save as much of the file as it can.  For many files, some information will be lost.  For more 
+information on the ability to export files to other applications, see the section on <link linkend="filters">filters</link> at the end of this documentation.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-send-file">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Mail...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Launches your email client so you can send the current file as an attachment.  The file must have been saved once before this option can be selected.</action></para> 
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-template-create">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Create Template From
+Document...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to save your file as a template, to use as a
+starting point for future documents.</action> For more details, see
+<link linkend="template-creation">Creating a new template</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-statistics">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Statistics</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+
+<para><action>Opens a window that counts the sentences, words,
+characters and syllables in your document.</action></para> <para>The
+number of sentences is not always absolutely correct, as &kword; has
+to guess if a dot really starts a new sentence or not. The number of
+syllables is estimated, &kword; therefore assumes that the text is
+written in English.</para>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Flesch reading ease:</guilabel> score is a number
+between 0 and 100 which estimates how readable a text is. The higher
+the number, the easier the text can be read. Text with a score of
+70-80 should have fairly good readability.</para>
+
+<para>The Flesch formula uses the number of words per sentences and
+the number of syllables per word. It assumes that the use of short
+words and short sentences increases the readability of a text. It says
+nothing about grammar or meaning. As both the number of sentences and
+the number of syllables is estimated, the result is not absolutely
+precise. The text should be at least 200 words long, if it isn't the
+score will be marked as approximated.</para>
+
+<para>The Flesch score is defined for English text only, but the basic
+idea should work for many other languages, too.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to dismiss the
+window.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-print">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo></shortcut>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice></term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Print the file.</action>  For an overview of printing
+options see <link linkend="printing">Printing a Document</link>.</para> 
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo> or clicking
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="fileprint.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject> are equivalent to using
+the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-print-preview">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print Preview...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Print the file, but sends the output to your postscript
+viewer, for your confirmation before sending it to the printer.  The
+operation of your postscript viewer will vary depending on which viewer
+you use.  Refer to the help files for your viewer for
+help.</action></para> 
+
+<para>Clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="fileprint2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is equivalent to using
+the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-doc-info">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Document Information</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Opens a window that lets you enter information related to
+the document</action> (such as author's name, address, phone numbers,
+document abstract, &etc;). This information is saved with the document for later
+classification.</para> 
+<para>For more information, see <link linkend="documentinfo">Document Information</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-close">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>W</keycap></keycombo></shortcut>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Close</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Close the file you are currently working on. If you have
+not saved your most recent changes, you will be
+prompted.</action></para>
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>W</keycap></keycombo>
+is equivalent to using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-quit">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Q</keycap></keycombo></shortcut>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Quits</action> &kword;.</para> 
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Q</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar. </para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="edit">
+<title><guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+<para>By clicking on the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu, you can
+cut/copy/paste text, undo or redo edits and perform searches and text
+replacement.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-undo">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo></shortcut>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+
+<para><action>Reverses the last action you performed.</action> Not all
+actions can be reversed.  If you are not able to Undo the last action,
+the <guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem> option will be displayed gray and is
+not accessible.  For a more thourough
+discussion of Undo/Redo, <link linkend="undo-redo">click
+here</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo> or clicking
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="undo.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is equivalent to using
+the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-redo">
+<menuchoice><shortcut><keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>&Shift;</keycap><keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo></shortcut>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Redo</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Reverses the last Undo performed.</action> If the Redo
+option is unavailable, the Toolbar will display this items gray. For a more thourough discussion of Undo/Redo,
+<link linkend="undo-redo">click here</link>.</para>
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>&Shift;</keycap><keycap>Z</keycap></keycombo> 
+or clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="redo.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is
+equivalent to using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-cut">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>X</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Cut</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Deletes the highlighted text from the document, and places
+a copy in the clipboard.</action>  For a more complete directions on
+cutting and pasting, and a full description of the clipboard, <link
+linkend="clipboard">click here</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>X</keycap></keycombo> or clicking
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="editcut.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+ is equivalent to using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-copy">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>C</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Places a copy of the highlighted text in the clipboard,
+without changing the text in the document.</action>  For a more complete
+directions on cutting and pasting, and a full description of the
+clipboard, <link linkend="clipboard">click here</link>.</para>
+ 
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>C</keycap></keycombo> or clicking
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="editcopy.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is equivalent to using
+the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-paste">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>V</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Inserts a copy of the clipboard into the current cursor
+position.</action> If there is highlighted text, &kword; replaces
+replaces all highlighted text with the contents of the clipboard.  The
+clipboard is not altered.  For a more complete directions on cutting and pasting, 
+and a full description of the clipboard, <link
+linkend="clipboard">click here</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>V</keycap></keycombo> or clicking
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="editpaste.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is equivalent to using
+the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-select-all">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>A</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Select All</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Immediately highlights all text of the current
+frameset.</action></para>
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>A</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-select-all-frames">
+<menuchoice>
+
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Select All Frames</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Immediately selects all frames in the current document.</action></para>
+
+</listitem>
+
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Select Frame</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Selects the current text frame in the document.</action></para>
+
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-find">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>F</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to search for a series of characters.</action>
+The find features of &kword; are covered in more detail under <link
+linkend="search-and-replace">Searching for Text</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>F</keycap></keycombo> or clicking
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="find.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is equivalent to
+using the menubar.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-findnext">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F3</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Find Next</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Repeat the last search for characters starting at the current cursor position.</action>
+The find features of &kword; are covered in more detail under <link
+linkend="search-and-replace">Searching for Text</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F3</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-findprev">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>F3</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Find Previous</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Repeat the last search for characters starting at the current cursor position and moving backwards.</action>
+The find features of &kword; are covered in more detail under <link
+linkend="search-and-replace">Searching for Text</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>F3</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
+
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-replace">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>R</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Replace...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to replace one or more characters with
+another set of characters.</action>  The find and replace features of &kword; are covered
+in more detail under <link linkend="replace">Replacing
+Text</link>.</para>
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>R</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-del-page">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Delete Page</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Delete the current page.</action>  </para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="view">
+<title><guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu</title><variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>New View</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will create a new view of your document.</action>
+For more information on views, refer to the section entitled <link
+linkend="views">Using Multiple Views</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>W</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Close All Views</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will close all views including the current view. This will also quit &kword;.</action> 
+For more information on views, refer to the section
+entitled <link linkend="views">Using Multiple Views</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split View</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will split the current view.</action>  The orientation of the
+split is determined by the <guimenuitem>Splitter
+Orientation</guimenuitem>.  For more information on views, refer to the
+section entitled <link linkend="views">Using Multiple
+Views</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove View</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will close the current view.</action>  For more
+information on views, refer to the section entitled <link
+linkend="views">Using Multiple Views</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guisubmenu>Splitter Orientation</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This determines whether split views are oriented
+horizontally or vertically.</action>  Click on this option, and you are
+presented with a submenu with 2 options:
+<guimenuitem>Vertical</guimenuitem> and
+<guimenuitem>Horizontal</guimenuitem>. For more information on views,
+refer to the section entitled <link linkend="views">Using Multiple
+Views</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guisubmenu>Display Mode</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>When this option is selected, a submenu opens with 3 options:</para>
+<simplelist>
+<member><guilabel>Page Mode</guilabel> - &kword; will show you how your page looks in a WYSIWYG environment.  This is the standard view
+for editing your document.</member>
+<member><guilabel>Preview Mode</guilabel> - This changes &kword; from a single page view, to a multiple page view suitable for evaluating document flow and formatting. 
+The number of pages shown in preview mode <link linkend="opt-ui">can be adjusted</link>.</member>
+<member><guilabel>Text Mode</guilabel> - When this option is selected, &kword; will only show the text of your document.</member>
+</simplelist></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="view-formatting-menu">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Formatting Characters</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Clicking on this option toggles the display of formatting
+characters.  Selecting this option will display non-printable characters
+(spaces, character returns, and tab stops).  Selecting this option again
+will turn the display of these characters off.</action></para>
+<para>Which formatting characters are visible can be configured in the 
+<link linkend="opt-misc">&kword; configuration dialog</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame Borders</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Clicking on this option toggles the display of the borders
+to frames.  Normally, &kword; draws a gray line around each frame, so
+you can see the borders of the frames.  If you want this option turned
+off, you can select this option.  Selecting this option again will turn
+the borders back on.  </action></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Show/Hide Doc Structure</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Clicking on this option toggles the display of the document
+structure window.</action> For more information, refer to the section entitled
+<link linkend="doc-structure">Document Structure</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Show/Hide Rulers</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Selecting this option will toggle the rulers off.</action>
+Selecting this option again will turn rulers on.  More
+information on rulers can be found under <link
+linkend="rulers">Using rulers</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Show/Hide Grid</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Selecting this option will toggle the grid on.</action>
+Selecting this option again will turn grid off.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Snap to Grid</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Selecting this option will toggle the snap to grid on.</action>
+Selecting this option again will turn snap to grid off. A checkmark before
+the menu entry will show you the current status of this option.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-zoom">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>View</guimenu><guisubmenu>Zoom</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Selecting this option will let you increase or decrease
+the page magnification.  Selecting a zoom value larger than 100 percent
+causes the text and pictures to appear larger.  Selecting a zoom value
+smaller than 100 percent will cause the text and pictures to appear
+smaller.</action></para>
+
+<important>
+<para>The zoom value does not affect the final output of the text or
+pictures.  This option is intended to help you edit and layout your
+documents.</para>
+</important>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="insert">
+<title><guimenu>Insert</guimenu> Menu</title>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-insert-special-character">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Alt; &Shift; <keycap>C</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Special Character...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Opens a dialog box which allows you to select characters
+not found on the keyboard.</action></para> 
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul">&Alt; &Shift;
+<keycap>C</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-insert-hard-frame-break">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Return</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Page Break</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will enter a special character which will force text
+into the next connected text frame (Page Layout Templates) or the next page (Text Oriented Templates).</action> More information can be
+found at <link linkend="hard-break">Page Breaks</link> located in the <link linkend="frames">Working with Frames</link>
+section.</para>
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>Return</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar. </para> 
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-insert-page">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Page</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This option will insert a new page at the current cursor position.</action></para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Footnote/Endnote...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will insert a footnote or endnote at the current cursor
+position.</action>  More detailed information can be found in <link
+linkend="endnotes-and-footnotes">Footnotes and Endnotes</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Table of Contents</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will insert or update a table of contents at the current cursor
+position.</action>  More detailed information can be found in <link
+linkend="toc">Table of Contents</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Variable</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Selecting this option will allow you to insert page
+numbers, date, time, author information, &etc;</action> You can find
+specific information about page numbers <link
+linkend="page-number">here</link>.  More information about Date and
+Times can be found under <link linkend="date-time">Inserting the Date
+and Time</link>. More information on other variables can be found in <link
+linkend="variables">Document Variables</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Expression</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Selecting this option will allow you to insert common
+phrases.</action> The phrases are organized into categories. For
+information on using and adding expressions refer to the section
+entitled <link linkend="expressions">Expressions</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Link...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to connect text to an external web page,
+email address or files</action>
+For more information refer to the section entitled
+<link linkend="links">Document Links</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Comment...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to add comments to selected text.</action>
+For more information refer to the section entitled
+<link linkend="comments">Document Comments</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>File...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to insert another &kword; file within the document.</action>
+For more information refer to the section entitled
+<link linkend="insert-file">Inserting Files</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Bookmark...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to mark your place in the document for easy retrieval.</action>
+For more information refer to the section entitled
+<link linkend="bookmarks">Document Bookmarks</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-create-table">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F5</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Table...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will allow you to create a table in the current 
+cursor location.</action> For more information, please see the section entitled <link 
+linkend="tables">Tables</link>.</para> 
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F5</keycap></keycombo> or
+clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="part-kspread.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> are 
+equivalent to using the
+menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-insert-picture">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>F5</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Picture...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action> This option will let you create a new frame, and
+automatically insert a picture from a file into the new frame.</action>
+After selecting this menu item or toolbar button, a dialog box will be
+opened, so you may select the picture file from your system. (For help
+with this dialog box, please see <link
+linkend="insert-graphics">Inserting Graphics</link>.)  Once you have
+selected the file you want, click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
+button.  &kword; will close the dialog box, and your cursor will change
+to cross hairs.  Locate the cursor on the page where you would like to
+locate one corner of your picture.  Click and hold the
+&LMB;, then drag the mouse.
+This will create a border which represents the final size of the picture
+in your document.  When you are happy with the size of the picture,
+release the mouse button and the picture will be inserted in your new
+frame.</para>
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul">&Shift;<keycap>F5</keycap></keycombo> or
+clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="fpicture.png" 
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+is equivalent to using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-create-text-frame">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F10</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Text Frame</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>To create a new text frame.</action>  After selecting this
+option, your cursor will change to cross hairs.  Choose the location of
+one corner of your new text frame.  Click on the
+&LMB; and hold the button down.
+Drag the mouse, until you have the desired text frame.  When you have
+the correct shape and size, release the mouse button. &kword; will now
+bring up a dialog box with options to connect this text frame to other
+frames in your document.  For more information on this subject, see
+<link linkend="frames">Working with Frames</link>.</para> 
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F10</keycap></keycombo> or
+clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="tfcreatebut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is equivalent to using the
+menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-create-formula">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F4</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Formula</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Insert a formula into the document.</action>  More
+information on formulas in &kword; can be found <link
+linkend="formulas">here</link>.</para> 
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul"><keycap>F4</keycap></keycombo> or
+clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="part-kformula.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> are 
+equivalent to using
+the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-create-part">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guisubmenu>Object Frame</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Creates a new frame, and opens a dialog box listing each
+of the &koffice; applications. This will allow you to insert any data
+into your &kword; document.</action></para>
+<para>Clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="kpart.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is equivalent to
+using the menubar. </para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-scan-image">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Scan Image...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to access your scanner for inserting pictures into your document.</action> For more information see 
+the section entitled <link linkend="scan-graphics">Using a picture from a scanner</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="format">
+<title><guimenu>Format</guimenu> Menu</title><variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="format-default">
+<menuchoice>
+
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Default Format</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action> Automatically changes all formating back to the 
+default settings for the selected text.</action></para>
+<para>The default format can be set with the <link linkend="opt-document">Document Configuration</link> options.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="format-font">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>F</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Font...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action> Allows you to change the formatting characteristics of
+the selected text.</action> For more details, go to <link
+linkend="format-characters">Formating Characters</link></para>
+
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>F</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar. </para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Paragraph...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>To change the indenting, spacing between paragraphs, text flow,
+tab stops, numbering and borders.</action> For more details, go to <link
+linkend="format-para">Formating Paragraphs</link>.</para>
+<para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Footnote...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to change the look of your footnotes.</action>
+For more information see <link linkend="endnotes-and-footnotes">
+Footnotes</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guisubmenu>Formula</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to format the selected formula.</action>  For
+more information go to <link linkend="formulas">Formulas</link></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guisubmenu>Style</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Allows you to select a style for the selected text.  Selecting this option shows a submenu
+listing all available paragraphs styles. Select the correct style and the paragraph style will be changed.</para>
+<para>For more
+information go to <link linkend="styles">Text Styles</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-format-stylist">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>S</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Style Manager...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Opens a dialog to allow you to format, add and delete
+styles.</action> For more information go to <link
+linkend="styles">Styles</link></para><para>Typing <keycombo
+action="simul">&Alt;&Ctrl;<keycap>S</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar. </para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-import-style">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Import Styles...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to import a style.</action> For more information go to <link
+linkend="styles">Text Styles</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Create Style From Selection...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Uses the currently selected text to create a new style.</para>
+<para>For more
+information go to <link linkend="style-add-text">Text Styles</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Page Layout...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Use this to alter the properties of the printed page,
+including size, headers and footers.</action> For more details, go to
+<link linkend="page-format">Formating the Page</link></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enable/Disable Document Headers</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Selecting this option will toggle headers on.</action>
+Selecting this option again will turn headers off. More
+information on headers and footers can be found under <link
+linkend="headers-and-footers">Headers and Footers</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enable/Disable Document Footers</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Selecting this option will toggle footers on.</action>
+Selecting this option again will turn footers off. More
+information on headers and footers can be found under <link
+linkend="headers-and-footers">Headers and Footers</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+
+
+</variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="menu-frames">
+<title><guimenu>Frames</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="reconnect-frame">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame/Frameset Properties...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to configure basic formating options for the
+frameset.</action> More information on this subject can be found in
+<link linkend="format-frame">Setting properties for
+frames</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Delete Frame</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will allow you to delete the entire frame, and all of
+the text and objects contained within the frame.</action></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-raise-frame">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>R</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Raise Frame</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will allow you to raise the frame up one level.</action> For more information see the section entitled
+<link linkend="raise-frame">Raise and Lower frames</link>.</para>
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>R</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar. </para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-lower-frame">
+<menuchoice>
+<shortcut>
+<keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>L</keycap></keycombo>
+</shortcut>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Lower Frame</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will allow you to lower the frame down one level.</action> For more information see the section entitled
+<link linkend="raise-frame">Raise and Lower frames</link>.</para>
+<para>Typing <keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Shift;<keycap>L</keycap></keycombo> is equivalent to
+using the menubar. </para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-raise-front">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Bring to Front</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This raises the currently selected frame to the top of all overlapping frames.</action> For more information see the section entitled
+<link linkend="raise-frame">Raise and Lower frames</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-lower-back">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Send to Back</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This lowers the currently selected frame to the bottom of all overlapping frames.</action> For more information see the section entitled
+<link linkend="raise-frame">Raise and Lower frames</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-create-linked">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Create Linked Copy</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Creates a duplicate frame.  The contents of the new frame will automatically be updated to match the contents of the old frame.  As you continue to edit the document, changes to one of these frames will result in the same changes to the other frame.</action></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-create-tb">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Convert to Text Box</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Selected text is removed from the current frame.  A new frame is created to allow the selected text to be inserted, and the new text frame is inserted into the current document.  This is an easy way to remove a section of text and place it in a text box of its own.</action></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-framestylist">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame Style Manager...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to edit the frame styles.</action> For more information see the section entitled
+<link linkend="framestyles">Using frame styles</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-framestyle-create">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Create Framestyle From Frame...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Create a new framestyle based on the currently selected frame.</action> For more information see the section entitled
+<link linkend="framestyles">Using Framestyles</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-framestyle">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guisubmenu>Framestyle</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to format the selected frame(s) with a predefined framestyle.</action> For more information see the section entitled
+<link linkend="framestyles">Using frame styles</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Frame Background Color...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will allow you to change the background color of the current frame.</action></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guisubmenu>Configure Frame Border</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will allow you to change the border surrounding the current frame.  When selected, a submenu will 
+appear with all available border styles.  Select the correct style and the borders are instantly changed.</action></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>
+ <anchor id="MenuCrTF"/>
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table">
+<title><guimenu>Table</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+<variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-table-properties">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to change the number of rows and columns in a table.</action> For more
+on tables, <link linkend="tables">click here</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-insert-row">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Row</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Insert Row...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to insert a row into a table.</action> For more
+on tables, <link linkend="tables">click here</link>.</para>
+<para>Clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="rowin.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is
+equivalent to using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-delete-row">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Row</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Delete Selected Rows...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Delete a row from a table.</action> For more on tables,
+<link linkend="tables">click here</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="rowout.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+is equivalent to using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-insert-column">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Column</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Insert Column...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to insert a column into a table.</action> For
+more on tables, <link linkend="tables">click here</link>.</para>
+<para>Clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="colin.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is
+equivalent to using the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-delete-column">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Column</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Delete Selected Columns...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Delete a column from a table.</action> For more on tables,
+<link linkend="tables">click here</link>.</para> 
+<para>Clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="colout.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+is equivalent to using the menubar.</para> 
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-resize-column">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Column</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Resize Column...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Change the width of the currently selected column.</action> For more on changing column widths,
+<link linkend="table-resize-column">click here</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Cell</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Join Cells</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will convert two (or more) separate cells into a
+single cell.</action> For more on tables, <link linkend="tables">click
+here</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Cell</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Split Cell...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This will split one cell into multiple smaller cells.</action>  For more on tables, <link linkend="tables">click
+here</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Cell</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Protect Cells</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This prevent changes to the data in the selected cells.</action>  For more on tables, <link linkend="tables">click
+here</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Ungroup Table</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Converts a table into a grid of individual frames.</action> These individual frames are not connected and can be moved independently around the page.  For more on tables, <link
+linkend="tables">click here</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Delete Table</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Deletes the table the cursor is in.</action>  You can
+find more about tables in the section entitled <link linkend="tables">Tables</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Table Style Manager...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Lets you edit tablestyles.</action>  You can
+find more about tables in the section entitled <link linkend="tablestyle">Using Tablestyle</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-tablestyle">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Tablestyle</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Lets you format the currently selected table using a preformatted template.</action>  You can
+find more about tables in the section entitled <link linkend="tablestyle">Using Tablestyle</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-table-to-text">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Convert Table to Text</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Converts data that is currently in the selected table to regular text.</action>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="tools">
+<title><guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+<variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-auto-spell">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Spellcheck</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Autospellcheck</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Will toggle <link linkend="auto-spell-check">automatic spellchecking</link> of the document on and off.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term id="menu-spell">
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Spellcheck</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Spelling...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Will <link linkend="spell-check"><action>check the spelling of</action></link> the document.</para>
+<para>Clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="spell.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> is
+equivalent to using the menubar. </para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Autocorrection</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Disable/Enable Autocorrection</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Toggles autocorrection on and off.</action>  
+For more information see the section entitled
+<link linkend="autocorrect">Autocorrection</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Autocorrection</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Apply Autocorrection</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem><para><action>&kword; will format your document according to specific rules.</action>
+For more information see <link linkend="autoformat">Manually Applying Autocorrection</link>.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Change Case...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to set the case of all selected text.</action>
+For more information see <link linkend="change-font-case">
+Changing Font Case</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Sort Text...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Alphabetizes the selected paragraphs.  You will be given the option to sort in ascending or decending order</action>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Edit Personal Expressions...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This is for adding and editing expressions. </action>
+For information on using and adding expressions
+refer to the section entitled <link linkend="expressions">Expressions</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Expression</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Creates a new personal expression with the selected text.</action> For more information on personal expresions, 
+refer to the section entitled <link linkend="expressions">Expressions</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Custom Variables...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>This is for editing custom document variables. </action>
+For information on using and adding expressions
+refer to the section entitled <link linkend="variables">Document variables</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Select Bookmark...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Jump to, rename or delete bookmarks.  For more information see the section entitled 
+<link linkend="bookmarks">Document Bookmarks</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Mail Merge...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Displays the <link linkend="mail-merge">Mail Merge Setup</link> Dialog.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="settings">
+<title><guimenu>Settings</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+<variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guisubmenu>Toolbars</guisubmenu>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to hide or reveal toolbars individually.</action>  For more information see 
+the section entitled <link linkend="toolbars">Hiding, Changing and Moving Toolbars</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<!--
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Type Anywhere Cursor</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>
+<indexterm><primary>Type Anywhere Cursor</primary></indexterm>
+Toggles the cursor between two distinct behaviors.</action></para>  
+<para>When Type Anywhere Cursor is not selected, and you click in an area of the document that does not currently have any text or whitespace, &kword; moves the cursor to the end of the previous line of text that exists.  This prevents the addition of whitespace where it is not needed.</para>  
+<para>When Type Anywhere Cursor is selected, &kword; inserts whitespace characters to make it possible for you to begin typing at that exact location.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+-->
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Autocorrection...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to modify the autocorrection options.</action>
+For more on Autocorrection, <link linkend="autocorrect">click
+here</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Completion...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to modify the autocompletion options.</action>
+For more see the section on <link linkend="autocomplete">Autocompletion</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Shortcuts...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to change the keyboard shortcuts.</action> For
+details, click <link linkend="options-keybindings">here</link></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Toolbars...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to change the toolbars.</action> For details,
+click <link linkend="options-toolbars">here</link></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term>
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure &kword;...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice>
+</term>
+<listitem>
+<para><action>Allows you to change miscellaneous</action> &kword;
+options.For details, click <link linkend="options-kword">here</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="help">
+<title><guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+&help.menu.documentation;
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
+
+<sect1 id="file-toolbar">
+<title><guilabel>File</guilabel> Toolbar</title>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>File</guilabel> toolbar consists of 5 buttons.  Each button performs a
+task from the menubar.  Click on that task for more details. </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="filetb.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Button</entry><entry>Command</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-new"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="filenew2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-new">Open New File</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-open"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="fileopen.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-open">Open Saved File</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-save"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="filefloppy.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-save">Save File</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-print"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="fileprint.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-print">Print File</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-print-preview"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="fileprint2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-print-preview">Print Preview</link>
+</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="char-format-toolbar">
+<title><guilabel>Format</guilabel> ToolBar</title>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> toolbar consists of 9 buttons.  Each button
+performs a task from the <link linkend="change-font-dialog">format
+character dialog</link>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="cftb.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Button</entry><entry>Command</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="chfontbut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Select Font Face</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="chsizebut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Character Size</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="bold.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle Bold Text</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="ital.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle Italics</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="undl.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle Underline</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="stkout.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle Strikeout</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="supscbut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle Superscript Text</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="subscbut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle Subscript Text</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="chcolorbut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry><para>Change Font Color</para>
+<para>Clicking on the letter changes the selected text to the color previewed in the underline.  Clicking the arrow to the right of the letter will let you select a new color.</para></entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+</sect1>
+
+
+<sect1 id="insert-toolbar">
+<title><guilabel>Insert</guilabel> Toolbar</title>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Insert</guilabel> toolbar consists of 5 buttons.  Each button performs a
+task from the menubar.  Click on that task for more details. </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="instb.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Button</entry><entry>Command</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-create-table"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="part-kspread.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-create-table">Insert Table</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-insert-picture"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="fpicture.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-insert-picture">Insert Picture</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-create-text-frame"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="tfcreatebut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-create-text-frame">Insert Text Frame</link>
+</entry></row><row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-create-formula"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="part-kformula.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-create-formula">Insert Formula Frame</link>
+</entry></row><row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-create-part"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="kpart.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-create-part">Insert Object Frame</link>
+</entry></row>
+</tbody>
+</tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="basic-edit-toolbar">
+<title><guilabel>Edit</guilabel> Toolbar</title>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> toolbar consists of 8 buttons.  Each 
+button performs a task from the menubar.  Click on that
+task for more details. </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="edittb.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Button</entry><entry>Command</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-undo"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="undo.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-undo">Undo</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-redo"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="redo.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-redo">Redo</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-cut"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="editcut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-cut">Cut</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-copy"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="editcopy.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-copy">Copy</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-paste"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="editpaste.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-paste">Paste</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-spell"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="spell.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-spell">Spell Check</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-find"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="find.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-find">Find</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-zoom"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="zoom.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-zoom">Zoom</link>
+</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="paragraph-toolbar">
+<title><guilabel>Paragraph</guilabel> Toolbar</title>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Paragraph</guilabel> toolbar consists of 9 buttons.  Each button performs
+a task from the menubar.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="paratb.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Button</entry><entry>Command</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="chstylebut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Select Character Style</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="alignLeft.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Left Text Align</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="alignCenter.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Center Text Align</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="alignRight.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Right Text Align</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="alignBlock.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Justify Text</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="numtxtbut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Numbered Text paragraphs</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="bullist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Bulleted Text paragraphs</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="decindbut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Reduce paragraph indent</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="incindbut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Increase Paragraph Indent</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="table-edit-toolbar">
+<title><guilabel>Table</guilabel> Toolbar</title>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Table</guilabel> toolbar consists of 5 buttons.  Each button
+performs a task from the menubar.  Click on that task for more
+details. </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="tedittb.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Button</entry><entry>Command</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-tablestyle"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="tblsty.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-tablestyle">Set tablestyle</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-insert-row"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="rowin.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-insert-row">Insert Row</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-insert-column"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="colin.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-insert-column">Insert Column</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-delete-row"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="rowout.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-delete-row">Delete Row</link>
+</entry></row>
+<row><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-delete-column"><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="colout.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></link>
+</entry><entry>
+<link linkend="menu-delete-column">Delete Column</link>
+</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup>
+</informaltable>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="border-toolbar">
+<title><guilabel>Border</guilabel> Toolbar</title>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Border</guilabel> toolbar consists of 10 buttons.  Each button performs a
+task from the menubar.  Click on that task for more details. </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="bordtb.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Button</entry><entry>Command</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="tblsty.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Set framestyle</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="bord.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle border outline</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="lbord.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle Left Frame Border</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="rbord.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle Right Frame Border</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="tbord.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle Top Frame Border</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="bbord.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Toggle Bottom Frame Border</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="bdsizebut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Select Border Size</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="bdselbut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Select Border Style</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="bkgdcolorbut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Select Border Color</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="bdcolorbut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Select Background Color</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="formula-toolbar">
+<title><guilabel>Formula</guilabel> Toolbar</title>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Formula</guilabel> toolbar consists of 26 buttons.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="formtb.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<informaltable>
+<tgroup cols="2">
+<thead>
+<row><entry>Button</entry><entry>Command</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formsqrt.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add or Change Square Root</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formfrac.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add Fraction</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formbrac.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add to Brackets</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formsbrac.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add to Square Brackets</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formcbrac.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add to Curly Brackets</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formabs.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Absolute Value</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formover.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add Overline</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formunder.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add Underline</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="forminteg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Integral</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formsum.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Change to Sum</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formprod.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Change to Product</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formmat.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add Matrix</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formulind.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add Upper Left Index</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formllind.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add Lower Left Index</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formurind.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add Upper Right Index</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formlrind.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Add Lower Right Index</entry></row>
+<row><entry>-</entry><entry>Right Facing Characters</entry></row>
+<row><entry>-</entry><entry>Left Facing Characters</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="formspecchar.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Special Symbols</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="kforminscol.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Insert Column</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="kformappcol.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Append Column</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="kformremcol.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Remove Column</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="kforminsrow.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Insert Row</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="kformapprow.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Append Row</entry></row>
+<row><entry><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="kformremrow.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></entry><entry>Remove Row</entry></row>
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="select-colors">
+<title>Selecting Colors from a <guilabel>Select Color</guilabel> dialog</title>
+<indexterm><primary>selecting a color</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; uses a common dialog box any time the user needs to select a color for an object (text, backgrounds, borders, etc.).</para>
+<para>This section will go into some detail on how to use this color dialog to choose the best color for your object.</para>
+<para>When it is necessary to select a color, a dialog box appears.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="colorseldlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>The color dialog is an incredibly flexible dialog box, which makes it possible to select colors in one of six different methods:</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Spectrum selectors</term>
+<listitem><para>The spectrum selectors consists of a square to adjust <glossterm linkend="defhue">Hue</glossterm> and
+<glossterm linkend="defsaturation">Saturation</glossterm>, and a tall narrow box to adjust <glossterm linkend="defvalue">Value</glossterm>.</para>
+<para>The white cross hairs in the box show the currently selected color on the spectrum.  Drag the cross hairs up to increase
+<glossterm linkend="defsaturation">saturation</glossterm>.  Drag down to decrease <glossterm linkend="defsaturation">saturation</glossterm>.  Move the
+cross hairs left or right to change the <glossterm linkend="defhue">hue</glossterm>.</para>
+<para>To adjust the <glossterm linkend="defvalue">value</glossterm> of the color, use the tall, narrow box to move the black arrow.  Sliding the
+arrow up increases the color's <glossterm linkend="defvalue">value</glossterm>.  Sliding the arrow down decreases the color's
+<glossterm linkend="defvalue">value</glossterm>.</para>
+<para>The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the <guibutton>Add to Custom Colors</guibutton> button.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Hue, Saturation and Value</term>
+<listitem><para>Using the three spin boxes labeled <guilabel>H</guilabel>,<guilabel>S</guilabel> and <guilabel>V</guilabel>, a user can
+specify the <glossterm linkend="defhue">Hue</glossterm> (Range 0-359), <glossterm linkend="defsaturation">Saturation</glossterm> (Range 0-255) 
+and <glossterm linkend="defvalue">Value</glossterm> (Range 0-255)
+respectively.</para>
+<para>The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the <guibutton>Add to Custom Colors</guibutton> button.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Red, Green and Blue</term>
+<listitem><para>Using the three spin boxes labeled <guilabel>R</guilabel>,<guilabel>G</guilabel> and <guilabel>B</guilabel>, a user can
+specify the amount of Red, Green and Blue to be mixed to form the current color.  All three boxes can be set to any value from 0-255.</para>
+<para>The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the <guibutton>Add to Custom Colors</guibutton> button.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Palettes</term>
+<listitem><para>A palette is a group of related colors.  These colors are all made available for easy selection according to a meaningful
+association.</para>
+<para>To select a new palette, click on the combo box at the top of the palette selection area.  
+You will be presented with several choices:</para>
+<para><guilabel>Recent Colors</guilabel> - This is a list of the most recently used colors in your document.  You can use this palette to
+maintain consistency.  As each new color is selected, it is automatically added to the recent colors palette.</para>
+<para><guilabel>Custom Colors</guilabel> - You can create your own custom palette.  This is done by selecting a 
+color using one of the other
+color selection options, and clicking on <guibutton>Add to Custom Colors</guibutton>.  
+That color is now added to your custom color palette.</para>
+<para><guilabel>Forty Colors</guilabel> - This is a list of 40 commonly used colors.  This is a good palette to choose from if some of the people
+viewing your document will be on machines with limited color capability.</para>
+<para><guilabel>Web Colors</guilabel> - This is a predefined palette of colors that you might find useful for designing web pages.</para>
+<para><guilabel>Royal Colors</guilabel> - This is a predefined palette of colors including numerous shades of purple and yellow.</para>
+<para><guilabel>Named Colors</guilabel> - This is a list of color names.  The names are based on standard X server color
+names.  The names are designed to give descriptive names to each color.  Simply select the name you want. </para>
+<para>Once you have selected a palette, you will be presented with a small square showing each color available in the palette. To 
+select a color from the palette, simply click on the square of the desired color.</para>
+<para>The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the <guibutton>Add to Custom Colors</guibutton> button.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>Eye dropper</term>
+<listitem><para>The eye dropper can be used to sample a color from the screen.  </para>
+<para>When the eye dropper button is clicked, the cursor becomes crosshairs.  Simply place the crosshairs over any spot on the screen
+and click once.  &kword; will detect the selected color and automatically change the current color to match the selection.</para>
+<para>This is especially useful for matching color elements between previously created elements and new items.</para>
+<para>The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the <guibutton>Add to Custom Colors</guibutton> button.</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>HTML code</term>
+<listitem><para>If you know the HTML color code you want to use, you can enter it into the text box labeled 
+<guilabel>HTML:</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>For more information on HTML color codes, visit the
+<ulink url="http://hotwired.lycos.com/webmonkey/reference/color_codes/">Web monkey</ulink> color code page.</para>
+<para>The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the <guibutton>Add to Custom Colors</guibutton> button.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+<para>Once the color is selected, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to make that the current color for your text, border, etc.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort the color selection.</para>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 id="file-dialog">
+<title>Selecting files using the file dialog</title>
+<indexterm><primary>using file dialog</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; uses a common dialog box for all file related actions (saving, loading, or selecting new files 
+for insertion into the document). An example is shown below.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="savedlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>This section  will look more closely at this dialog and provided detailed information on its use.</para>
+
+<para>We will begin at the top of the dialog.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>The current location on the drive is listed at the top-center of the dialog.  This example dialog shows the current folder is <filename
+class="directory">/home/mmcbride/kword</filename>. If you click on this drop
+down box, you will see common and recently visited folders.  By
+selecting one of these folders, you will be immediately moved to
+that folder and the dialog box will update the file list.</para>
+
+<para>In the upper left corner, is a blue arrow pointed up.  This
+arrow will take you up one level in the folder structure.</para>
+
+<para>The next two buttons are back and forward buttons.  These
+buttons work just like those in an Internet browser. You can use the <guiicon>Back</guiicon>
+button to travel to the previous folder, and the <guiicon>Forward</guiicon> button to
+advance into a folder you just came from.</para>
+
+<para>Next to the arrow buttons, is a <guiicon>Reload</guiicon> button.  Clicking this
+button, causes &kword; to reload the current folder if new files have been
+added or deleted.</para>
+
+<para>To the right of the <guiicon>Reload</guiicon> button, is a blue file folder with a starburst.  This button
+will let you create a new folder and name it.</para>
+
+<para>Next to the new folder button, is a button with a star on it.
+This button allows you to set and navigate through bookmarks.  This is
+a quick way to jump to commonly accessed folders.  By clicking
+this button, a submenu appears which allows you to add bookmarks or
+jump to a new bookmark.</para>
+
+<para>Next to the bookmark button, is a button with a wrench on it. 
+Clicking this button brings up a sub menu with several entries:</para>
+<para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Sorting</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If this option is selected, a submenu will appear allowing you to sort your files by name, date or size.  You can sort them forward or reversed.  You can also determine if 
+folders should be listed before files, or mixed within the files.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Short View</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If this option is selected, only the names of the files and folders will be shown.</para>
+<para>Compare this to detailed view.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Detailed View</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If this option is selected, the names, sizes, dates, permisions, file owners and group ownerships are shown.</para>
+<para>Compare this to short view.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Show Hidden Files</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This will toggle between revealing and hiding normally hidden files.  In most cases you will want to leave this option off.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Show/Hide Quick Access Navigation Panel</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>The tall box along the left side of the dialog with a dark grey backround is the Quick Navigation Panel.  You can use this option to toggle whether it is visible or not.</para>
+<para>More detailed information about hte Quick Navigation Panel is avialable further down this page.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Show/Hide Preview</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use this option to toggle whether the preview panel is visible or not.  Typically, the preview panel is left off, but it can be useful when looking for a picture to insert into a document.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guimenuitem>Separate Folders</guimenuitem></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this option to toggle between a 2 pane view of the filesystem and a one pane view of the filesystem.  
+Most people will not need to worry about this option as most people prefer the one pane view.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Quick Navigation Bar</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Along the left side of the dialog box, is a column that contains
+several icons. You can think of each of these icons as a shortcut to
+another subfolder. If you click on an icon, you will be immediately
+moved to that location.</para>
+
+<para>You can add/edit or delete entries from the Location Bar.
+Simply click with the &RMB; and a small popup menu will appear.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>File Name and Filters</emphasis></para>
+
+
+<para>The text box labeled <guilabel>Location:</guilabel> contains the current filename <filename>Resume.kwd</filename>. This text box will contain the 
+filename of the currently selected file when loading new documents or files into
+&kword;.  When saving a file, you will enter the desired filename in this text box.</para>
+
+<para>The text box labeled <guilabel>Filter:</guilabel> shows we are only looking
+at &kword; files.  By clicking on the combo box, you can select from several
+different file formats.  You can also select <guilabel>All Supported Files</guilabel> to display
+all files that are supported by &kword;.  The file types available will change depending on
+the specific task at hand.</para>
+
+<para>If there is a mark in the checkbox labeled <guilabel>Automatically select filename extension</guilabel>, 
+then &kword; will add the correct filename extension based on your selection in the <guilabel>Filter:</guilabel> 
+drop down box.  If there is no mark in this box, you are responsible for providing an extension.  Most users 
+will leave this box marked.</para>
+
+<para>There is a <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, if you click this
+button, the action will be aborted, and you will return to editing the
+document.</para>
+
+<para>There is an <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, which will be used
+when we have selected the correct filename.</para>
+
+<para>Using this dialog, you can move through the folder tree to find
+any location on your computer.</para>
+
+<para>To enter a folder click on that folder.  To exit that folder,
+click the blue up arrow button.</para>
+
+<note><para>This dialog box is used in many different tasks in &kword;.  The task will determine the exact effect
+of the information you have entered into this dialog box.  For more information on the exact effect, see the documentation on that task.
+</para></note>
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/doc/kword/migrating.docbook b/doc/kword/migrating.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c224b1f83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/migrating.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+<chapter id="migration">
+<chapterinfo>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</chapterinfo>
+<title>Migrating to &kword;</title>
+<indexterm><primary>migrating to &kword;</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To be written</para>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/doc/kword/mmerge1.png b/doc/kword/mmerge1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..db14e0b88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/mmerge1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/mmerge1a.png b/doc/kword/mmerge1a.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f6aca0c49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/mmerge1a.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/mmerge2.png b/doc/kword/mmerge2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..481d2d09b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/mmerge2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/mmergeab1.png b/doc/kword/mmergeab1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cd3306027
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/mmergeab1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/mmergekspread1.png b/doc/kword/mmergekspread1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d187ab964
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/mmergekspread1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/mmergesql1.png b/doc/kword/mmergesql1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..67f5b99ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/mmergesql1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/mmergesql2.png b/doc/kword/mmergesql2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..05d7df32d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/mmergesql2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/mousenav.png b/doc/kword/mousenav.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..462c6051f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/mousenav.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/numtxtbut.png b/doc/kword/numtxtbut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dcccf5eff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/numtxtbut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/opendlg.png b/doc/kword/opendlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ede758e55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/opendlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/opt.docbook b/doc/kword/opt.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7fb0b5881
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/opt.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,654 @@
+<chapter id="options">
+<chapterinfo>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</chapterinfo>
+<title>&kword; Options</title>
+<indexterm><primary>&kword;</primary><secondary>options</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>configuring &kword;</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This section of the documentation will show you how to configure &kword; to suit your personal work style and preferences.</para>
+<para>&kword; can be modified in three separate ways:</para>
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="options-keybindings">Configure shortcuts</link></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="options-toolbars">Configure toolbars</link></para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="options-kword">Miscellaneous options</link></para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+<sect1 id="options-keybindings">
+<title>Configure Key Bindings (keyboard shortcuts)</title>
+<indexterm><primary>configuring keyboard shortcuts</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>keyboard shortcuts</primary><secondary>changing</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>configuring key binding</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>keyboard key binding</primary><secondary>changing</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To configure the keyboard shortcuts select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure Shortcuts...
+</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+
+<para>This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="optkb.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>To edit the shortcuts, the first thing you need to do is find
+the action you want to edit.  All of the possible actions are listed in
+the combo box labeled <guilabel>Action</guilabel>.  By using the
+scrollbar, locate the action you are interested in and click once with
+the &LMB;.</para>
+
+<para>Once you have selected the action, you can turn your attention to
+the bottom half of the dialog box. You use the bottom half of the dialog
+box to change the shortcuts.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>None</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting this option, the currently selected action will not
+have any keyboard shortcut.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Default</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting this option, the currently selected action will use
+the default shortcut.  Once this option is clicked, the default keyboard shortcut
+is listed below.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Custom</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting this option, you can choose any keyboard combination
+as a shortcut for this action.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+
+<sect2 id="options-keybindings-custom"><title>Defining custom keyboard shortcuts</title>
+<para>You determine the key combination by clicking on the button with the current
+keyboard combination in it.  A second dialog will appear:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="optkb2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This dialog box allows you to determine two different key combinations
+which will trigger the desired action:  <guilabel>Primary shortcut:</guilabel> and <guilabel>Alternate shortcut:</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<sect3 id="custom-keybinding-single"><title>Defining simple keyboard shortcuts</title>
+<para>Begin by deciding if you want to specify the <guilabel>Primary shortcut:</guilabel> or <guilabel>Alternate shortcut:</guilabel>
+, by placing a mark in the appropriate radiobutton.</para>
+
+<para>The <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="clearright.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> button will clear the current keyboard shortcut.</para>
+
+<para>Now type the keyboard shortcut into the keyboard.  &kword; will use this keyboard combination as the new
+keyboard shortcut.  The window will close automatically.</para>
+
+<para>Once you have completed your entries, simply click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
+to accept the changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel your changes.</para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="custom-keybinding-multi"><title>Defining multi-key keyboard shortcuts</title>
+
+<para>Multi-key keyboard shortcuts can be used when you run out of simple keyboard shortcuts.  </para>
+
+<para>Multi-key shortcuts are edited the same as simple keyboard shortcuts, except a mark is placed in the
+check box labeled <guilabel>Multi-key mode</guilabel> <emphasis>prior</emphasis> to entering the keyboard shortcut.</para>
+
+<para>You can now enter multiple keyboard characters for the keyboard shortcut.</para>
+
+<note><para>It is important to understand that keyboard <emphasis>combinations</emphasis> 
+(i.e.: <keycombo action="simul">&Alt; &Shift;
+<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo>) are still a <emphasis>single character</emphasis> because all the keys are
+depressed at the same time.</para>
+
+<para>An example of a multi-key combination would be if you press <keycombo action="simul">&Alt;
+<keycap>X</keycap></keycombo>, release both characters then type a 
+<keycap>W</keycap>.  This is a multi-key combination.</para></note>
+
+<para>Once you have completed your entries, simply click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
+to accept the changes or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel your changes.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="options-toolbars">
+<title>Configure Toolbars</title>
+<indexterm><primary>configuring toolbars</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To configure &kword;'s toolbars
+select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure
+Toolbars...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+
+<para>This will bring up a dialog box. You can add or remove as many
+toolbar buttons to as many toolbars as you like. You can also move the
+buttons around on the toolbar using this dialog.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="opttb.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<sect2>
+<title>Adding a button to a toolbar</title>
+
+<para>To add a button to a toolbar, you move it from the
+<guilabel>Available actions:</guilabel> box to the <guilabel>Current
+actions:</guilabel> column.</para>
+
+<para>First select the toolbar you want to add a button to by selecting
+the toolbar from the combo box labeled
+<guilabel>Toolbar:</guilabel></para>
+
+<para>Now select the action you want to add from the combo box labeled
+<guilabel>Available actions:</guilabel> by clicking once with the left
+mouse button.</para>
+
+<para>Click the blue arrow pointing to the
+right. <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="rarrow.png"
+format="PNG" /></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></para>
+
+<para>Once the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button or the <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button has been clicked, the toolbars
+will change.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2>
+<title>Deleting a button from a toolbar</title>
+
+<para>To delete a button from a toolbar, you move it from the
+<guilabel>Current actions:</guilabel> box to the <guilabel>Available
+actions:</guilabel> column.</para>
+
+<para>First select the toolbar you want to delete a button from by selecting
+the toolbar from the combo box labeled
+<guilabel>Toolbar:</guilabel></para>
+
+<para>Select the toolbar button you want to remove the button from
+the combo box labeled <guilabel>Current actions:</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>Click the blue arrow pointing to the
+left. <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="larrow.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject></para>
+
+<para>Once the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button or the <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button has been clicked, the toolbars
+will change.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2>
+<title>Moving a button on a toolbar</title>
+
+<para>First select the toolbar you want to move a button on by selecting
+the toolbar from the combo box labeled
+<guilabel>Toolbar:</guilabel></para>
+
+<para>To move a button, simply click on the button you want to move with
+the <mousebutton>left</mousebutton> mouse button.</para>
+
+<para>Click the up or down arrows to move the button up or down the
+toolbar respectively.</para>
+
+<para>Once the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button or the <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button has been clicked, the toolbars
+will change.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="options-kword">
+<title>&kword; Options</title>
+<indexterm><primary>&kword;</primary><secondary>options</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To configure options regarding spelling and the user interface
+select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Settings</guimenu><guimenuitem>Configure
+&kword;...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+
+<para>This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+
+
+<sect2 id="opt-ui">
+<title>Configure &kword; User Interface</title>
+
+<para>Clicking <guibutton>Interface</guibutton> will allow you to change
+the following.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="opt2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Units:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Select your preferred unit of measurement.  &kword; will use these units for all measurements.  See
+<link linkend="rulers">Using Rulers</link> for more information.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Show status bar</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Placing a mark in this check box makes the status bar visible in &kword;.  See
+<link linkend="kword-screen">The &kword; Screen</link> for more information.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Show scrollbar</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Placing a mark in this check box makes the scrollbar visible in &kword;.  See
+<link linkend="kword-screen">The &kword; Screen</link> for more information.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>PageUp/PageDown moves the caret</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>If this check box has a mark, then when you press the <keycap>PageUp</keycap> and <keycap>PageDown</keycap> keys
+on the keyboard, &kword; moves the text cursor (the caret) down one page.  If there is no mark in this check box 
+then &kword; moves the view, but does not change the position of the text cursor. </para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Number of recent files:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This determines the maximum number of files that are listed under
+<menuchoice> <guimenu>File</guimenu><guisubmenu>Open
+Recent</guisubmenu></menuchoice> command. You can adjust this value
+from 1-20.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Horizontal grid size:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Determines the horizontal size of the grid.  When frames and tab stops are placed on the page, they
+are placed on a point in the grid.  This gives your document a more professional look because elements are effectively
+aligned.  You can reduce the grid size if you need finer control of your layout.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Vertical grid size:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Determines the vertical size of the grid.  When frames are placed on the page, they
+are placed on a point in the grid.  This gives your document a more professional look because elements are effectively
+aligned.  You can reduce the grid size if you need finer control of your layout.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Paragraph indent by toolbar buttons:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Use this spin box to determine how far the paragraph is indented when using the increase indent button
+(<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="incindbut.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>) and the decrease indent button
+(<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="decindbut.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>).</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Number of pages per row in preview mode:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Determines the number of pages per row in preview mode.
+This determines the size of the pages in preview mode.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>When you are happy with the changes, simply click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para>If you click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, all changes will be
+lost.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking on the <guibutton>Defaults</guibutton> button restores all
+values to their default values.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="opt-document"><title>Configure document options</title>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="opt4.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<sect3 id="opt-document-defaults"><title>Document defaults</title>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Default column spacing</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this to adjust the default spacing between columns.  For more information on columns see
+<link linkend="columns">Columns</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Default font:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Click on the <guibutton>Choose...</guibutton> button, and a new dialog will appear.  Use this dialog to
+choose the default font.  This setting determines the default font used by &kword; until further formatting is done.  You can
+revert any text to this default by selecting
+<menuchoice> <guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Default Format</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Global language:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this drop down box to determine the default language for the document.  This setting is used by the 
+hyphenation and spelling tools.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Automatic hyphenation</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Place a mark in this checkbox if you want &kword; to automatically hyphenate long words when it determines the word wrap 
+in text frames.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="opt-document-settings"><title>Document settings</title>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Autosave every (min):</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use this to adjust how often &kword; saves a temporary
+file.  If you set this value to <guilabel>No autosave</guilabel>, &kword; will not autosave. 
+You can adjust the autosave from 1 minute to 60 minutes.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Create backup file</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>If there is a mark in this checkbox, &kword; will automatically create a backup file everytime you save your document.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Starting page number:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Use this text box to determine the starting page number.  For more information on page numbering see
+<link linkend="page-number">Page Numbering</link>.</para>
+<tip><para>This is helpful if you have split a single document into multiple files.</para></tip>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Tab stop:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>Each &kword; document has a default set of tab stops.  If you add tab stops to your document, the newly added 
+tab stops override the default tabstops.  You can use this text box to define the spacing between default tab stops.</para>
+<para>As an example.  If you enter <userinput>1.5</userinput> in this text box, and the unit of measure is in centimeters, then the 
+first default tab stop will be located 1.5 cm to the right of the left margin of the frame.  The second default tab stop will be located at 3 cm from the 
+left margin, etc....</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="opt-document-cursor"><title>Cursor settings</title>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Cursor in protected area</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>  
+When there is a mark in this check box, and you click in a protected frame of your document, a cursor appears.  When the 
+mark is removed from this check box, and you click in a protected frame, there is no cursor visible.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<!-- varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Direct insert cursor</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>  
+When there is a mark in this check box, and you can select a section of text using your mouse.  Move the mouse to a new place 
+in your document and click once with the middle mouse button and a copy of the selected text is copied and pasted to the new location 
+in the document.</para>
+<para>When there is no mark in this checkbox, in order to copy text from one section to another, you must select the text, 
+<link linkend="local-copy">manually copy the text in to the clipboard</link>, then manually paste the text in the new location.  </para></listitem>
+</varlistentry -->
+</variablelist>
+
+
+<para>When you are happy with the changes, simply click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para>If you click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, all changes will be
+lost.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking on the <guibutton>Defaults</guibutton> button restores all
+values to their default values.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+
+
+<sect2 id="opt-spell">
+<title>Configure Spelling.</title>
+
+<para>To configure the options for the speller, click on the button
+labeled <guibutton>Spelling</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="opt1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Each option is detailed below.</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Default language:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Used by the spelling application to choose the correct dictionary.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Enable background spellchecking</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>If a mark is placed in this checkbox, &kword; will check the spelling of words in your document as you type them.  Words that 
+&kword; believes are misspelled will have a red line drawn under them.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Skip all uppercase words</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>If a mark is placed in this checkbox, &kword; will not check the spelling of any word which consists of all capital letters.</para>
+<tip><para>This is useful if the document you are working on uses a large number of acronyms.  If this box is left unchecked, most of those acronyms 
+will be incorrectly marked.  By placing a mark in this checkbox, &kword; will not mark the acronyms as misspelled.</para></tip></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Skip run-together words</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>If this box is not checked, and &kword; finds a two words in its dictionary that are placed next to each other, it will be
+marked as misspelled.  If this box is checked, the combined word will be ignored.</para>
+<para>Examples of such words are <emphasis>shutout</emphasis>,
+<emphasis>cannot</emphasis>, and <emphasis>blackout</emphasis>.</para>
+<tip>
+<para>Checking this box will help prevent &kword; from
+flagging website and email addresses for spelling errors.  These
+addresses often contain words run together.</para>
+</tip></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+<sect3><title>Ignoring words</title>
+<para>The bottom half of the dialog box allows you to designate specific words (they may be specialized terminology, proper names, etc) which
+should be ignored by the spelling program.</para>
+
+<sect4><title>Adding a word to the ignore list</title>
+<para>To add a word, type the word in the text box directly below the words <guilabel>Ignore 
+These Words</guilabel> and click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4><title>Deleteing a word from the ignore list</title>
+<para>To remove a word, select the word in the listbox containing all the currently ignored words by clicking on it with 
+the &LMB;.  Now click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button.</para>
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4><title>Changing the order a word appears in the list</title>
+<para>To move a word in the list, select the word in the listbox containing all the currently ignored words by clicking on it with 
+the &LMB;.  Now click the <guibutton>Move Up</guibutton> button or the <guibutton>Move Up</guibutton> button to move the word
+within the list.</para>
+
+<para>When you are happy with the changes, simply click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para>If you click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, all changes will be
+lost.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking on the <guibutton>Defaults</guibutton> button restores all
+values to their default values.</para>
+</sect4>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+
+
+<sect2 id="opt-formula"><title>Configure formula options</title>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="opt5.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>Use this dialog to format the appearance of formulas in &kword;.  See the formula documentation for further details.</para>
+<para>When you are happy with the changes, simply click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para>If you click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, all changes will be
+lost.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking on the <guibutton>Defaults</guibutton> button restores all
+values to their default values.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="opt-misc"><title>Configure miscellaneous options</title>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="opt3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<sect3 id="opt-misc-misc"><title>Misc</title>
+<variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Undo/redo limit:</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Use this spin box or slider to determine how many actions &kword; keeps in its Undo buffer.  Any action that exceeds 
+this number will be forgotten.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Display links</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Placing a mark in this check box makes document links visible in &kword;. If there is no mark in this check box,
+document links will be hidden.  See
+<link linkend="links">Document links</link> for more information.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Underline all links</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Placing a mark in this check box will have &kword; automatically underline a document link when it is created. See
+<link linkend="links">Document links</link> for more information.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Display comments</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Placing a mark in this check box makes document comments visible in &kword;.  See
+<link linkend="comments">Document comments</link> for more information.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Display field code</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>If there is a mark in this check box, &kword; shows the variable name of document variables,
+rather than the content of the variable in the &kword;
+screen.  If this check box does not have a mark, then &kword; shows the contents of the variables. </para>
+<note><para>This option does not affect the printed output.  The contents of the variables are printed regardless of the state of this
+check box.</para></note>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="opt-misc-viewformatting"><title>View Formatting</title>
+
+<para>You can use these four check boxes to determine what formatting characters are displayed when you have asked &kword; to
+<link linkend="view-formatting-menu">show formatting characters</link>.</para>
+<variablelist>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>View formatting end paragraph</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Toggles the display of paragraph marks (new-line characters) on and off.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>View formatting space</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Toggles the display of individual spaces on and off.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>View formatting tabs</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Toggles the display of tab stops on and off.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>View formatting break</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>Toggles the display of frame breaks on and off.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+
+<para>When you are happy with the changes, simply click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para>If you click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, all changes will be
+lost.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking on the <guibutton>Defaults</guibutton> button restores all
+values to their default values.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="opt-path"><title>Configure path options</title>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="opt6.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>Use this dialog to set the <guilabel>Backup Path</guilabel> and the directory 
+for your <guilabel>Personal Expression</guilabel> in &kword;.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="opt-tts"><title>Configure Text-To-Speech options</title>
+
+<para>See the <link linkend="a11y-tts">Text-to-Speech</link> section 
+in the accessibility chapter for further details.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/doc/kword/opt1.png b/doc/kword/opt1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cf32ccc1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/opt1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/opt2.png b/doc/kword/opt2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..45cbf78d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/opt2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/opt3.png b/doc/kword/opt3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b866c8a23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/opt3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/opt4.png b/doc/kword/opt4.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..26de4bed8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/opt4.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/opt5.png b/doc/kword/opt5.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..35b59a3eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/opt5.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/opt6.png b/doc/kword/opt6.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..05decd5d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/opt6.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/optkb.png b/doc/kword/optkb.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cf574a404
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/optkb.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/optkb2.png b/doc/kword/optkb2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6628c2a97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/optkb2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/opttb.png b/doc/kword/opttb.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..833c4afc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/opttb.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/pageformat.docbook b/doc/kword/pageformat.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..395003049
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/pageformat.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,253 @@
+<sect1 id="page-format">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Formatting the Page</title>
+
+<para>Before delving into the specifics of formatting a page in &kword;, remember that
+&kword; has two separate types of documents:  Text Oriented and Page Layout.  
+Please review <link
+linkend="wp-vs-dtp">The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout Documents</link>, 
+if the differences are still unclear.</para>
+
+<para>This section of the manual is divided into two sub-parts, one for
+<link linkend="wp-page-format">Text Oriented</link>, the other for <link linkend="dtp-page-format">Page Layout</link>.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="wp-page-format">
+<title> Formatting the Page (Text Oriented Document)</title>
+<indexterm><primary>text oriented document</primary><secondary>formatting the page size</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>formatting the page size (text oriented document)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>text oriented document</primary><secondary>formatting the margins</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>formatting the margins (text oriented document)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>headers</primary><secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>footers</primary><secondary>formatting the page</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>When you are working with a Text Oriented Document, you control
+the size and shape of the main frame by setting the paper size and the margins. </para>
+
+<para>Formatting the page is usually done by selecting: <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Page Layout...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+
+<tip>
+<para>You can also go straight to the <guimenuitem>
+Page Layout</guimenuitem> options by selecting the main frame of the document and then double clicking on either of the
+rulers.</para>
+</tip>
+
+<para>A dialog box will appear with three tabs, labeled <guilabel>Page Size &amp; Margins</guilabel>, <guilabel>Columns</guilabel> and <guilabel>Header &amp; and Footer</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Page Size &amp; Margins</guilabel> tab is for altering
+the paper size, and changing the margins.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="wpfmtpg1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>First you will notice, that a preview box appears on the right
+half of this dialog.  This will <emphasis>approximate</emphasis> the
+final look of your document.  It is updated with each change, and should
+be used as a guide for your changes. </para>
+
+<para>On the left, the dialog displays the current unit of measurement.
+This unit of measurement is the same unit of measurement
+you use for your document rulers. (In this example, we are using
+inches.)  To change the units, follow the instructions in the section entitled
+<link linkend="rulers">Using Rulers</link>.</para>
+
+<para>The dialog section labled <guilabel>Page Size</guilabel> is used to specify
+the paper size for the document.  </para>
+<para>&kword; includes many predefined paper sizes.  Select the appropriate paper size with the drop down
+box labeled <guilabel>Size</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>In addition to standard paper sizes, there are two selections that
+deserve special mention.</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Screen</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This format is used to generate a document where
+each page has an <glossterm linkend="defaspectratio">aspect
+ratio</glossterm> (shape) which matches the aspect ratios of computer
+monitors. This might be useful for documents which will never be printed, but will appear only on a computer screen.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Custom</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>You can select this option to specify a unique  paper size.</para>
+<para>Once selected,  two text
+entry boxes (labeled <guilabel>Width:</guilabel> and
+<guilabel>Height:</guilabel>) become active.  Enter the height and width of your desired paper size in these text boxes.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>Below the page size, are two radio boxes in the section labeled
+<guilabel>Orientation</guilabel> you can select either <link
+linkend="defportrait">Portrait</link> or <link
+linkend="deflandscape">Landscape</link> layout for
+your document. </para>
+
+<para>Below the page orientation, is the <guilabel>Margins</guilabel> subsection, which
+consists of 4 spin boxes.</para>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Margins</guilabel> define the
+white-space surrounding the text in your main frame.  You can enter any
+number from 0 to the maximum size of the page in these boxes.  The units
+are the same for all four boxes, and is the same as the measurement
+listed at the top of the dialog.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking on the <guilabel>Columns</guilabel> tab allows you to
+change the number of columns on each page.  Details on multi-column documents
+can be found <link linkend="columns">here</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Clicking on the <guilabel>Header &amp; Footer</guilabel> tab allows the user to
+specify header and footer information. </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="wpfmtpg3.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This dialog can be broken into two major sections.</para>
+
+<para>If you are not familiar with Headers and Footers yet, you should
+first read the section entitled <link
+linkend="headers-and-footers">Headers/Footers</link></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Headers</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>This section lets you determine the placement of headers, and
+which pages have which headers on them.</para>
+
+<para>If you place a mark in front of <guilabel>Different header for the first page</guilabel>, you
+will be able to specify a different format for the header on the first page.</para>
+
+<para>If you place a mark in front of <guilabel>Different header for even and odd pages</guilabel>,
+the even pages will use one header, the odd
+pages use another header. </para>
+<tip><para>You can use this to ensure the page numbers
+are always on the outside of the page, or to list the title of the
+document on odd pages and the chapter number on the even pages.</para></tip>
+
+<para>In the spin box labeled <guilabel>Spacing between header and
+body:</guilabel>, you can specify how much empty space should be placed
+between the bottom of the header, and the top of the main frame.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Footers</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>This section lets you determine the placement of footers, and
+which pages have which footers on them.</para>
+
+<para>If you place a mark in front of <guilabel>Different footer for the first page</guilabel>, you
+will be able to specify a different format for the footer on the first page.</para>
+
+<para>If you place a mark in front of <guilabel>Different footer for even and odd pages</guilabel>,
+the even pages will use one footer, the odd
+pages use another footer.  </para>
+
+<para>In the spin box labeled <guilabel>Spacing between footer and
+body:</guilabel>, you can specify how much empty space should be placed
+between the top of the footer, and the bottom of the main frame.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Footnote/Endnote</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>The bottom spin box is labeled <guilabel>Spacing between footnote and body:</guilabel>.  As the label
+suggests, you can use this text
+box to specify the distance between the bottom edge of the main frame, and the top edge of the footnotes.  For more information on
+footnotes, see the section entitled <link linkend="endnotes-and-footnotes">footnotes</link>. </para>
+
+<para>When you are satisfied with the changes you are ready to make,
+click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para>If you click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, all your changes will
+be ignored.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="dtp-page-format">
+<title> Formatting the Page (Page Layout Document)</title>
+<indexterm><primary>page layout document</primary><secondary>formatting the page size</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>formatting the page size (page layout document)</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>When you are working with a Page Layout Document, you control the
+size and shape of all the frames individually. </para>
+
+<para>Formatting the page is usually done by selecting: <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Page Layout...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para>
+
+<tip>
+<para>You can also go straight to the <guimenuitem>Page 
+Layout</guimenuitem> options by double clicking on either of the
+rulers.</para>
+</tip>
+
+<para>A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<para>The <guilabel>Page Size &amp; Margins</guilabel> tab is for altering
+the paper size, and changing the margins.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="dtpfmtpg1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>First you will notice, that a preview box appears on the right
+half of this dialog.  This will <emphasis>approximate</emphasis> the
+final look of your document.  It is updated with each change, and should
+be used as a guide for your changes. </para>
+
+<para>On the left, the dialog displays the current unit of measurement.
+This unit of measurement is the same unit of measurement
+you use for your document rulers. (In this example, we are using
+inches.)  To change the units, follow the instructions in the section entitled
+<link linkend="rulers">Using Rulers</link>.</para>
+
+<para>The dialog section labled <guilabel>Page Size</guilabel> is used to specify
+the paper size for the document.  </para>
+<para>&kword; includes many predefined paper sizes.  Select the appropriate paper size with the drop down
+box labled <guilabel>Size</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>In addition to standard paper sizes, there are two selections that
+deserve special mention.</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Screen</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This format is used to generate a document where
+each page has an <glossterm linkend="defaspectratio">aspect
+ratio</glossterm> (shape) which matches the aspect ratios of computer
+monitors. This might be useful for documents which will never be printed, but will appear only on a computer screen.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Custom</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>You can select this option to specify a unique  paper size.</para>
+<para>Once selected,  two text
+entry boxes (labeled <guilabel>Width:</guilabel> and
+<guilabel>Height:</guilabel>) become active.  Enter the height and width of your desired paper size in these text boxes.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>Next to the paper format, in the section labeled
+<guilabel>Orientation</guilabel> you can select either <link
+linkend="defportrait">Portrait</link> or <link
+linkend="deflandscape">Landscape</link> layout for
+your document. </para>
+
+<para>Below the page format options, is the <guilabel>Margins</guilabel> subsection, which
+consists of 4 entry boxes. All options in this subsection are disabled in Page Oriented documents.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/paratb.png b/doc/kword/paratb.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cbdd6667c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/paratb.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/part-kformula.png b/doc/kword/part-kformula.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7f38e7bd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/part-kformula.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/part-kspread.png b/doc/kword/part-kspread.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..93fb35034
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/part-kspread.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/picture.png b/doc/kword/picture.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eba247ce7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/picture.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/pntdlg.png b/doc/kword/pntdlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a90d6fc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/pntdlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/pntdlg1.png b/doc/kword/pntdlg1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d70273f03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/pntdlg1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/portrait.png b/doc/kword/portrait.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f1541de9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/portrait.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/rarrow.png b/doc/kword/rarrow.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..11a8ada57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/rarrow.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/rbord.png b/doc/kword/rbord.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..207091661
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/rbord.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/redo.png b/doc/kword/redo.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..934e58716
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/redo.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/repldlg.png b/doc/kword/repldlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2efdfc02a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/repldlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/rowin.png b/doc/kword/rowin.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fefbcd166
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/rowin.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/rowout.png b/doc/kword/rowout.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b82f870f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/rowout.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/rtab.png b/doc/kword/rtab.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8fc40bcfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/rtab.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/rtab2.png b/doc/kword/rtab2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9ce5569f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/rtab2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/ruler.png b/doc/kword/ruler.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e1479538b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/ruler.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/saturation.png b/doc/kword/saturation.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..444758214
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/saturation.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/saved1.png b/doc/kword/saved1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ce392844f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/saved1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/saved2.png b/doc/kword/saved2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..05d9647ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/saved2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/savedlg.png b/doc/kword/savedlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ee5966a6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/savedlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/savetmpl1.png b/doc/kword/savetmpl1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3bfccf0f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/savetmpl1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/scan.png b/doc/kword/scan.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0746bfa49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/scan.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/scan2.png b/doc/kword/scan2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..caec3df8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/scan2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/screen.png b/doc/kword/screen.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e6f199c19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/screen.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/select1.png b/doc/kword/select1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b35002130
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/select1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/spell.png b/doc/kword/spell.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0a3cb23e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/spell.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/spelldlg.png b/doc/kword/spelldlg.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..727b86dd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/spelldlg.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/stkout.png b/doc/kword/stkout.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b7b7e0145
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/stkout.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/storeprint.docbook b/doc/kword/storeprint.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1289f39a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/storeprint.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,476 @@
+<chapter id="store-print">
+<chapterinfo>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</chapterinfo>
+<title>Detailed Guides: Document Creation, Storage, and Printing</title>
+
+<para>This section of the documentation will cover everything you need
+to know about starting a new document, saving a document, retrieving a
+saved document and printing a document.</para> 
+
+<sect1 id="new-doc">
+<title>Beginning a New Document</title>
+<indexterm><primary>create new document</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Starting a new document can be done 5 ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can <link linkend="starting-kword">start &kword; from the
+&kde; Panel</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can <link linkend="starting-kword">start &kword; from the
+command line</link> by typing<screen><prompt>$</prompt><userinput><command>kword &amp;</command></userinput>
+</screen></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can begin a new document in &kword; by selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use the keyboard shortcut: <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>N</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>or by clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="filenew2.png" format="PNG"
+align="center"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on the
+toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>However you begin a new document, a dialog box appears:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="ChooseTempDia.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>This dialog box allows you to:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist spacing="compact">
+<listitem>
+<para><link linkend="new-doc-from-template">Start a new document from a
+template</link></para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para><link linkend="loading-existing-doc">Open an existing
+document</link></para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para><link linkend="loading-recent-doc">Open a recent
+document</link></para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>&kword; remembers your previous choice.  That previous choice will be the current default option.</para>
+
+
+<sect2 id="new-doc-from-template">
+<title>Starting a new document from a template</title>
+
+<para>In order to start a new document based on a template, you must
+first choose which template you want to use.</para>
+
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para>Use the icons located along the left edge of the dialog box to select your template group.  Simply click with the &LMB; to select that group and 
+display all the available templates of that group.</para>
+
+<note>
+<para>Remember templates are either Text Oriented (Blank Document) or Page Layout
+templates. If you need to review the differences, click <link
+linkend="wp-vs-dtp">here</link>.</para>
+</note>
+<para>Once you have selected the icon, you are shown all the available
+templates, each with a title and a small icon which shows you the
+general layout of the template. </para>
+
+<tip>
+<para>&kword; comes with four standard template groups. You can add
+new icons by installing outside templates, or <link linkend="template-creation">creating templates of your
+own</link>.</para>
+</tip></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para>To select your template, click on it with the &LMB;.  The
+selected template will be highlighted.</para></listitem>  
+<listitem><para>Confirm your choice by clicking
+the <guibutton>Use This Template</guibutton> button. This will begin a new document
+with that template.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+<tip>
+<para>For faster access to a template, simply double click on the
+template, and &kword; will immediately load that template.</para>
+</tip>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="loading-existing-doc">
+<title>Opening an existing document</title>
+
+<para>Click on the <guibutton>Open Existing Document...</guibutton> button, and an new
+dialog box is revealed.  For more details on this dialog box refer to
+<link linkend="file-dialog">Using the file selection dialog</link>.</para>
+
+<sect3 id="loading-recent-doc">
+<title>Open a Recent Document</title>
+<para>&kword; keeps track of the most recently edited documents.  You can select one of these documents by clicking on the icon labeled 
+<guilabel>Recent Documents</guilabel>. This will list the most recently edited files on the system.  Simply click on the icon of the desired file with the 
+&LMB; and click <guibutton>Open This Document</guibutton>.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+
+
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="saving">
+<title>Saving a Document</title>
+<indexterm><primary>saving a document</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Once you have entered text and data into a document, you will
+usually want to save this to a file on your hard drive.</para>
+
+<tip><para>&kword; can create a <literal role="extension">.pdf</literal> file for you.  For instructions see 
+<link linkend="qd-pdf">How do I create a <literal role="extension">.pdf</literal> file?</link></para></tip>
+
+<sect2 id="command-save">
+
+<title>The <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem> Command</title>
+<para>The <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem> command can be invoked 3 ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the Menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use the keyboard shortcut: <keycombo
+action="simul">&Ctrl;<keycap>S</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>or by clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="filefloppy.png"
+format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>Any of these methods results in the same action by &kword;.</para>
+
+<important><para>By selecting the <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem> command, you are
+instructing &kword; to save the file under the current filename. You
+will not be given the option to change the filename or its location. If
+you want to change the name of the file, or where it is saved, you must
+select <link linkend="command-save-as"><menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Save
+As...</guimenuitem></menuchoice></link> from the Menubar.</para></important>
+
+<para>If you have not saved this file before, it does not have a
+filename.  &kword; automatically executes the <link
+linkend="command-save-as"><guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem></link>
+command so you can provide a file name. </para>
+
+<para>&kword; does not report a successful save.  Therefore, if the file
+was saved without incident, &kword; will return you to editing your
+document.</para>
+
+<para>You can verify that the file was saved, by checking the titlebar.  
+If there are unsaved changes, the titlebar will have
+<emphasis>[modified]</emphasis> in the titlebar.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="saved2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+<!--<caption><para>The document still has unsaved changes</para></caption>-->
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+  <para>If the save was
+successful, only the filename will be in the titlebar.  If there is a
+problem with the save, an error box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="saved1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+<!--<caption><para>Saved Successfully</para></caption>-->
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="command-save-as">
+<title>The <guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem> Command</title>
+<indexterm><primary>saving a document with new name</primary></indexterm>
+<sect3 id="command-save-as-general">
+<title>General</title>
+<para>The <guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem> command can be invoked 2
+ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice> <guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Save
+As...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the Menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>or by trying to <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem> a file which does
+not yet have a filename.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<important><para>The difference between the <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem> and the
+<guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem> command, is the <guimenuitem>Save
+As...</guimenuitem> command prompts you for a filename, and lets you
+select a different file format or location.  The
+<guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem> command simply saves the file in the
+previous location.</para></important>
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="command-save-as-dlg">
+<title>Using the dialog box</title>
+
+<para>When you select <guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem> a dialog appears.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="savedlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>For more information on using this dialog, see the section entitled
+<link linkend="file-dialog">Using the file selection dialog</link>.</para>
+
+<para>When you are in the folder you want to save the file in, type a filename into the
+<guilabel>Location:</guilabel> box.</para>
+<tip><para>&kword; can create a <literal role="extension">.pdf</literal> file for you.  For instructions see 
+<link linkend="qd-pdf">How do I create a <literal role="extension">.pdf</literal> file</link>.</para></tip>
+
+<tip><para> There is no need to put a <literal
+role="extension">.kwd</literal> at the end of your filename, &kword;
+will do this for you.</para></tip>
+
+<note>
+<para>&UNIX; filenames are more flexible than many other operating
+systems.  Filenames can:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist spacing="compact">
+<listitem><para>be of nearly any length</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>be any combination of upper and lowercase letters</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>include spaces and punctuation</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>Filenames should not:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist spacing="compact">
+
+<listitem><para>begin with a space or period</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>end with a common file extension (<literal
+role="extension">.ps</literal>,<literal
+role="extension">.pdf</literal>,etc). </para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+</note>
+
+<para>Once you have entered the correct information you can click on
+<guibutton>Save</guibutton> to complete the save.</para>
+
+<para>&kword; does not report a successful save.  Therefore, if the file
+was saved without incident, &kword; will return you to editing your
+document.  If there is a problem with the save, an error box will
+appear.</para>
+
+<note>
+<para>&kword; will only allow you to save your file where you are
+allowed to by the permissions listed by the operating system. If you try
+to save outside that area, &kword; will report an error.</para>
+</note>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="loading">
+<title>Retrieving a Saved Document</title>
+<indexterm><primary>loading a &kword; file</primary></indexterm>
+<para>
+The <guimenuitem>Open...</guimenuitem> command can be invoked 4 ways:
+</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By clicking the <guilabel>Open Existing Document</guilabel>
+tab when <link
+linkend="new-doc">Opening a New Document</link></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Open...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use the keyboard shortcut:
+<keycombo>&Ctrl;<keycap>O</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>or by clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="fileopen.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+on the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>Any of these methods results in the same action by &kword;.</para>
+<sect2 id="command-open-dlg">
+<title>Using the dialog box</title>
+<para>When trying to open a file, a dialog appears.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="opendlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>For more information on using this dialog, see the section entitled
+<link linkend="file-dialog">Using the file dialog</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Use this dialog to locate the document you want to load.  Once located, click
+once with the &LMB; on the filename. Once the filename is selected click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.  The file will be loaded.</para>
+
+<para>There is a <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button, if you click this
+button, the load will be aborted.</para>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="printing">
+<title>Printing A Document</title>
+<indexterm><primary>printing a document</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <guimenuitem>Print...</guimenuitem> command can be invoked 3 ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>By selecting <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>You can use the keyboard shortcut:
+<keycombo>&Ctrl;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo></para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>or by clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="fileprint.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+on the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>No matter how you do this, the &kde; print dialog will
+appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="pntdlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The top combo box labeled <guilabel>Name:</guilabel> shows the
+currently selected printer.  To configure this printer click on the
+<guibutton>Properties</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+<para>To select a different printer, click on the combo box and
+select the desired printer.</para>
+
+<para>If you want to print your output into a postscript file, to a PDF file, 
+a fax modem (to send it as a fax) or email the file as a PDF file, select
+the appropriate option from the combo box labeled <guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Once that option has been selected, enter
+the filename into the text box labled <guilabel>Output file:</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>The line labled <guilabel>State</guilabel> tells you if your printer is currently connected and if it is printing another page. You can not change any information on this line.</para>
+
+<para>The lines labled <guilabel>Type</guilabel> and <guilabel>Location</guilabel> tells you what type of printer is currently selected and where that printer is located. You can not change any information on these lines.</para>
+
+
+
+<para>The line labled <guilabel>Comment</guilabel> describes how
+&kword; interacts with your computer (what driver and print system it is using). You can not change anything on this line.  Complete setup of the &kde;
+printing system is beyond the scope of this document.  For more information see the &kde; 
+print web site at <ulink url="http://printing.kde.org">http://printing.kde.org</ulink>.</para>
+
+<para>If you want to print all pages of your document and only one copy, you can click 
+<guibutton>Print</guibutton>.  If you want to change the number of copies or only print selected
+pages, click the <guibutton>Options &gt;&gt;</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+<note><para>The <guibutton>System Options</guibutton> button allows a user to change the setup of the printers and &kde; print system.  This is also beyond the scope of this manual.  
+If you need to make changes please refer to the &kde; print web site at <ulink url="http://printing.kde.org">http://printing.kde.org</ulink>.</para></note>
+
+<note><para>Depending on which printing system your computer uses, you may find that you have 
+more printing options then those described below.  What is described here, is available on 
+<emphasis>most</emphasis> systems.</para></note>
+
+<para>Once you click <guibutton>Options &gt;&gt;</guibutton>, the dialog box changes to:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="pntdlg1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Under <guilabel>Page Selection</guilabel>, you can select either
+to print the whole document (select <guilabel>All</guilabel>), print the page the cursor is
+located on (simply select <guilabel>Current</guilabel>), or print a range of pages.  If you select the
+<guilabel>Range</guilabel> option, enter your page range in the text box
+provided. (Example:  3-13)</para>
+
+<para>In the combo box labeled <guilabel>Page set:</guilabel> you can tell &kword; to
+print the <guilabel>Even Pages</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Odd Pages</guilabel> or 
+<guilabel>All Pages</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<para>In the box on the right labeled <guilabel>Copies:</guilabel>, you should set the number of copies
+you want printed.  You can either enter the number directly into the
+box, or use the arrows to adjust the number. &kword; can print a maximum
+of 999 copies at once.</para>
+
+<para>You can have &kde; collate your documents by clicking on the
+<guilabel>Collate</guilabel> check box.  If selected, &kde; will print
+all of the pages for copy 1, then print all the pages for copy 2, &etc;
+If not selected, &kde; will print all of the copies of the first page,
+then all of the copies of the second page, &etc;</para>
+
+<para>You can also determine if the document is printed in forward order
+(print first page first), or reverse order (print last page
+first).</para>
+
+<para>If you click on <guibutton>Options &lt;&lt;</guibutton>, the print dialog will
+compress down to the previous view.</para>
+
+<note><para>Depending on your systems setup, you may have additional options available to you.  These options are discussed at <ulink url="http://printing.kde.org">http://printing.kde.org</ulink>.</para></note>
+
+<para>When you are satisfied with your selections, you can click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to print.</para>
+
+<para>If you click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, the printing will
+be aborted.</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+</chapter>    
diff --git a/doc/kword/styldlg1.png b/doc/kword/styldlg1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8b8d13948
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/styldlg1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/styleimport.png b/doc/kword/styleimport.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..80e10f42c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/styleimport.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/styles.docbook b/doc/kword/styles.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3f0043a65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/styles.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,351 @@
+<sect1 id="styles">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Text styles</title>
+<indexterm><primary>text styles</primary><secondary>introduction</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<sect2 id="style-intro"><title>Introduction to text styles</title>
+<para>When you build documents that are more complex than a business
+letter, such as a book, newsletter, or resume, the document is often
+broken down into sections.  Each of these sections may have a similar
+appearance.  </para>
+
+<para>You can use text styles to easily keep a consistent look throughout
+your document.</para>
+
+<tip>
+<para>If you are familiar with Styles in &Microsoft;
+<application>Word</application>, &kword; text styles perform similar functions in &kword;. 
+You can <link linkend="style-select">skip to the next section</link>.</para>
+</tip>
+
+<para>Lets look at a section of a document and try to identify appropriate text styles:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="textstyex.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>In this example, you can see several different text styles at work:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>The title is centered, underlined and in bold text</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>The section title (Income) is boldfaced.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>The caption for figure 1-1 is smaller than normal text and boldface.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>The rest of the document is in a standard font.</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+
+<para>We do not need to know exactly how we want the text and paragraphs
+of these sections to look yet.  All we need to do is identify these
+sections of text as <quote>Section Titles</quote>, <quote>Normal
+Text</quote>, etc.</para>
+
+<para>Once we have finished the document, you can change the look of all
+the text labeled <quote>Section Title</quote> all at once.  </para>
+
+<para>This will ensure that all section titles appear consistent
+throughout your document.</para>
+
+<para>&kword; has 8 predefined text styles.</para>
+
+<note><para>Text styles should not be confused with <link linkend="tablestyle">table styles</link> or
+<link linkend="framestyles">frame styles</link>.</para>
+<para>Text styles determine how the characters and paragraphs appear.  Framestyles, control the borders and background color for the
+frame.  Tablestyles determine how tables appear in the finished document.</para></note>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="style-select">
+<title>Changing the text style of text</title>
+<indexterm><primary>text styles</primary><secondary>changing text style of selected text</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To change the text style of text, first, <link linkend="select">select
+the text</link> you want the changes to apply to.</para>
+
+<para>You can now change the text style in one of two ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guisubmenu>Style</guisubmenu></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.  This will show the list of available text styles, select
+the text style from the list.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>You can select the text style using the combo box on the <link linkend="paragraph-toolbar">Paragraph toolbar</link>.  
+This combo box looks like this: <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="chstylebut.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>Simply select the new text style from the list provided.</para>
+
+<tip><para>You can change the text style of an entire paragraph.  Simply place the cursor in a paragraph (making sure that 
+no characters are selected) and select a new style.  Every character in the paragraph will be converted to the new text style.</para></tip>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="style-add">
+<title>Creating a text style</title>
+<indexterm><primary>text styles</primary><secondary>creating</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>If you plan on using text styles extensively in a large document, you
+will probably want to create new text styles specific for your needs.
+</para>
+
+<para>There are two ways to create a new text style:</para>
+
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="style-add-dialog">Create a text style based on another text style using a dialog</link>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="style-add-text">Format a block of text to the desired format,
+then create a text style based on that text</link>.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+
+<sect3 id="style-add-dialog">
+<title>Creating a new text style based on a current text style</title>
+<para>To create a new text style select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para><para>This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="styldlg1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>In the list box on the left, is a list of all the currently defined text styles.  Select the current style that most closely resembles the new
+text style.  Click on that text style once with the &LMB;.</para>
+
+<para>Click the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+<para>&kword; will create a new text style based on the selected text style.  It will assign it a temporary name [New Style Template (8)].</para>
+
+<para>Type a descriptive name in the box labeled
+<guilabel>Name</guilabel>.  This will be the name of the text style.</para>
+
+<para>The rest of the dialog is used to make the alterations needed to create the new
+text style.</para>
+
+<para>The preview box will show you what your new text style will look
+like.</para>
+
+<para>Use the tabs labeled <link linkend="style-font">Font</link>,
+<link
+linkend="style-space">Indent &amp; Spacing</link>, <link
+linkend="style-align">General Layout</link>, <link
+linkend="style-borders">Decorations</link>, <link
+linkend="style-numbering">Bullets/Numbers</link>, and <link
+linkend="style-tabulators">Tabulators</link>, to format the text style.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to create your new text style.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort the creation of the
+text style.</para>
+
+<sect4 id="style-font">
+<title>Changing the Font Size, Type etc.</title>
+
+<para>The tab labeled <guilabel>Font</guilabel> is used to set the font type, font style, formatting, etc.</para>
+
+<para>This tab functions identically to the <link linkend="change-font-dialog">change font dialog</link> used to edit general text.
+Changes to this tab affect to
+all text formated with this text style.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4 id="style-space">
+<title>Changing Paragraph Spacing and Indents</title>
+
+<para>The tab labeled <guilabel>Indents &amp; Spacing</guilabel> is used to adjust
+spacing between lines, and paragraph indentation.</para>
+
+<para>This tab functions identically to the same tab in the <link linkend="indents-and-spaces">Format Paragraph</link> dialog.
+Changes to this tab affect to
+all text formated with this text style.</para>
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4 id="style-align">
+<title>Changing Paragraph Alignment</title>
+
+<para>The tab labeled <guilabel>General Layout</guilabel> determines how the text is placed <emphasis>within
+the line</emphasis>.  With other applications, you may have referred to
+this as <emphasis>Alignment</emphasis>, or
+<emphasis>Justification</emphasis>.</para>
+
+<para>This tab functions identically to the same tab in the <link linkend="para-aligns">Format Paragraph</link> dialog.
+Changes to this tab affect to
+all text formated with this text style.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4 id="style-borders">
+<title>Changing Paragraph Borders</title>
+
+<para>The tab labeled <guilabel>Decorations</guilabel> is used to define and configure graphical borders
+around your paragraphs.</para>
+
+<para>This tab functions identically to the same tab in the <link linkend="para-borders">Format Paragraph</link> dialog.
+Changes to this tab affect to
+all text formated with this text style.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4 id="style-numbering">
+<title>Changing Paragraph Numbering/Bullets</title>
+
+<para>The tab labeled <guilabel>Bullets/Numbers</guilabel> is used to make all text formatted with this text style into a list.</para>
+
+<para>This tab functions identically to the same tab in the <link linkend="para-bullets-and-numbers">Format Paragraph</link> dialog.
+For more information see the section entitled <link linkend="lists">Lists</link>.</para>
+
+
+</sect4>
+
+<sect4 id="style-tabulators">
+<title>Changing Tab-stops.</title>
+
+<para>Using the tab labeled <guilabel>Tabulators</guilabel> it is possible to define tab stops for the new text style.</para>
+
+<para>This tab functions identically to the same tab in the <link linkend="tab-stop-setting-dialog">Format Paragraph</link> dialog.
+For more information see the section entitled <link linkend="tab-stops">Using Tab Stops</link>.</para>
+
+</sect4>
+
+</sect3>
+<sect3 id="style-add-text">
+<title>Creating a text style based on formatted text</title>
+<para>If you have text that is already formatted correctly for a new text style:</para>
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem><para>Select the text and select
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Create Style From Selection...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para></listitem>
+
+<listitem><para>&kword; will prompt you for a name for your text style.  Enter the name in the text box.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Click the 
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button.</para></listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+<para>  A new text style is created with the font, paragraph spacing, paragraph alignment, borders and shadows of the
+currently selected text.</para>
+<note><para>Future formatting changes to this selected text will not automatically change the text style you just created.  If you want the changes
+to become part of the text style, you must <link linkend="style-edit">edit the text style</link>.</para></note>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="style-deleting">
+<title>Deleting a text style</title>
+<indexterm><primary>text styles</primary><secondary>deleting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Deleting an unneeded text style is easy.</para>
+
+
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para><para>This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="styldlg1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>From the list of available text styles, select the style you want to
+delete by clicking once with the &LMB;.</para>
+
+<warning>
+<para>Be sure you have selected the correct text style before you click
+<guibutton>Delete</guibutton>.  &kword; will not ask for confirmation,
+so you will not be given an opportunity to back out.</para>
+</warning>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Delete</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>The text style is now deleted.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="style-edit">
+<title>Editing a text style</title>
+<indexterm><primary>text styles</primary><secondary>editing</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The true power of text styles, is the ability to edit the formatting
+options of that text style <emphasis>after</emphasis> the text style is defined.  
+By changing the formatting of the text style, &kword; will immediately change
+every paragraph with that text style, and maintain a consistent look to
+the document.</para>
+
+<para>&kword; uses the same interfaces to edit the formatting options of a
+text style, that it used to create the text style in the first
+place.</para>
+
+<para>To edit a current text style:</para>
+
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para><para>This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="styldlg1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Select the text style you want to edit from the list on the left by clicking once with the &LMB;.
+Now you can make the changes you want to this text style.</para>
+
+<para>The preview box will show you what your new text style will look
+like.</para>
+
+<warning>
+<para>Do not change the name of your text style.</para>
+
+<para>Doing so will delete your current text style from the list (and create
+a new one with the new name).</para>
+
+<para>Any paragraphs which were originally formatted with this text style,
+will revert to <quote>Standard</quote>.</para>
+</warning>
+
+<para>Use the tabs labeled <link linkend="style-font">Font</link>,
+<link
+linkend="style-space">Indent &amp; Spacing</link>, <link
+linkend="style-align">General Layout</link>, <link
+linkend="style-borders">Decorations</link>, <link
+linkend="style-numbering">Bullets/Numbers</link>, and <link
+linkend="style-tabulators">Tabulators</link> to alter the look of  the text style.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to commit your changes.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort all changes to this
+text style.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="style-import">
+<title>Import a text style</title>
+<indexterm><primary>text styles</primary><secondary>importing</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has the ability to import a text style from one &kword; document and include it in the 
+list of text text styles in another &kword; document.</para>
+<para>To import a text style, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Import Style...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.</para><para>This will bring up an empty dialog box.</para>
+<para>Click on the <guibutton>Load</guibutton> button.  This will bring up a 
+<link linkend="file-dialog">file selection dialog</link>.  Choose the &kword; file you want to import the text style from and click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>The dialog box will now fill with all available text text styles available for import.</para>
+<tip><para>If &kword; encounters a duplicate text style name in the selected file, it will append a number to the end of the
+text style name to identify the imported style.</para>
+<para>As an example, if you import the <emphasis>Standard</emphasis> text style from another &kword; file, &kword; will change
+the text style name to <emphasis>Standard-1</emphasis>.</para></tip>
+<para>Select <emphasis>all</emphasis> the text style you want to import.  Then click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/subscbut.png b/doc/kword/subscbut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6d0e55ce7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/subscbut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/sum.png b/doc/kword/sum.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..440c6a952
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/sum.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/supscbut.png b/doc/kword/supscbut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..043100660
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/supscbut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/table.docbook b/doc/kword/table.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..55faf3295
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/table.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,653 @@
+<sect1 id="tables">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Tables</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>using</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has the built in ability to generate tables for the display of data.</para>
+
+<para>These tables can consist of up to 128 rows and 128 columns,
+with text centered or justified differently in different cells.  Text flows easily around in the 
+table and cells are resized (if specified by the user) automatically to fit comfortably around the data.</para>
+
+<para>Tables in &kword; are for the display of data only.  No calculations can be performed.</para>
+
+<tip><para>Remember, if you need the functions of a spreadsheet, you can <link
+linkend="kparts">embed a &kspread; Table</link> in your
+document.</para></tip>
+
+<para>This section of the document will cover the formatting of tables
+<emphasis>created in &kword;</emphasis> only.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="table-new"><title>Adding a new Table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>adding</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can create a table in &kword; in one of three ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Insert</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Table...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem> 
+<para>You can use the keyboard shortcut: <keycombo
+action="simul"><keycap>F5</keycap></keycombo>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>or by clicking <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="part-kspread.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>
+on the toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>This will open a dialog box.  The dialog box has two tabs:  <guilabel>Geometry</guilabel> and <guilabel>Templates</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="instab1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This dialog box is divided into two halves.</para>
+
+<para>The right half of the dialog box provides you a quick visual guide
+to how many rows and columns will be created in the table.  This is
+useful for laying out your table.  You cannot edit
+your table layout here.</para>
+
+<para>The left half of the dialog box consists of two combo boxes.</para>
+
+<para>The spin box labeled <guilabel>Number of
+rows:</guilabel>, allows you to specify from 1 to 128 rows in the
+table.</para>
+
+<para>The spin box labeled <guilabel>Number of
+columns:</guilabel>, allows you to specify from 1 to 128 columns in the
+table.</para>
+
+<para>While adjusting either of these two options, the preview box
+adjusts to your new settings.</para>
+
+
+<para>If you click on the tab labeled <guilabel>Templates</guilabel>, you can use predefined table looks to format the look of your table.  
+For more information see the section on <link linkend="table-templates">Using formatting templates</link>.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to insert the table.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to cancel this action and return to editing your document.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-navigation">
+<title>Moving between cells in a table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>navigating</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can navigate between cells of the table by using the mouse (simply click in the cell you want to edit),
+or by using the keyboard (use the arrow keys to move up, down, left or right one cell at a time).</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="table-delete">
+<title>Deleting a Table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>deleting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To delete a table in &kword;:</para>
+
+<para>Place the mouse pointer over the frame of any cell of the table you want to
+delete and click once with the &LMB;. </para>
+<warning>
+<para>Be sure you have selected the correct table before continuing.
+&kword; will not ask for confirmation.</para>
+</warning>
+
+<para>Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Delete
+Table</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar</para>
+
+
+<para>The table will be immediately deleted.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-insert-row">
+<title>Insert Row in Table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>inserting a row</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can insert a row into any place in a table.</para>
+
+<para>To insert a row into a table, place the mouse pointer over the border of any cell of the table you want to add
+a row to.  Using your mouse, select either <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu>
+<guisubmenu>Row</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Insert Row...</guimenuitem>
+</menuchoice> from the menubar or 
+click <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="rowin.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on the
+toolbar.</para>
+
+
+<para>This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="insrowdlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The spin box labeled <guilabel>Row:</guilabel>, allows
+you to select any row within the table.  This number selection box
+limits you to the rows currently in the table.</para>
+<para>Select the row you want to use as a reference.</para>
+
+<para>Now select either <guilabel>Before</guilabel> or
+<guilabel>After</guilabel> as is appropriate.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to add the row or click
+<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to not add any rows.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-insert-column">
+<title>Insert Column in Table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>inserting a column</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To insert a column into a table, place the mouse pointer over the border of any cell of the table you want to add
+a column to.  Select either <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Column</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Insert Column...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar or click 
+<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="colin.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on the
+toolbar.</para>
+
+<para>This will bring up a dialog box.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="inscoldlg.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>The number selection box labeled <guilabel>Column:</guilabel>,
+allows you to select any column within the table.  This number selection
+box limits you to the columns currently in the table.</para>
+
+<para>Select the column you want to use as a reference.</para>
+
+<para>Now select either <guilabel>Before</guilabel> or
+<guilabel>After</guilabel> as is appropriate.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to add the column or click
+<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to not add any columns.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-delete-row">
+<title>Delete Row in Table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>deleting a row</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To delete a row from a table:</para>
+
+<para>Click once with the &LMB; in any cell in the row you want to delete  Then:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Row</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Delete Selected
+Rows...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>or click <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="rowout.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on the
+toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>This will bring up a dialog box confirming that your have selected the correct row(s).</para>
+
+<warning>
+<para>Make sure you have selected the correct row(s) before
+continuing.</para>
+<para>&kword; will delete any data contained within the selected rows.</para>
+</warning>
+<para>Click <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> to delete the row, or click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to not
+delete any rows.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-delete-column">
+<title>Delete Column in Table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>deleting a column</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To delete a column from a table:</para>
+
+<para>Click once with the &LMB; in any cell in the column you want to delete  Then:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para>select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Column</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Delete Selected
+Columns...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>or click <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata
+fileref="colout.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> on the
+toolbar.</para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>This will bring up a dialog box confirming that your have selected the correct column(s).</para>
+
+
+<warning>
+<para>Make sure you have selected the correct column(s) before
+continuing.</para>
+<para>&kword; will delete any data contained within these columns.</para>
+</warning>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> to delete the column(s), or click
+<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to not delete any columns.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-resize-column">
+<title>Change column width</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>change column width</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>When a table is created, all columns are equal in width.  You can change the width of individual columns by using
+<link linkend="table-resize-column-mouse">the mouse</link> or <link linkend="table-resize-column-dialog">the keyboard</link>.</para>
+<sect3 id="table-resize-column-mouse"><title>Using the mouse</title>
+<para>First select any cell in the column you want to change, by holding down the &Ctrl; key and clicking once with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>The cell is now surrounded by 8 colored boxes.  Place the mouse over the box in the middle of the
+right vertical border of the cell.  The mouse pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.  Click on the box and drag the right edge of the
+cell to the desired width.  When you release the &LMB;, the entire column will assume the width of this cell.</para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="table-resize-column-dialog"><title>Using the dialog box</title>
+<para>First, select any cell in the column you want to change, by holding down the &Ctrl; key and clicking once with the &LMB;.</para>
+<tip><para>You can select any cell in the table to change column widths.  By selecting a cell in the column you want to change 
+the dialog box will default to the correct column automatically.</para></tip>
+<para>Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Column</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Resize
+Column...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+<para>A dialog box will appear.  In the spin box labeled <guilabel>Column:</guilabel>, you can chose a different column to set.  
+In the spin box labeled <guilabel>Width:</guilabel>, enter the desired width of the column.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to change the width, or click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to leave the column 
+width unchanged.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-join-cells">
+<title>Join Cells in Table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>join cells</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A table is traditionally made of a grid of rows and columns, with
+equal sized cells throughout the table.</para>
+
+<para>Sometimes you would like to spread text out over several cells in
+a table.  This is especially common with titles.</para>
+
+<para>&kword; allows you to do this by <emphasis>Joining</emphasis> two (or
+more) adjacent cells of a table together.</para> 
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="joincell.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This is an example of three cells joined together in the middle of
+a table.</para>
+
+<tip>
+<para>You can join cells vertically, as well as horizontally.</para>
+</tip>
+
+<para>To join several cells you must first select the cells.  To select the cells, hold down the &Ctrl; key 
+and click once with the &LMB;
+in a cell. Click on the next cell with the &LMB;.  Continue
+this until you have selected all the cells you want to join together.</para>
+
+<tip>
+<para>If you have a number of cells in a row that you want to select,
+you can select them in two quick steps:</para>
+<para>First hold down the &Ctrl; key and click on one of the end cells.</para>
+<para>Now hold down the &Shift; key and click on the cell at the other
+end of the row or column you want to join.</para>
+<para>All cells between these two cells will be selected.</para>
+</tip>
+
+
+<para>Once you have selected all the cells you want to join,
+select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Cell</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Join Cells</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar</para>
+
+<para>The cells will now be joined.</para>
+
+<para>Any text in the left most frame will now be located in the joined
+frame.  Any text from any other frames will be deleted.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-split-cells">
+<title>Split Cells in Table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>split cells</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>In addition to combining two or more cells into a single cell, it is easy to split one cell into many cells.</para>
+
+<para>If you decide that you do not want the previously joined cells to
+be joined any longer, you can <quote>split</quote> them back into individual cells
+again. You can also split cells within a column or row. They do not need 
+to have been previously joined.</para>
+
+<para>To split a cell, select the cell you want to split by holding the &Ctrl; button down and
+clicking on it with the
+&LMB;.  Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Cell</guisubmenu>
+<guimenuitem>Split Cell...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+
+<para>This will bring up a small dialog box which allows you to set the number of rows and 
+the number of columns you want to split this cell into.</para>
+
+<para>Once you have set the correct number of rows and columns in the spin boxes, click 
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to split the cells.  Click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-ungroup">
+<title>Ungroup a Table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>ungrouping</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>If you select a cell in a table and then choose <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Ungroup Table</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar, &kword; will convert each cell in your table
+into an individual frame.  You can then move these frames around independently on the page.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-protect">
+<title>Protecting a cell in a table.</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>protecting cells</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can protect any or all cells in a table from accidental modification or deletion.</para>
+<para>Simply select the cell(s) you want to protect, then:</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu>
+<guisubmenu>Cell</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Protect Cells</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar or hold down the &Ctrl; button, click in the cell once with the &RMB; and select
+<menuchoice> <guimenuitem>Cell</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Protect Cells</guimenuitem></menuchoice> 
+from the popup menu.</para>
+<para>You will not be able to change the contents or formatting of that cell.</para>
+
+<note><para>To disable the protection, simply repeat the steps above, and the cells will no longer be protected.</para></note>
+
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="table-format">
+<title>Formating a Table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>formating</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are many aspects of a table that can be formatted.</para>
+
+<para>For information of formatting text with a table see <link linkend="change-font">Format characters</link>.</para>
+<para>For information on formatting borders between frames in individual cells, see <link linkend="para-borders">Borders</link></para>
+<para>For information on formatting background color of individual cells, see <link linkend="format-frame-background">Frame background</link></para>
+<para>For information on changing the width of columns, see <link linkend="table-resize-column">Resizing Columns</link></para>
+
+<para>&kword; also provides the user with a set of tools to help speed up the formatting of tables.</para>
+
+<sect3 id="table-geometry">
+<title>Altering the number of rows and columns in a table.</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>changing geometry</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Previously in the manual, we have discussed how to individually add or delete rows and/or columns.  &kword; also provides the 
+user the ability to make major changes to the number of rows and columns in a table.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Properties...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="tableprop1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>You can use this dialog to change the number of rows in your table by using the spin box labeled
+<guilabel>Number of rows:</guilabel>.</para>
+<warning><para>If you reduce the number of rows using this dialog box, &kword; will delete the bottom row(s)
+<emphasis>including the data within the rows</emphasis>.</para><para>Be sure you do not have any data in these rows 
+that you need to preserve.</para></warning>
+<para>You can use this dialog to change the number of columns in your table by using the spin box labeled
+<guilabel>Number of columns:</guilabel>.</para>
+<warning><para>If you reduce the number of columns using this dialog box, &kword; will delete the right most column(s)
+<emphasis>including the data within the columns</emphasis>.</para><para>Be sure you do not have any data in these columns
+that you need to preserve.</para></warning>
+<para>Placing a mark in the check box labeled <guilabel>Reapply template to table</guilabel>, will cause &kword; to re-apply the
+template to the table <emphasis>after adding or deleting the specified number of rows and/or columns</emphasis>.</para>
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to make changes permenant, or click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort all
+changes.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="table-format-selcol">
+<title>Selecting an entire column for formatting</title>
+<para>To select an entire column for formatting, move the mouse pointer to the white space directly <emphasis>above</emphasis>
+the desired column. The mouse pointer will turn from an arrow to a hand.  If you click with the &LMB;, the entire column will be selected. </para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="table-format-selrow">
+<title>Selecting an entire row for formatting</title>
+<para>To select an entire row for formatting, move the mouse pointer to the white space directly <emphasis>to the left</emphasis> of
+the desired row. The mouse pointer will turn from an arrow to a hand.  If you click with the &LMB;, the entire row will be selected. </para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="table-templates">
+<title>Using table templates to format an entire table</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>templates</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; has templates for many commonly used table formatting options.  Table templates provide 
+the same formatting functionality for tables that
+document templates provide you for formating your documents.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Table</guimenu>
+<guimenuitem>Properties...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog will appear.  Click on the tab labeled <guilabel>Templates</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="tableprop2.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Along the left of the dialog box, is a list of table templates.</para>
+
+<para>On the right is a preview box that
+gives an example of what a table template will look like when applied to your table.</para>
+
+<para>Below the preview box, are 5 check boxes.</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>First row</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This check box will toggle formatting of all cells in the top row.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Last row</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This check box will toggle formatting of all cells in the bottom row.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Body</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This check box will toggle formatting of all cells in the body.  The body of the table is any cells which are not formatted 
+by any of the other four options.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>First column</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This check box will toggle formatting of all cells in the left column.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><guilabel>Last column</guilabel></term>
+<listitem><para>This check box will toggle formatting of all cells in the right column.</para></listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<!--<para>The <guibutton>Customize</guibutton> is currently disabled, but will be available in future versions of &kword;.</para>-->
+
+<para>Placing a mark in the check box labeled <guilabel>Reapply template to table</guilabel>, will cause &kword; to re-apply the
+template to the table <emphasis>after adding or deleting the specified number of rows and/or columns</emphasis>.</para>
+
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to make changes permenant, or click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to abort all
+changes.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="tablestyle">
+<title>Using table styles</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tables</primary><secondary>styles</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>table styles</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Table styles are a rapid way for you to format individual cells of your table to common formats.  You can add or remove
+table styles, and change predefined table styles to suit your needs. A table style consists of a frame style and a text style
+which are grouped together and named.</para>
+<sect3 id="tablestyle-use">
+<title>Formatting a cell with a table styles</title>
+<indexterm><primary>table styles</primary><secondary>formatting a cell with</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To format a cell using a predefined table style simply:</para>
+<para>Select the cell(s) by holding down &Ctrl; and clicking within the cell with the &LMB;.  You can also 
+<link linkend="table-format-selcol">select columns</link> and <link linkend="table-format-selrow">rows</link>.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guisubmenu>Tablestyle</guisubmenu></menuchoice>
+from the menubar.  A submenu will appear, listing all the currently defined table styles.  Select the name of the table style
+you want and all selected cells will automatically be formatting using the options of that table style.</para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="tablestyle-edit">
+<title>Editing a table style</title>
+<indexterm><primary>table styles</primary><secondary>editing</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To change the options of a table style, you will use the Table Style Manager.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Table Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="tablestylist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>All of the currently defined table styles are listed in the listbox on the left.  The currently selected table style is highlighted, and
+the name of the currently selected table style is listed in the text box labeled <guilabel>Name</guilabel>. (In this example,
+the currently selected table style is <emphasis>Header 1</emphasis>.)</para>
+<para>Select the name of the table style you want to change by clicking on the name of the table style in the listbox on the left.</para>
+
+<para>In the section labeled <guilabel>Adjust</guilabel> is a combo box labeled <guilabel>Framestyle</guilabel> which is used to select the desired frame style.
+If you want to add or alter a frame style, click the <guilabel>Change...</guilabel> button, and you will be taken to the
+<link linkend="framestyle-edit">Framestylist</link> to make those changes.</para>
+<para>Below that, is a combo box labeled <guilabel>Textstyle:</guilabel> which is used to select the desired text style for this table style.
+If you want to add or alter a text style, click on the <guilabel>Change...</guilabel> button, and you will be taken directly to the 
+<link linkend="style-add-dialog">Stylelist</link> to make those changes.</para>
+
+<para>Once all changes have been made, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to save your changes. All of the affected table styles will
+be changed to reflect the new options.</para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="tablestyle-add">
+<title>Creating a new table style</title>
+<indexterm><primary>table styles</primary><secondary>creating</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To create a new table style, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Table Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="tablestylist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>Select a table style from the list at the left which most closely matches your new desired table style.
+The selected table style will be used as a template for the new table style.  Select the table style by clicking
+once with the &LMB; in the list on the left.</para>
+<para>Click on the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button.  &kword; will generate a new table style, which is a copy
+of the previously selected table style.</para>
+<para>Choose a name for your new table style, and type it in the text box labeled <guilabel>Name</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>You can now change your table style options to customize your newly created table style.  For details, see
+<link linkend="tablestyle-edit">Editing a table style</link>.</para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="tablestyle-delete">
+<title>Deleting a table style</title>
+<indexterm><primary>table styles</primary><secondary>deleting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To delete table style, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Table Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="tablestylist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>Select the table style you want to delete 
+by clicking once with the &LMB; on the name of the table style you want to delete.</para>
+<para>Click on the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button.</para>
+<note><para>&kword; will not allow you to delete the <emphasis>Plain</emphasis> table style. </para></note>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="tablestyle-reorder">
+<title>Changing the order of the table style in the list</title>
+<indexterm><primary>table styles</primary><secondary>reordering</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To change the order that the table style are listed, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Table Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="tablestylist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>The order the table styles are listed in the menu is determined by the order of the table styles in the list on the left.</para>
+<para>Select the table style you want to move from the list at the left by clicking once with the &LMB;.</para>
+<para>Now click on the <guiicon>Up Arrow</guiicon> and <guiicon>Down Arrow</guiicon> located at the bottom of the list of table styles.  
+This will move theselected table style up or down in the list of table styles.</para>
+<para>When you are satisfied with the order of the list, select <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="tablestyle-import">
+<title>Importing a table style from another &kword; file</title>
+<indexterm><primary>table styles</primary><secondary>importing</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To import a table style from another &kword; file, select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Table</guimenu><guimenuitem>Table Style Manager...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="tablestylist.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+<para>Click the button labeled <guibutton>Import From File</guibutton>.  You can 
+select the &kword; file using the <link linkend="file-dialog">file selection dialog</link>.  Choose your file, and click 
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>A new dialog box will appear listing all available table styles for importing.</para>
+<tip><para>If &kword; encounters a duplicate table style name in the selected file, it will append a number to the end of the
+table style name to identify the imported style.</para>
+<para>As an example, if you import the <emphasis>Plain</emphasis> table style from another &kword; file, &kword; will change
+the name to <emphasis>Plain-1</emphasis>.</para></tip>
+<para>Select <emphasis>all</emphasis> the table styles you want to import.  Then click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>The table styles will now appear at the bottom of your list of table styles.  Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
+to save the table styles in the new document.</para>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/tableprop1.png b/doc/kword/tableprop1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c581ec77d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tableprop1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/tableprop2.png b/doc/kword/tableprop2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8941d0d62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tableprop2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/tablestylist.png b/doc/kword/tablestylist.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e00625547
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tablestylist.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/tabstops.docbook b/doc/kword/tabstops.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..01fa83f18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tabstops.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,324 @@
+<sect1 id="tab-stops">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Using Tab Stops</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tab stops</primary><secondary>using</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>paragraph</primary><secondary>setting tab stops</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Tab stops are a (very useful) holdover from the days of
+typewriters.  They allow you to align text into columns quickly and
+easily.</para>
+
+<para>When a tab stop is in place, you can immediately jump to a
+horizontal position on the page by pressing the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key.  Tab stops
+are most commonly used to align columns in a table, or to automatically
+indent paragraphs.</para>
+
+<para>Tab stops are part of the properties of a paragraph.  Each
+paragraph keeps track of its own set of tab stops.  To view the tab
+stops of a particular paragraph, place the mouse pointer within a
+paragraph, click once, and check the top ruler.  The tab stops are
+marked as symbols in black. </para>
+
+<para>&kword; recognizes 4 types of tab stops.  Each of these types has
+a corresponding symbol to help you identify the type in the
+ruler.</para>
+
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="4" align="left">
+<thead>
+<row><entry align="center">Type</entry><entry align="center">Example</entry><entry align="center">Symbol</entry><entry align="center">Description</entry></row>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<row><entry>Right Tab Stop</entry>
+<entry align="left"><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="rtab2.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+<entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="rtab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+<entry>With a right tab stop, the right edge of the next set of words is aligned at the tab stop. </entry></row>
+
+<row><entry>Center Tab Stop</entry>
+<entry align="left"><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="ctab2.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+<entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="ctab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+<entry>With a center tab stop, the text is centered at the tab stop. </entry></row>
+
+<row><entry>Left Tab Stop</entry>
+<entry align="left"><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="ltab2.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+<entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="ltab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+<entry>With a left tab stop, the left edge of the next set of words is aligned at the tab stop. </entry></row>
+
+<row><entry>Decimal Tab Stop</entry>
+<entry align="left"><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="dtab2.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+<entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="dtab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/></imageobject></mediaobject></entry>
+<entry>With a decimal tab stop, the decimal points of the text are aligned at the tab stop. </entry></row>
+
+</tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+
+<sect2 id="tab-stop-setting">
+<title>Setting Tab Stops</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tab stops</primary><secondary>setting a new tab stop</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Tab stops can be set one of two ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para><link linkend="tab-stop-setting-rulers">Using the rulers of
+&kword;</link></para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para><link linkend="tab-stop-setting-dialog">Using a specialized dialog
+panel.</link></para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<sect3 id="tab-stop-setting-rulers">
+<title>Using the Ruler</title>
+
+<para>You can use the top ruler of &kword; to interactively insert tab
+stops.</para>
+
+<para>First, you should select the type of tab stop you want to
+use.</para>
+
+<para>Place the mouse cursor over the current tab character (located
+directly to the left of the top ruler).  Click once with the &RMB;.  A small popup menu
+will appear.  You can select the tab stop you want from the sub
+menu.</para>
+
+<tip>
+<para>You can also use the left mouse button to cycle through the
+different types of tab stops.  </para>
+
+<para>Click once on the current tab character, and the tab stop changes
+from left tab stop, to center tab stop.
+If you continue to click with the left mouse button, you will change to
+right tab stop, then to decimal tab stop,
+then back to left tab stop. </para>
+</tip>
+
+<para>Once you have the correct type of tab stop, you can simply place
+the mouse pointer on the top ruler bar at the desired position, and click once with the
+&LMB;.  This will place a tab
+stop at that position.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="tab-stop-setting-dialog">
+<title>Using the Dialog Box</title>
+
+<para>The fastest way to get to the tab stop dialog panel, is to select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paragraph...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar or type <keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Alt;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo>.  
+This will bring up a dialog box with 5 tabs. Click on the tab
+labeled <guilabel>Tabulators</guilabel>. </para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="fpara5.png" format="PNG"/>
+</imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>You can now add tab stops by:</para>
+
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic">
+<listitem>
+<para>Click the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button at the bottom of the list of tab stops.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Type the horizontal location of the tab stop in the space
+labeled <guilabel>Position</guilabel>.  The units used and the current frame width 
+are listed below the text box.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Select the type of tab stop from the list of radio buttons labeled 
+<guilabel>Alignment</guilabel>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Determine what you want to fill the empty space to the tab stop with.  
+In most cases this should be left as <guilabel>Blank</guilabel>. For information on other options in this section, see 
+<link linkend="tab-fill">Tab filling</link>.</para></listitem>
+
+</orderedlist>
+
+<para>You can now add another tab stop.  When you are done adding tab stops, you can click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to finish.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="tab-stop-moving">
+<title>Moving Tab Stops</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tab stops</primary><secondary>moving</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Tab stops can be moved one of two ways:</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para><link linkend="tab-stop-move-ruler">Using the rulers of
+&kword;</link></para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para><link linkend="tab-stop-move-dialog">Using a specialized dialog
+panel.</link></para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<sect3 id="tab-stop-move-ruler">
+<title>Using the Ruler</title>
+
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic">
+<listitem>
+<para>To move a tab stop with the ruler, place the mouse over the
+desired tab stop.  The mouse pointer will change to a double
+arrow.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Click and hold down the &LMB;.  Drag the tab
+stop to its new location</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>When the tab stop is where you want it, release the mouse
+button.</para>
+</listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="tab-stop-move-dialog">
+<title>Using the Dialog Box</title>
+
+<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paragraph...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar or type <keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Alt;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo>.  
+This will bring up a dialog box with 5 tabs. </para>
+
+<para>Click on the tab labeled <guilabel>Tabulators</guilabel></para>
+
+<para>A very fast way to edit existing tab stops is to simply double click on the
+tab stop you want to edit in the top ruler of &kword;.  This will also bring up
+the <guilabel>Tabulators</guilabel> dialog box with the desired tab stop already selected.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="fpara5.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic">
+<listitem>
+<para>Click on the tab stop you want moved.  The list of all tab stops
+is in the box on the left side of the dialog panel.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Type the horizontal location of the tab stop in the space
+labeled <guilabel>Position</guilabel>.  The units used and the current frame width 
+are listed below the text box.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>If you need to make changes, select the type of tab stop from the
+list labeled <guilabel>Alignment</guilabel> or change the white space character
+under <guilabel>Tab Leader</guilabel>.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when you are done moving all tab stops around.</para>
+</listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="tab-stop-remove">
+<title>Removing Tab Stops</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tab stops</primary><secondary>removing</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>tab stops</primary><secondary>deleting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>
+Tab stops can be removed one of two ways:
+</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para><link linkend="tab-stop-delete-rulers">Using the rulers of
+&kword;</link></para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para><link linkend="tab-stop-delete-dialog">Using a specialized dialog
+panel.</link></para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<sect3 id="tab-stop-delete-rulers">
+<title>Using the Ruler</title>
+
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic">
+<listitem>
+<para>To delete a tab stop with the ruler, place the mouse over the
+desired tab stop.  The mouse pointer will change to a double
+arrow.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Click and hold down the &RMB; on
+the mouse. A popup menu will appear.  Select <guimenuitem>Remove Tabulator</guimenuitem>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+</sect3>
+
+<sect3 id="tab-stop-delete-dialog">
+<title>Using the Dialog Box</title>
+
+<para>Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Format</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paragraph...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+from the menubar or type <keycombo action="simul">&Ctrl;&Alt;<keycap>P</keycap></keycombo>.  
+This will bring up a dialog box with 5 tabs. </para>
+
+<para>Click on the tab labeled <guilabel>Tabulators</guilabel></para>
+
+<para>A very fast way to edit existing tab stops is to simply double click on the
+tab stop you want to edit in the top ruler of &kword;.  This will also bring up
+the <guilabel>Tabulators</guilabel> dialog box with the desired tab stop already selected.</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="fpara5.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic">
+<listitem>
+<para>Click on the tab stop you want removed.  The list of all tab stops
+is in the box on the left side of the dialog panel</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para>Click the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button.</para>
+</listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+<note><para>You can delete all tab stops at once by clicking <guibutton>Delete All</guibutton>.</para>
+<para>&kword; will not prompt you prior to deleting all tabs, so make sure that is your intention prior to selecting the
+<guibutton>Delete All</guibutton> button.</para>
+</note>
+
+<para>When you are done deleting tab stops, you can click
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to finish.</para>
+
+</sect3>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="tab-fill">
+<title>Tab filling</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tab stops</primary><secondary>tab filling</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>By default, &kword; uses the standard tab function that you are familiar with when using a typewriter or most wordprocessing programs.
+You can, however, have &kword; insert dots or lines to fill the tab space.</para>
+<para>To change the way the tab fills work in &kword; you change the combo box labeled <guilabel>Filling:</guilabel>.  This combo box
+gives you many different line styles to choose from.</para>
+<para>You can change the thickness of the lines by using the <guilabel>Width:</guilabel> spin box.</para>
+
+
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/tb1.png b/doc/kword/tb1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7a02c80f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tb1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/tb2.png b/doc/kword/tb2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..efa6d8a4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tb2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/tb3.png b/doc/kword/tb3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a17c16b7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tb3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/tb4.png b/doc/kword/tb4.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a2dde5f5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tb4.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/tblsty.png b/doc/kword/tblsty.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e9beb7d6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tblsty.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/tbord.png b/doc/kword/tbord.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..557370bd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tbord.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/techinfo.docbook b/doc/kword/techinfo.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a2a7dd85b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/techinfo.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,246 @@
+<sect1 id="kword-file-format">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>&kword; file format</title>
+<indexterm><primary>&kword;</primary><secondary>file format</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; uses two open source, independently developed standards for
+its file format.  The combination was chosen for its balance between
+convenience and open development models.</para>
+
+<para>First, it should be noted that all &kword; files are multiple &XML;
+files that are compressed to reduce their space requirements. </para>
+
+<para>Select the &kword; version you are interested in:</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="kword-file-format-11">&kword; 1.1 and earlier</link>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="kword-file-format-12">&kword; 1.2</link>.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para><link linkend="kword-file-format-13">&kword; 1.3</link>.</para></listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<sect2 id="kword-file-format-11">
+<title>&kword; 1.1 and earlier</title>
+
+<para>The &XML; files are compressed into a single file using the same
+algorithm as used by <ulink
+url="http://www.gnu.org/software/tar/tar.html"><application>tar</application></ulink>.</para>
+
+<para>You can uncompress the files with the following command:</para>
+
+<screen width="40">
+<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput><command>tar -xzvf </command><replaceable>filename</replaceable></userinput>
+</screen>
+
+<para>This will expand the &kword; document file into its component
+files.</para>
+
+<para>The text portion of all &kword; files are &XML; (eXtensible Markup
+Language) files.</para>
+
+<note><para>For more information on &XML; documents, processors and
+technology, please visit <simplelist> <member><ulink
+url="http://www.w3.org/XML/">World Wide Web Consortium &XML;
+pages</ulink></member> <member><ulink
+url="http://www.xml.org/xml/resources_cover.shtml">XML.org Resource
+Guide</ulink></member> <member><ulink url="http://www.ucc.ie/xml/">The &XML;
+FAQ</ulink></member> </simplelist></para></note>
+
+<para>All &kword; documents consist of at least two &XML; files:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><filename>maindoc.xml</filename></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This file contains the bulk of the &kword; text, tables and formula
+information. It is marked with &XML; tags according to the official DTD.  A
+copy of the &kword; 1.1 DTD is located at: <ulink
+url="http://www.koffice.org/DTD/kword-1.1.dtd">http://www.koffice.org/DTD/kword-1.1.dtd</ulink>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><filename>documentinfo.xml</filename></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This file contains the document information.  This is information
+entered into the dialog boxes when selecting
+<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Document
+Information</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> from the menubar. This information
+is useful for tracking authors, contact information &etc;</para>
+<para>The DTD for &koffice; 1.1 is located at: <ulink
+url="http://www.koffice.org/DTD/document-info-1.1.dtd">http://www.koffice.org/DTD/document-info-1.1.dtd</ulink>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>In addition, there may be other files included in the &kword; document
+file.  Pictures, embedded documents and other binary information are stored
+within the &kword; document as separate files.</para>
+
+<para>For more specific information on &kword; file storage or other
+internal information, please see <ulink
+url="http://www.koffice.org/developer">The KOffice API</ulink> and the
+<ulink url="http://developer.kde.org">General &kde; developer information
+pages</ulink>.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="kword-file-format-12">
+<title>&kword; 1.2</title>
+
+<para>The text files are compressed into a single file using the same
+algorithm as used by <ulink
+url="http://www.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/Zip.html"><application>zip</application></ulink>.
+This change was made because of its broad use in other open source office
+suites and its improved performance with lower memory requirements.</para>
+<para>You can uncompress the files with the following command:</para>
+
+<screen width="40">
+<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput><command>unzip </command><replaceable>filename</replaceable></userinput>
+</screen>
+
+<para>This will expand the &kword; document file into its component
+files.</para> 
+
+<para>The text portion of all &kword; files are &XML;
+(eXtensible Markup Language) files.</para> 
+
+<note><para>For more information on &XML; documents, processing and
+technology, please visit <simplelist> <member><ulink
+url="http://www.w3.org/XML/">World Wide Web Consortium &XML;
+pages</ulink></member> <member><ulink
+url="http://www.xml.org/xml/resources_cover.shtml">XML.org Resource
+Guide</ulink></member> <member><ulink url="http://www.ucc.ie/xml/">The &XML;
+FAQ</ulink></member> </simplelist></para></note>
+
+<para>All &kword; documents consist of at least three files:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><filename>maindoc.xml</filename></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This file contains the bulk of the &kword; text, tables and formula
+information. It is marked with &XML; tags according to the official
+DTD.</para> <para>A copy of the &kword; 1.2 DTD is located at: <ulink
+url="http://www.koffice.org/DTD/kword-1.2.dtd">http://www.koffice.org/DTD/kword-1.2.dtd</ulink>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><filename>documentinfo.xml</filename></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This file contains the document information.  This is information
+entered into the dialog boxes when selecting
+<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Document
+Information</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> from the menubar. This information
+is useful for tracking authors, contact information etc.</para>
+<para>The DTD for &koffice; 1.2 is located at: <ulink
+url="http://www.koffice.org/DTD/document-info-1.2.dtd">http://koffice.kde.org/DTD/document-info-1.2.dtd</ulink>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><filename>mimetype</filename></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This file contains the mimetype for &kword; files.  This information
+is used by &kde; to determine that this is a &kword; file.</para>
+<para>This file always contains:
+<emphasis>application/x-kword</emphasis></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>In addition, there may be other files included in the &kword; document
+file.  Pictures, embedded documents and other binary information are stored
+within the &kword; document as separate files.</para>
+
+<para>For more specific information on &kword; file storage or other
+internal information, please see <ulink
+url="http://www.koffice.org/developer">The KOffice API</ulink> and the
+<ulink url="http://developer.kde.org">General &kde; developer information
+pages</ulink>.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="kword-file-format-13">
+<title>&kword; 1.3 (current version)</title>
+
+<para>The text files are compressed into a single file using the same
+algorithm as used by <ulink
+url="http://www.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/Zip.html"><application>zip</application></ulink>.
+This change was made because of its broad use in other open source office
+suites and its improved performance with lower memory requirements.</para>
+<para>You can uncompress the files with the following command:</para>
+
+<screen width="40">
+<prompt>%</prompt> <userinput><command>unzip </command><replaceable>filename</replaceable></userinput>
+</screen>
+
+<para>This will expand the &kword; document file into its component
+files.</para> 
+
+<para>The text portion of all &kword; files are &XML;
+(eXtensible Markup Language) files.</para> 
+
+<note><para>For more information on &XML; documents, processing and
+technology, please visit <simplelist> <member><ulink
+url="http://www.w3.org/XML/">World Wide Web Consortium &XML;
+pages</ulink></member> <member><ulink
+url="http://www.xml.org/xml/resources_cover.shtml">XML.org Resource
+Guide</ulink></member> <member><ulink url="http://www.ucc.ie/xml/">The &XML;
+FAQ</ulink></member> </simplelist></para></note>
+
+<para>All &kword; documents consist of at least three files:</para>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><filename>maindoc.xml</filename></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This file contains the bulk of the &kword; text, tables and formula
+information. It is marked with &XML; tags according to the official
+DTD.</para> <para>A copy of the &kword; 1.3 DTD is located at: <ulink
+url="http://www.koffice.org/DTD/kword-1.3.dtd">http://www.koffice.org/DTD/kword-1.3.dtd</ulink>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term><filename>documentinfo.xml</filename></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This file contains the document information.  This is information
+entered into the dialog boxes when selecting
+<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Document
+Information</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> from the menubar. This information
+is useful for tracking authors, contact information etc.</para>
+<para>The DTD for &koffice; 1.3 is located at: <ulink
+url="http://www.koffice.org/DTD/document-info-1.3.dtd">http://koffice.kde.org/DTD/document-info-1.3.dtd</ulink>.</para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+<varlistentry>
+<term><filename>mimetype</filename></term>
+<listitem>
+<para>This file contains the mimetype for &kword; files.  This information
+is used by &kde; to determine that this is a &kword; file.</para>
+<para>This file always contains:
+<emphasis>application/x-kword</emphasis></para>
+</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+
+</variablelist>
+
+<para>In addition, there may be other files included in the &kword; document
+file.  Pictures, embedded documents and other binary information are stored
+within the &kword; document as separate files.</para>
+
+<para>For more specific information on &kword; file storage or other
+internal information, please see <ulink
+url="http://www.koffice.org/developer">The KOffice API</ulink> and the
+<ulink url="http://developer.kde.org">General &kde; developer information
+pages</ulink>.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
diff --git a/doc/kword/tedittb.png b/doc/kword/tedittb.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f8c9ae5c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tedittb.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/templatecreation.docbook b/doc/kword/templatecreation.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..13023f763
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/templatecreation.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+<sect1 id="template-creation">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Creating Templates, Saving a document as a template and Deleting Templates</title>
+
+<para>&kword; comes with several predefined templates (both
+Page Layout and Text Oriented templates), which are designed
+to provide initial formatting of documents.</para>
+
+<para>If, however, the same format for a custom document is used over and
+over, &kword; can create a template which more
+exactly matches the needs of the document.</para>
+
+<para>An unlimited number of templates can be created in &kword;, and
+they can be organized into categories for easy recall.</para>
+
+<sect2 id="template-add"><title>Creating a new template</title>
+<indexterm><primary>templates</primary><secondary>creating</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Templates are created by first generating the layout in
+&kword; based on one of the predefined templates, and then saving the
+file.  Instead of saving it as a traditional file, it is saved as a
+template.</para>
+
+<para>What follows, is a step by step process to save the current
+document as a template.</para>
+
+<procedure>
+<step>
+<para>When the document is a completed template, Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Create Template From
+Document...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+
+<para>This brings up a dialog:</para>
+
+<screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject><imagedata fileref="savetmpl1.png" format="PNG"/></imageobject>
+</mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>This dialog helps organize the templates into
+groups (categories).</para>
+</step>
+<step><para>Select the group to place the new template into.</para>
+<note><para>To create a new group to place templates in, simply click the button
+labeled <guibutton>Add Group</guibutton>. A dialog box will appear asking for the
+name of the new group.  Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and the new group is created.</para></note>
+</step>
+<step>
+<para>Type in a name for the template in the text box labeled <guilabel>Name</guilabel>.</para>
+</step>
+
+<step><para>Select the icon for your new template by
+using the radio buttons on the right</para>
+<para>&kword; has a default icon, which is shown below both options.</para>
+<para>To change the icon, select <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> and a dialog box will appear.
+Simply select the desired icon using the dialog box.  Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when the icon is selected.</para>
+</step>
+
+<step><para>Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para></step>
+
+</procedure>
+
+<para>Once you have saved the template, the next time you open a
+document, your new category/new template will appear in the open file
+dialog.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+<sect2 id="template-delete"><title>Removing a template</title>
+<indexterm><primary>templates</primary><secondary>deleting</secondary></indexterm>
+<para>To delete a template, follow these steps:</para>
+<procedure>
+<step>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Create Template From
+Document...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+<para>This will bring up a dialog</para>
+</step>
+<step><para>Click on the small plus sign (+) in front of the template group where the template can be found.</para>
+</step>
+<step><para>Click once on the template name</para></step>
+<step><para>Click on the button labeled <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>.</para></step>
+<step><para>A small dialog box will appear verifying that you do intend to delete
+the template.  Simply click <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>.</para></step>
+</procedure>
+<para>The template is now deleted.</para>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="template-delete-group"><title>Removing a template group</title>
+<indexterm><primary>templates</primary><secondary>deleting template group</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To delete a group of templates, follow these steps:</para>
+<procedure>
+<step>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Create Template From
+Document...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+<para>This will bring up a dialog</para>
+</step>
+<step><para>Click once on the group name</para></step>
+<step><para>Click on the button labeled <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>.</para></step>
+<step><para>A small dialog box will appear verifying that you do intend to delete
+the group of templates.  Simply click <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>.</para></step>
+</procedure>
+<para>The group and all of the templates within the group are now deleted.</para>
+</sect2>
+
+</sect1>
diff --git a/doc/kword/textstyex.png b/doc/kword/textstyex.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d6189dbed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/textstyex.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/tfcreatebut.png b/doc/kword/tfcreatebut.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..753eb01b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tfcreatebut.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/thesaurus.png b/doc/kword/thesaurus.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6ed9fbc99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/thesaurus.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/toc.docbook b/doc/kword/toc.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e8cab6a38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/toc.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<sect1 id="toc">
+<sect1info>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</sect1info>
+<title>Table of Contents</title>
+<indexterm><primary>table of contents</primary><secondary>introduction</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>When writing a large document, it is useful to include a table of contents.  This can be done automatically
+with &kword;.</para>
+<para>To begin creating a table of contents &kword; needs to know what to include in the table of contents.
+The first part of this chapter describes how to prepare the document to generate an accurate table of contents.</para>
+<para>The second part of this section, discusses the actual generation and updating of the table of contents.</para>
+<para>The final part of this section provides pointers on changing the look of the table of contents.</para>
+<sect2 id="toc-prepare"><title>Preparing the document</title>
+<indexterm><primary>table of contents</primary><secondary>preparing document for</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&kword; uses a style-based method of creating table of contents entries.</para>
+<para>For more information on styles, see the <link linkend="styles">Styles</link> section of this documentation.</para>
+<para>To mark each level of the document, use the paragraph styles <guilabel>Head 1</guilabel>,
+<guilabel>Head 2</guilabel> and <guilabel>Head 3</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>Major subjects should be marked with the <guilabel>Head 1</guilabel> style. </para>
+<para>Sub-headings under the <guilabel>Head 1</guilabel> subjects should be marked with <guilabel>Head 2</guilabel>.</para>
+<para>Sub-headings under the <guilabel>Head 2</guilabel> subject headings should be marked with <guilabel>Head 3</guilabel></para>
+<para>Once this is done, proceed to the next section.</para>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="toc-create"><title>Creating the table of contents</title>
+<indexterm><primary>table of contents</primary><secondary>creating</secondary></indexterm>
+<indexterm><primary>table of contents</primary><secondary>updating</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To create the table of contents is easy.  Simply place the cursor in a text frame where the table of contents should be inserted.</para>
+<para>Select <menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Table of Contents</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+<para>&kword; locates all entries labeled with the appropriate paragraph styles, and their corresponding page numbers.  
+It assembles this into the
+table of contents.</para>
+<note><para>Once the table of contents is created, it will remain unchanged until &kword; is instructed to update it.</para>
+<para>To update the table of contents, click once with the &LMB; in the current table of contents.  Then select
+<menuchoice>
+<guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Update Table of Contents</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from
+the menubar.</para>
+<para>&kword; will replace the old table of contents with a newly updated one.</para></note>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 id="toc-style"><title>Changing the look of the table of contents.</title>
+<indexterm><primary>table of contents</primary><secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The look of the table of contents is also adjusted by using the paragraph styles in &kword;.</para>
+<para>The table of contents title is formated with the <guilabel>Contents Title</guilabel> paragraph style. 
+All major subject headings (those marked with the <guilabel>Head 1</guilabel> style), are now formatted
+using <guilabel>Contents Head 1</guilabel> paragraph style.  All sub-headings (those marked with the 
+<guilabel>Head 2</guilabel> style), are now formatted
+using <guilabel>Contents Head 2</guilabel> paragraph style.  Finally, all sub-headings (those marked with 
+the <guilabel>Head 3</guilabel> style), are now formatted
+using <guilabel>Contents Head 3</guilabel> paragraph style. </para>
+<para>By <link linkend="style-edit">changing the look</link> of those three styles, 
+the appearance of the
+table of contents can be radically changed.</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+
diff --git a/doc/kword/tts.png b/doc/kword/tts.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3b95737b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tts.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/tutorial.docbook b/doc/kword/tutorial.docbook
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6d9bc502d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/tutorial.docbook
@@ -0,0 +1,356 @@
+<chapter id="tutorial">
+<chapterinfo>
+<authorgroup>
+<author>
+<firstname>Mike</firstname>
+<surname>McBride</surname>
+</author>
+<!-- TRANS:ROLES_OF_TRANSLATORS -->
+</authorgroup>
+</chapterinfo>
+<title>Step by Step Tutorial</title>
+<indexterm><primary>tutorial</primary></indexterm>
+<para>This section is a step by step
+walk through of the most important functions needed to understand how
+to create and manipulate a complex document. This tutorial will generate the start of a
+newsletter as an example document. </para>
+
+<para>It is recommend that you go through the tutorial in order at
+least once if you are new to frame based word processors.</para>
+
+<sect1 id="choose-template">
+<title>Tutorial: Choosing the initial template</title>
+
+<note><para>The steps to this tutorial are numbered from 1 to 23.
+Beneath each step, is text in <emphasis>italics</emphasis> which further elaborates or explains the changes.</para></note>
+
+<para>When you first <link linkend="starting-kword">start &kword;</link> (or <link linkend="new-doc">start a new
+document</link> after &kword; is running), &kword; asks for a document template.</para>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata format="PNG" fileref="ChooseTempDia.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject>
+</mediaobject>
+
+<para><emphasis>Here you can either:</emphasis></para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+<para><emphasis>Select the initial template for your new
+document.</emphasis></para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+<para><emphasis>Open a &kword; document saved to your hard
+drive or network.</emphasis></para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<para>Step 1: Click on <guilabel>Page Layout</guilabel>.</para>
+
+<mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut1.png"/></imageobject><textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject>
+
+<para><emphasis>This will list the Page Layout templates available on
+your system. For information on the differences between Page Layout and Text Oriented templates, see the section entitled 
+<link linkend="wp-vs-dtp">The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout
+templates</link>.</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Step 2: Now select the <guilabel>Simple Layout</guilabel> icon by
+clicking once with the left button of your mouse.</para>
+
+<mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut2.png"/></imageobject><textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject>
+
+<para><emphasis>This is the template we will use for the
+tutorial</emphasis>.</para>
+
+<para>Step 3: Now confirm your selection by clicking on
+<guibutton>Use This Template</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG" fileref="Tut3.png"
+align="center"/></imageobject><textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject>
+
+<para><emphasis>To complete your selection</emphasis>.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>&kword; will open a new document with three frames. The
+frames are outlined on the white background, as gray boxes. Each box is
+a separate frame.</emphasis></para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="tutorial-frame-select">
+<title>Tutorial: Selecting a frame and entering text into that frame</title>
+
+<para><emphasis>To begin entering text (or adding any sort of data for
+that matter) into a document, its important to let &kword; know which
+frame to put the data in.</emphasis></para>
+
+<note>
+<para>In order to keep both editing and formatting of your document efficient and simple,
+the command executed with a mouse click changes depending on where in the &kword; window the pointer
+is located.</para>
+
+<para>When the pointer is located over toolbars, scrollbars, menu buttons or other areas
+<emphasis>outside the document</emphasis>, the pointer is an arrow. You should already be
+familiar with this type of pointer when using other &kde; programs. </para>
+<para>When <emphasis>inside the document</emphasis>, there are two separate pointers which alternate automatically
+based on how close to a frame edge the pointer is currently located.</para>
+<para>When the mouse pointer is near the edge of a frame, the pointer will change into two intersecting lines
+with arrows on all four points.  Clicking the left mouse button now will select the nearest frame.  </para>
+<para>As you move the pointer away from the edge of the frame, the pointer will change into the text entry pointer.
+Clicking the left mouse button at this time will tell &kword; to insert text into this frame.</para>
+</note>
+
+
+<para>Step 4: Place the mouse pointer over the upper-left frame.  
+Make sure you do not see the <emphasis>frame select pointer</emphasis></para>
+<para>Step 5: Click once with the left mouse button.</para>
+
+<mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut4.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject>
+
+<para><emphasis>This tells &kword; to insert text into this frame. Click in the upper left corner of the frame to position the cursor in the upper left corner of the frame. </emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Step 6: Enter the following text using the keyboard: <userinput>KWord Press Release</userinput>.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>This is some sample text for our
+newsletter.</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Step 7: Select <emphasis>KWord Press Release</emphasis> by placing
+the mouse cursor on the right end of the text.  Click once with the
+&LMB; and drag the mouse cursor
+to the left.  Selected text will be white text on a colored 
+background.  When all the text has been selected, release the &LMB;.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut7.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+<para><emphasis>This defines what text is going to be altered with Step 8.</emphasis></para>
+<para>Step 8: Click inside the <guilabel>Text Size</guilabel> combo box.  Change this
+number to 26.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut8.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>This changes the size of the selected text to one more
+appropriate for a title.</emphasis></para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="tutorial-resize-frame"> <title>Tutorial: Changing the size of a frame</title>
+
+<para><emphasis>Now that we have entered some text, we can see that the
+frame should extend across the entire width of the page for a title.  We need to change
+the size and shape of the frame. </emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Step 9: Place the mouse pointer over the frame border (you will notice the cursor
+changes to two intersecting lines with arrows), and click
+once with the &LMB;.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>This will select this frame, so it can be
+re-shaped.</emphasis></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>You will now notice the frame is outlined in black, with
+8 squares on the outline.  These squares are used for re-sizing the
+frame.</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Step 10: Place the mouse pointer over the square in the lower
+right corner of the frame. Click with the &LMB; and hold it
+down. Drag the mouse up and to the right.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut11a.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Notice how the frame changes shape.  Adjust the size and
+shape of the frame until it looks similar to the example below:</emphasis></para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut11b.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para>When it does, release the mouse button.</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="tutorial-move-frame"> 
+<title>Tutorial: Moving a frame on the page and layering frames</title>
+
+<para>Now that we have created a title block, we will center it at the
+top of the page.</para>
+
+<para>Step 11: Place the mouse pointer over the border of the frame (but
+not on any of the squares).</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>The pointer will now change to a 4 way arrow.  This
+indicates &kword; is ready to move the frame on the
+page.</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Step 12: Click and hold with the &LMB;. Drag the
+mouse, and the frame will follow it.  Position the frame in the center
+of the page near the top. When you are satisfied with its final
+location, release the mouse button.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut13.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para>Notice how the right side of the title block has slid behind the empty frame on the right. This is easily corrected.</para>
+
+<para>Step 13: Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Bring to Front</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut13a.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para>This will place the title on top of the other frame. You can raise and lower frames to give you the look you need.</para>
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="tutorial-add-frame"> 
+<title>Tutorial: Adding a new frame/Making text flow between two frames</title>
+<para>Now we will add a new text frame to our document for our first article.</para>
+<para>Step 14: Begin by selecting
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Text
+Frame</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menubar.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut14.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>The pointer has changed to cross-hairs.  You can draw
+your new text box with this cursor.  Start by placing the pointer at one
+corner.  Click and hold the <mousebutton>left</mousebutton> mouse
+button.  Drag the mouse diagonally.  An outline will appear which
+represents your new text frame.  When you have a text frame of
+reasonable size, release the <mousebutton>left</mousebutton> mouse
+button.</emphasis></para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut14a.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>It is not important if your text box does not resemble
+the example for the purposes of this tutorial.</emphasis></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>When you release the <mousebutton>left</mousebutton>
+mouse button, a new dialog box appears.</emphasis></para>
+
+
+<para><emphasis>This dialog box lists all the current frame sets and has a radio button to create a 
+new frame set (default value). By selecting the default value, you will
+create a new frame set (text will not flow from any other frame into this
+frame)</emphasis>.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Notice that the default name for this frameset is 
+<guilabel>Text Frameset 3</guilabel></emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Step 15: For the purposes of this tutorial, the default value of
+<guilabel>Create a new frameset</guilabel> is good.  Simply select
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut15.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Now you can see your new frame has been created. It is called
+<guilabel>Text Frameset 3</guilabel></emphasis></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>Now we are going to create another small frame right next to this one.</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Step 16: Select <menuchoice><guimenu>Insert</guimenu><guimenuitem>Text
+Frame</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut14.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para>Again using the crosshair pointer, draw another small frame near the first one.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut14b.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para>A dialog box will appear.</para>
+
+<para>Step 17: Select <guilabel>Text Frameset 3</guilabel> by clicking with the &LMB;.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut15b.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para>Step 18: Select <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut16.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>What you have just done, is connect this new textframe, to the last frame you created.
+  To test this:</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Step 19: Click once inside the leftmost frame with the &LMB;.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut18.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para>Step 20: Begin typing.  You will need to type quite a bit, but
+keep typing.  When you run out of space in the text frame, you will see
+your new text is moved immediately into your new text frame.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut19.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 id="tutorial-del-frame"> 
+<title>Tutorial: Deleting a frame</title>
+
+<para>Now we will delete an unneeded frame. We will delete
+the long text frame on the right side of the page.</para>
+
+<para>Step 21: Place the mouse pointer over the frame border of the right
+hand text frame (Remember: watch for the pointer to change), and click with the &LMB;.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut21.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>This selects the frame.</emphasis></para>
+
+<para>Step 22: Select
+<menuchoice><guimenu>Frames</guimenu><guimenuitem>Delete
+Frame</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+
+<para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata format="PNG"
+fileref="Tut22.png"/></imageobject>
+<textobject><phrase>Screen shot</phrase></textobject></mediaobject></para>
+
+<para><emphasis>A small dialog box appears, checking that you really intended to delete this frame.</emphasis></para>
+<para>Step 23: Select <guibutton>Delete</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<para><emphasis>This deletes the frame.</emphasis></para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 id="tutorial-summary">
+<title>Tutorial: Summary</title>
+
+<para>Hopefully this tutorial has introduced you to the most basic tasks in &kword;.</para>
+
+<para>At this point, you have :</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>Started a new document using a template</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Added text to a frame.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Resized text.</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Created, moved, resized and deleted frames.</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>The purpose of this tutorial was not to explore every aspect of &kword;, but to
+introduce you to the bare essentials.  Hopefully you understand the basic manipulation
+of frames.  From this point, you can refer to the specific sections of the manual for
+help, tips and advanced features of &kword;.</para>
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/doc/kword/undl.png b/doc/kword/undl.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..601137756
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/undl.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/undo.png b/doc/kword/undo.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6fa539ea1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/undo.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/value.png b/doc/kword/value.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3cc80d139
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/value.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/viewsize.png b/doc/kword/viewsize.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac2fdc48e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/viewsize.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/wbw.png b/doc/kword/wbw.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..62f4daa53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/wbw.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/wpfmtpg1.png b/doc/kword/wpfmtpg1.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..97710feb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/wpfmtpg1.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/wpfmtpg2.png b/doc/kword/wpfmtpg2.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..51ce12a1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/wpfmtpg2.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/wpfmtpg3.png b/doc/kword/wpfmtpg3.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d4e3f9e3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/wpfmtpg3.png
diff --git a/doc/kword/zoom.png b/doc/kword/zoom.png
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..694455ec1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/kword/zoom.png